Actros Kezelesi Konyv Angol

ACTROS Operating Instructions
Order no. 6462 0338 02 Part no. 930 584 01 81 EN Edition A, 09/02
A
CT
ORS
Op
e
art
ngi
nsI
t
ucr
ti
nos
Buchrcken (Versalhhe zentrisch)
Thank you for choosing MercedesBenz.

We recommend that you familiarise yourself with the vehicle, its operation and the
driving, control and comfort systems before starting your first journey.
Please ensure that you read the Operating
Instructions before starting your first journey. This will help to avoid endangering
yourself and others.
Since the scope of delivery depends on the
order, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from the equipment actually installed on the vehicle. The Operating
Instructions also describe items of optional equipment, if their operation needs explanation.
Country-specific vehicle equipment, limited availability of optional equipment or varying product designations are possible in
certain countries.
DaimlerChrysler reserves the right to introduce changes in design, equipment and

technical features at any time. You cannot,
therefore, base any claims on the data, illustrations or descriptions in these Operating Instructions.
Please consult your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre should you have any questions.
The Operating Instructions, Summary of
control elements, Maintenance Booklet
and equipment-dependent supplements
are an integral part of your vehicle. You
should therefore always keep them in the
vehicle and pass them on to the new owner
if you sell the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
DaimlerChrysler AG wishes you pleasant
and safe motoring.
Contents
1
Introduction
The aim of these Operating

Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Protection of the environment . . . . 10
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Mercedes-Benz original parts . . . . 11
Correct use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2
At a glance
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit switch units . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-function steering wheel . . . . .
Gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent gearshift unit . . . . . . . .
Telligent automatic
gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel switch units,
centre section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
18
20
22
25
26
26
27
28
Driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Co-driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Above windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Berth control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
29
30
31
32
Getting started
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening with the key . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening using the radio
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the door from
the outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock positions . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing for a journey . . . . . . . . . .
Checks before starting
a journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting the engine . . . . . . .
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . .
Adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . .
Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
34
35
36
36
37
38
38
40
41
41
44
45
45
46
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
After the engine has been
started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Releasing the parking brake . . . . .
Pulling away and changing gear . . .
Switching on the headlamps . . . . .
Indicating a turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying the parking brake . . . . . .
Stopping Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping Telligent gearshift . . .
Stopping Telligent automatic
gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the door from
the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking with the key . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking using the radio
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
49
50
52
52
59
60
61
62
62
63
63
63
64
65
65
65
Contents
4
Safety
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Operation of audio and mobile
communication equipment . . . . . . 73
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . 76
Telligent brake system (BS) . . . . . 77
ABS deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . 87
Telligent stability control (SR) . . . 90
Telligent roll control (WR) . . . . . . 95
Lane assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Reversing warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Folding underride guard . . . . . . . . 100
Controls in detail
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Opening and closing doors . . . . . 102
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Unlocking/locking door using
the "Door lock" switch . . . . . . . . . 104
Opening the door from inside . . . 105
Central locking with anti-theft
alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Enhanced central
locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . 109
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . 111
Seats and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Upper berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lower berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Starting and stopping
the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ADR emergency-off switch . . . . . . 126
Flame-start system . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Hillholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Headlamp range control . . . . . . . . 133
Switching on the front
foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Light switch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . 137
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Adjustable reading lamp . . . . . . . 143
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . 144
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Outside temperature display . . . . 147
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Reservoir pressure for brake
circuits 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Contents
Driver information system . . . . . . .
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver information system
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-function display . . . . . . . . .
Event message . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actros Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring info menu . . . . . . . . .
Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . .
Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New SMS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Event info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary heating menu . . . . . . . .
Alarm menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission control back-up
mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
MB item number . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Events menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Binary values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
151
152
154
156
157
160
161
166
169
169
169
171
175
177
178
182
183
207
207
209
210
213
213
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear change methods . . . . . . . . .
Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the splitter group . . . . .
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . .
Telligent gearshift . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent gearshift unit . . . . . . . .
Selecting neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Construction-site mode . . . . . . . .
Rapid change of direction . . . . . .
Telligent automatic gearshift . . .
Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent automatic
gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
215
215
216
216
217
218
218
218
219
220
221
222
225
228
229
229
230
231
231
232
Engaging forward gears . . . . . . . .

Selecting neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rapid change of direction . . . . . .
Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power take-offs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous brake . . . . . . . . . . . .
Idling speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching between various
driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control (combined
acceleration/braking control) . . .
Telligent distance control
(ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent level control . . . . . . . .
235
236
237
238
239
243
250
251
251
252
253
255
261
265
267
267
269
275
280
290
Contents
Starting-off aid,
three-axle vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hendrickson leading axle . . . . . . .
Trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telligent trailing axle . . . . . . . . .
Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen cleaning platform . . .
Climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating/heater air
conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic air conditioning . . . . . .
Auxiliary air conditioning . . . . . . .
Fresh air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
297
298
300
302
302
304
305
307
308
315
323
326
327
Open-air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Opening and closing the side
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Opening and closing the sliding/
tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Opening and closing the tilting
roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Opening and closing the roof
hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Cab stowage compartments
(interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
(exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Operating audio equipment . . . . . 359
Operation
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . 370
The first 1,250 miles
(2,000 km) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Trailer/semitrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trailer/semitrailer coupling . . . . . 373
Coupling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trailer/semitrailer monitoring . . . 378
Loading platform approach
aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Wind deflector on cab . . . . . . . . . 381
Side wind deflector on the cab . . 384
Tippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Tipper operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Contents
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Checking the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Changing the tyre size . . . . . . . . . 391
Tightening wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . 392
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . 397
Caring for the exterior of
your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Caring for the interior
of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Telligent maintenance
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Reconditioned components/
reconditioned parts . . . . . . . . . . . 409
High-pressure grease guns . . . . . 410
Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Maintenance flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Topping up the windscreen washer/
headlamp cleaning system . . . . . 419
Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Practical advice
Where will I find...? . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle tool kit and emergency
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift
(HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic-pneumatic gearshift
(EPS III S/EPS III SA) . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing
the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electro-hydraulic cab tilting
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilting the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and stopping the engine
with the cab tilted . . . . . . . . . . . .
430
430
434
434
437
440
444
448
449
451
453
453
461
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Engine emergency running
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Poly-V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Electromagnetic fan clutch
lock-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . 468
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Transmission control
back-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Teach-in procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Emergency gearshift (NMV) . . . . . 481
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Releasing the spring-loaded parking
brake if there is a failure of charge
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Releasing the spring-loaded
brake with an external source of
compressed air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Contents
Compressed-air system . . . . . . . . . 486
Charging the compressed-air
system via the front coupling
head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
system via the tyre inflator
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Pneumatic suspension . . . . . . . . . . 488
Charging the pneumatic suspension
from an external compressed-air
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Trailing axle, pneumatic . . . . . . . . 489
Nummek trailing axle,
hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Steering system/Telligent
steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Spare wheel location . . . . . . . . . . 491
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Tyre inflator connection . . . . . . . . 502
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Headlamp setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Partially masking headlamps
driving on left/right . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Unlocking and locking in
an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . 534
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
mechanically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Closing the tilting sunroof
mechanically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Jump-starting, tow-starting/
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Retrofitting the towing
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Technical data
Type plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Vehicle type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Engine type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Service products and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Service products and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Operating data overview . . . . . . 575
Tyre pressure table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Single tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Twin tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Compressed-air reservoir . . . . . . . . 585
Compressed-air reservoir
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Aluminium tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Steel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Radio type approvals . . . . . . . . . . 589
9
Glossary and index
Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Editorial office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Introduction
The aim of these Operating Instructions
These Operating Instructions are intended
to assist you in all situations with your vehicle. Each section has its own print register to help you find the information you
require quickly.
1
Introduction
This section explains the aim of these

Operating Instructions. Details about the
means of representation and the symbols
used will help you to find your way about
quickly.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the

controls you can operate from the driver's
seat.
3
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you

will need when you are driving the vehicle
for the first time. You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz
or if you have hired the vehicle.
4
Safety
This section describes all the safety features of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
This is where you will find more detailed information about the equipment in your vehicle. This section expands on the "Getting
started" section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of the vehicle, you
will find this section particularly interesting.
6
2
3
4
Operation
5
Here you will find all the information you
will need when you are driving the vehicle.
7
Practical advice
Here you will find practical help for possible problems.
7
8
9
Introduction
Technical data
All the important technical data for the
Glossary and index
2 vehicle is listed here.
The glossary of technical terms explains

the most important technical concepts.
The table of contents and the index are

intended to help you find information
quickly.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
You will find the following symbols used in
these Operating Instructions:
Warning
A warning draws your attention to possible

risks to safety, the human body, health and
life.
Environmental note
!
This note draws your attention to possible hazards to your vehicle.
i
This tip contains advice or further information you may find useful.
This symbol means that you have to do

something.
A number of these symbols one after

the other indicates a sequence of actions.
page
This symbol indicates the page

on which you will find further information on the subject.
This continuation symbol indicates an interrupted sequence

of actions that will be continued
on the next page.
An environmental note gives you tips on the

protection of the environment.
->
Display
This symbol in the glossary of

technical terms means that the
term following the arrow is also
explained.
Displays in the multi-function
display are printed in this font.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction
Protection of the environment
Protection of the environment
1
2
3
4
Environmental note
DaimlerChrysler's declared policy is one of

integrated environmental protection. This
policy starts at the root causes and encompasses in its management decisions all the
consequences for the environment which
could arise from production processes or
the products themselves.
As fuel consumption and engine, brake and

tyre wear depend heavily on the style of driving and operating conditions, please bear
the following in mind:
A regularly serviced vehicle contributes to

environmental protection. The driver information system indicates the service due
dates in the multi-function display.
Make sure that the tyre pressures are always correct.
Always have maintenance work carried out

at a qualified specialist workshop.
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit

a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related
systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not warm the engine up when the vehicle is stationary.

Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed.
The objectives are for the natural resources

which form the basis for our existence on
this planet to be used sparingly and in a
manner which takes the requirements of
both nature and humanity into account.
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally

compatible manner, and you will help to protect the environment.
Switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
8
9
10
Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Risk of accident
Work incorrectly carried out on electronic

equipment and its software could stop this
equipment working. Since the electronic
systems are networked, this might also affect systems that have not been modified.
Faults in the electronic systems could seriously impair the operational safety of your
vehicle.
Always have maintenance work carried out

The operating safety can be affected by other, unauthorised work or modifications to
the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz original parts

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you:
Use only Mercedes-Benz original parts and
conversion parts or accessories that have
been expressly approved by MercedesBenz for your type of vehicle.
These parts have been specially tested to
ensure their safety, reliability and suitability.
2
3
4
5
Some of the safety systems only work when

the engine is running. Therefore, do not
switch the engine off when the vehicle is in
motion.
6
7
8
9
11
Introduction
Operating safety
1 So that Mercedes-Benz can vouch for reliability, safety and suitability, the following
should be observed:
2 Do not exchange Mercedes-Benz origi3
nal parts or authorised conversion

parts or accessories for other parts
Do not modify the vehicle in any other
way
4 Only manufacture and assemble con5

6
7
8
9
version parts in accordance with the

Mercedes-Benz Body and Implement
Mounting Directives
Authorisation from Mercedes-Benz
should be sought should there be any
deviation from the Mercedes-Benz
Body and Implement Mounting Directives
!
Acceptance or approval granted by official test centres or the issue of official
permits does not rule out safety risks.
12
i
Further information is available from
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Correct use
Observe the following information when
using your vehicle:
the entire Operating Instructions, safety notes
the "Technical data" section in these
Operating Instructions
national road traffic regulations
national road traffic licensing regulations
Risk of injury
Various warning stickers are attached to

your vehicle. Their purpose is to make you
and others aware of various risks. You
should not, therefore, remove any of these
warning stickers unless expressly instructed
to do so by information on the sticker itself.
If you remove these warning stickers, you or
others may fail to recognise certain risks.
The result of this could be injury to yourself
or others.
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument panel
Cockpit switch units 1
Multi-function steering wheel
Telligent gearshift unit
Telligent automatic gearshift unit
2
3
Instrument panel switches, centre section

Driver's door 4
Co-driver's door
Above windscreen 5
Berth control panel
6
7
8
9
13
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
At a glance
Cockpit
Function
Page
Function
Page
1 Side sun visor
8 Interior lighting switch unit
31
2 Loudspeaker
9 Telephone bracket with microphone for hands-free

system
350
3 Sun visor
4 Switch unit above windscreen
31
a FleetBoard receiver
251
b FleetBoard monitor
6 Audio equipment/
navigation system
359
c FleetBoard computer
7 Stowage compartments
346
5 Tachograph
Function
e Light switch/
headlamp range control
Page
59
f Combination switch
Turn signals
60
Windscreen wipers
61
Main-beam headlamps
60
Horn
3
4
d Stowage compartments
5
6
7
8
9
15
At a glance
Cockpit
Function
g Instrument panel
Speedometer and trip
meter
144
144
Multi-function display
3
4
5
6
Page
8
9
16
Function
l Heating/air conditioning
control panel
Continuous brake
261
Limiter
269
Airflow
280
Air distribution/
recirculation
265
Temperature
Rev counter
144
Fuel gauge
148
Idling speed governor
Reservoir pressure
display for brake circuits 1 + 2
149
25
Page
j Multi-function lever
Telligent distance
control
h Multi-function steering
wheel
Function
k Cockpit switch units
22
Page
309
At a glance
Cockpit
Function
m Switch unit
Page
252
Transfer case
Function
n Ventilation and heating
vents
Page
307
Function
t Instrument panel switch
units, centre section
On-road selector position
o Lane assist camera
96
u Ashtray
p Driver's door control panel
29
v FleetBoard switch unit
Off-road selector position
q Light switch unit
Differential locks
Inter-axle lock, transfer
case
Cross-axle lock, rear
axle
r Parking brake
253
s Telligent automatic gearshift unit
135
52
231
28
2
344
w 12 V socket
357
x Electrical equipment compartment
522
y Co-driver's door control

panel
Driving mode selector

switch
Page
30
220
Cross-axle lock, front

axle
7
8
9
17
At a glance
Instrument panel
Instrument panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18
At a glance
Instrument panel
Function
Page
Function
7
Turn signal indicator

lamp
Page
Function
a
Rev counter with
144
Econometer
145
Instrument panel function buttons

144
159
Tractor vehicle
Clock
148
Reset trip meter
Trailer, semitrailer
147
Indicator lamps
Ambient temperature
display
Acknowledge event
message
STOP lamp
Fuel gauge
148
G Reset button
Speedometer with
Brake circuit 1 and 2

reservoir pressure display with
149
Instrument panel lighting
20
451
Trip meter
144
Total distance
recorder
144
156
Page
1
2
143
3
4
Brighter
Darker
Brake circuit 1 indicator lamp
Indicator lamps, depending on equipment
20
Brake circuit 2 indicator lamp
Additional indicator
lamps
20
6
7
8
9
19
At a glance
Instrument panel
Indicator lamps
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20
At a glance
Instrument panel
Function
Turn signal indicator
lamps
Page
60
1 Tractor vehicle, left
b Continuous brake;
Telligent automatic gearshift
3 Trailer/semitrailer, right
Flame-start system
4 Tractor vehicle, right
262
60
Lane assist (SPA)
3
129
Converter and clutch

unit (WSK)
261
7 Parking brake
130
8 STOP lamp
451
Telligent steering
system
9 Tilting cab lock
453
Hillholder
130
Tipper body
385
87, 90
96
6 Continuous brake
a Acceleration skid control

(ASR)/Telligent stability
control (SR)
Page
c Indicator lamps, depending on equipment
2 Trailer/semitrailer, left
5 Main-beam headlamps
Function
5
6
7
Loading tailgate
Auxiliary air-conditioning
323
8
9
21
At a glance
Cockpit switch units
Function
1 Switches ABS on/off
2
3
Page
85
Switches ASR/SR
on/off
87
Switches lane assist

on/off
Function
3 Anti-theft alarm system panic switch
111
96
ADR/GGVS emergency-off switch
126
453
356
Raised travel position
295
Starting-off aid
296
298
Raises/lowers the
trailing axle
Switches the electrohydraulic cab tilt

on/off
Raises/lowers
Nummek axle
299
Switches the 12 V
socket on/off
Telligent steering
system lock
300
2 Controls the heating/air

conditioning
8
9
22
116
Activates the anti-theft

alarm system
Page
307
4 Constant engine
speed
Engages/disengages
power take-off
255
255
At a glance
Function
Page
5 Changes horn to air

horn
Function
6 Switches the air conditioning on/off
Switches the hazard

warning lamps on/off
137
Switches the hillholder

on/off
130
Page
Function
Switches the auxiliary

heating on/off
327
7 Engages/disengages the
transfer case for on-road
or off-road selection
Charges the refrigerant accumulator
324
8 Engages/disengages the
differential locks
Switches the refrigerator on/off
315
309,
316
Page
252
253
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
23
At a glance
Function
2
3
4
5
Switch unit on left of multi-function

steering wheel
Page
1 Switches the work-area

lamp on/off
135
2 Switches the load compartment light on/off
135
3 Switches the rotating beacon lamp on/off
136
4 Cleans the headlamps
136
i
The layout of the switches can differ
depending on the vehicle equipment
level.
6
7
8
9
24
At a glance
1
FIS navigation buttons

FIS navigation
Forwards
Back
Navigation within a menu
Audio/telephone buttons
Adjusting volume of active
audio source e.g. telephone,
audio equipment or navigating within a menu list or making a selection.
j Forwards
Up/increases the volume
k Back
Down/decreases the volume
1
2
3
4
Making a telephone call

Accepts a telephone call/
direct entry into Redial list
Hangs up/direct entry into
Telephone menu
7
8
9
25
At a glance
Gearshift unit
Gearshift unit
2
3
Function button
Gear lever
Neutral button
Half-gear rocker switch
Telligent gearshift ( page 220)
4
5
Gearshift unit
6
7
8
9
26
At a glance
Gearshift unit
Function button
Gear lever
Neutral button
Half-gear rocker switch
Driving mode selector switch
1
2
3

( page 231)
4
5
Gearshift unit
6
7
8
9
27
At a glance
Instrument panel switch units, centre section
Instrument panel switch units, centre section
1
1
Function
Switches the heated windscreen on/off

level.
Switches the battery heating

on/off
Switches the loading tailgate

on/off
2
FleetBoard emergency call

Sends FleetBoard service
info
Sends FleetBoard message

to vehicle pool
User-definable FleetBoard
function
7
8
9
28
At a glance
Driver's door
Driver's door
Function
Page
1 Adjusts the airflow
307
2 Adjusts the airflow direction
307
3 Heated exterior mirrors indicator lamp
302
4 Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off
302
5 Adjusts the exterior mirrors
302
6 Selects the left-hand exterior mirror
302
7 Selects the right-hand exterior mirror
302
8 Locks the doors
104
9 Unlocks the doors
104
a Opens/closes the driver's

door window
338
b Opens/closes the codriver's door window
338
c Opens the door
105
2
3
4
5
8
9
29
At a glance
Co-driver's door
Co-driver's door
Function
Page
1 Adjusts the airflow direction
307
2 Adjusts the airflow
307
3 Unlocks the doors
104
4 Locks the doors
104
5 Switches the co-driver's

reading lamp on/off
140
6 Opens/closes the codriver's door window
338
7 Switches the interior lighting on/off
138
8 Opens the door
105
2
3
6
7
8
9
30
At a glance
Above windscreen
Above windscreen
Function
Page
1 Opens/closes the lefthand sun blind
Function
4 Audio equipment
5 Tachograph
Opens/closes the
right-hand sun blind
Page
73
251
Activates/deactivates
the sliding/tilting sunroof lock
341
Opens/closes the
sliding/tilting sunroof
340

level.
2
3
4
5
2 Stowage space, installation space for CB radio

3 Switches the interior
lighting on/off
138
Switches the driver's

reading lamp on/off
140
Switches the nightlight

on/off
141
Switches the ambient

lighting on/off
142
8
9
31
At a glance
Berth control panel
Berth control panel
Function
Page
1 Berth reading lamp
138
2 Switches the auxiliary

heating on/off
327
Audio equipment
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
32
3 Press briefly: Increases

the volume
Press and hold: Function
parallel with function on
audio equipment see the
manufacturer's operating
instructions
359
4 Press briefly: Decreases

the volume
Press and hold: Audio
equipment ON/OFF
359
Function
Page
5 Opens the sliding/tilting

sunroof
340
6 Closes the sliding/tilting

sunroof
340
7 Switches the interior lighting on/off
138
8 Switches the interior lighting off centrally
138
9 Switches the auxiliary air

conditioning on/off
323
Getting started
Opening
Preparing for a journey
Adjusting 1
Driving
Parking and closing
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
33
Getting started
Opening
Opening
1 The "Getting started" section contains

2
3
summarised information. This information

refers not only to the basic functions of the
vehicle but also to the steps that need to
be followed before starting a journey. You
should read this section in particular if this
is your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
Opening with the key
Unlocking
Only the driver's and the co-driver's
doors can be unlocked with the key.
4
5
Left-hand door
1 To unlock
2 To lock
6
7
8
9
34
Getting started
Opening
Unlocking the driver's door
Opening using the radio remote

control
The radio remote control will work regardless of the direction in which it is pointed.
The turn signals flash once.
It is also possible to unlock the vehicle

from some distance. To prevent theft, the
radio remote control should only be used
in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
The radio remote control unlocks the driver's door first and then the co-driver's
door.
Press the button once.
Radio remote control
1 Locking button
2 Unlocking button
Press and hold the locking/unlocking
button for approximately one second.
Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system:

The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
Unlocking the driver's and co-driver's

doors
Press the button twice.
The turn signals flash once.

6
7
8
9
35
Getting started
Opening
1
2
3
Getting in and out of the vehicle
Pull the door handle on the outside to

open the door.
Lower the driver's suspension seat

completely ( page 43).
Further information can be found in the

"Controls in detail" section ( page 102).
Swing the armrest up.
Do not use the seat armrest as a grab

handle. It is not designed to support
such a load.
Opening the door from the outside
Entrance
Risk of injury
There can be no guarantee that you can get

in and out of the vehicle safely if the grab
handles and the steps are not used. Do not
jump out of the cab.
5
6
There is a risk of slipping if the steps are not

kept clean.
7
8
9
Use the grab handles and steps provided.
Entrance (example)
1 Grab handles
36

Getting started
Opening
Ignition lock positions
Risk of accident
Under no circumstances should the ignition

lock be turned to position 0 when the vehicle is in motion. The ignition lock locks the
steering and the vehicle can no longer be
steered.
0 To insert or remove the key, to lock

the steering
1 To unlock the steering
Some consumers are operational

2 Drive position
3 To start the engine
Always remove the key from the ignition

lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you
are only leaving for a short time. Children or
unauthorised persons could otherwise start
the engine and set the vehicle in motion.
4
5
6
7
8
9
37
Getting started
Checks before starting a journey
Vehicle exterior
Page
Driver's vehicle checks
2 Inspect the vehicle outside and inside

before starting a journey.
3 Rectify identified faults before starting
Risk of fire and accident
Tyres and wheels
40
damages or destroys the tyres

causes the tyres to overheat until they
ignite
Check tyre pressures regularly before starting a journey and correct as necessary.
Check tyres for foreign objects and for damage before starting a journey.
38
Cab tilt lock

Steering wheel play
390
Semitrailer coupling1
Trailer coupling1
Insufficient tyre pressure

jeopardises operating safety
Check function of lighting,

turn signals and brake lamps
Page
Secure fastening of side trim

and quick-release locks
a journey.
Vehicle interior
1 Observe the operating instructions issued by the

manufacturer
Disc inserted in tachograph
453
51
251
Getting started
Emergency equipment/first-aid kit
First-aid
Breakdown equipment
The first-aid kit and breakdown equipment

can be found in the cab or in the exterior
stowage compartments ( page 430).
First-aid equipment:
Special tools in the vehicle tool bag and

vehicle document wallet
Check that the equipment can be accessed easily, and that it is complete
and intact.
First-aid kit
Warning triangle
Fire extinguisher
Warning lamp
Reflective safety jacket
Jack
Wheel wrench
2
3
Chocks
Tyre inflator hose
Have the fire extinguisher refilled after

every use.
Check at regular intervals that the firstaid kit is complete and usable.
Note the use-by dates of the contents.

Have the fire extinguisher checked
every 1 to 2 years. Otherwise it could
fail in an emergency.
7
8
9
39
Getting started
1 Trailer/semitrailer coupling
2
3
Before starting the engine
The trailer or semitrailer coupling is one of

the vehicle components which is particularly important to road safety. Please comply with the manufacturer's operating
instructions with regard to operation, care
and maintenance.
Fuel level
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Check the fuel level in the
fuel gauge. If necessary, refuel the
vehicle.
Further notes ( page 373).
4
Risk of accident
5
6
7
There should be no longitudinal play in the

trailer coupling. Otherwise there is a danger
of the trailer breaking free. Check the trailer
coupling daily for longitudinal play by moving the towbar firmly backwards and forwards. Do not hold the coupling jaws when
doing this. If any longitudinal play is detected, have it rectified immediately.
8
9
40
Vehicle check using the driver information system (FIS)

Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Vehicles with Telligent automatic
gearshift: The FIS shows the selected
mode of operation auto or man.
( page 232) in the multi-function display.
Any faults will be indicated in the multifunction display by means of an event
message ( page 156).
Press the or button on the

multi-function steering wheel to acknowledge the event message
( page 159).
Rectify the faults indicated.
Vehicle lighting, turn signals and brake
lamps
Following the function check, the driver information system checks the function of
the exterior lighting bulbs.
Check exterior lighting for cleanliness
and damage.
Rectify identified faults before starting
a journey.
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Seat
Adjusting the driver's suspension seat
(example)
1 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

2 Seat cushion forwards/backwards
3 n Vertical seat suspension
4 = Seat cushion angle
5 Seat height
6 o Seat lowering, easy-exit feature
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Pull adjusting bar 1 upwards.

Slide the seat forwards or backwards.
Adjust the distance to the pedals so
that you can depress them fully.
Release adjusting bar and engage it audibly.
2
3
4
7 Backrest
8 Armrest
5
6
7
8
9
41
Getting started
Adjusting
1 Seat cushion
Pull adjusting handle 2 upwards.
2 Slide seat cushion forwards or backwards.
3
4
Release the adjusting handle and engage it audibly.
Seat height
The seat suspension adjustment is infinitely adjustable.
Pull lever 5 up,
Adjust the seat suspension so that it

does not bottom out, even on poor road
surfaces.
Push lever 5 down,
Vertical seat suspension
Seat cushion angle
Pull lever 3 up to select a softer suspension setting.
Pull lever 4 up,
5 Push lever 3 down to select a harder

suspension setting.
adjust the seat by leaning backwards

or forwards on the seat cushion or
backrest,
release the lever.
6
7
8
9
42
the seat is raised.
the seat lowers.
i
The seat height is infinitely adjustable.
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat lowering, easy-exit feature
Backrest
Armrest
Pull lever 7 up.
Turn rotary button 8 beneath the armrest,
The backrest is pushed forwards in the

normal direction of travel under spring
loading.
Adjust the backrest by leaning backwards or forwards on the backrest
infinitely adjustable.
the armrest rises/lowers.

"Controls in detail" section
( page 118).
2
3
4
Release the lever.
The backrest is infinitely adjustable.
6
Push lever 6 down, the seat will
lower.
Pull lever 6 up, the seat will return to

the stored height setting.
8
9
43
Getting started
Adjusting
1
2
Adjusting the steering wheel

You can adjust the height and angle of the
steering column.
Risk of accident
An unlocked steering column could cause

you to lose control of the vehicle.
Adjust the steering column only when

the vehicle is stationary and the parking
brake is applied.
Do not unlock the steering column when

the vehicle is in motion.
With the vehicle stationary and the parking

brake applied:
Press the lower section of the steering

column lock switch.
The steering column is released.
7
1 Steering column lock switch
8
9
44
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.

Press the upper section of the steering
column lock switch.
The steering column locks.
i
If the steering column is unlocked, it
will relock itself automatically after
ten seconds.
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting the exterior mirrors

brake applied:
Select the exterior mirror you wish to
adjust by pressing button 1 or 2.
Adjust the exterior mirror by pressing
button 3.
Tachograph
i
A correctly filled out disc must always
be inserted in the tachograph for any
journey ( page 251). Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
2
3
4

"Controls in detail" section ( page 302)
5
6
1 To select the left-hand exterior mirror
2 To select the right-hand exterior mirror
3 To adjust the exterior mirrors
7
8
9
45
Getting started
Adjusting
1
2
3
4
5
6
Wearing seat belts

Ensure that all occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly for every journey.
Risk of accident
An incorrectly worn seat belt will not provide

the necessary degree of protection and
could even cause injury. For this reason,
make sure that all occupants, especially
pregnant women, wear their seat belts correctly for every trip. Always fasten your seat
belt before starting the vehicle. Airbags and
belt tensioners will only be able to perform
their protective function if the occupants are
wearing their seat belts properly.
7
8
9
46
Persons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear

the seat belt properly. They therefore require additional restraint systems for protection in an accident.
Under no circumstances should the seat
belts be modified. They will not be able to
function as intended.
i
The legal requirements for the use of
seat belts and restraint systems should
be observed at all times.
1 Belt tongue
2 Buckle
3 Release button
Getting started
Adjusting
Wearing seat belts correctly
Pull the belt smoothly from the seat
belt reel and route it over the shoulder.
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
Click belt tongue 1 into buckle 2 (it

must audibly engage).
Adjust the backrest to an almost vertical position.
Pass the belt over the middle of the

shoulder.
Check the seat belt during the journey

to ensure that it is still correctly routed.
The belt must not pass around the neck

or under the arm.
Releasing the seat belt
If necessary, pull the belt upwards in

front of the chest so that it rests tightly
against the chest.
The belt must cross over the hips as
low down as possible, i.e. over the hip
joint and not across the abdomen.
Press release button 3 in buckle.

Guide belt tongue 1 back to its out-ofuse position.
Risk of injury
Only one person should use each seat belt

at any one time.
Do not use seat belts to secure both objects

and persons.
The seat belt should always pass closely

over the body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing.
Under no circumstances should the seat

belts be modified. They might no longer
function correctly.
Seat belt warning system
Optional extra
A warning buzzer will sound for approximately 10 seconds if the driver's seat
belt is not engaged.
8
9
47
Getting started
Adjusting
1
2
Risk of injury
Replace the following items

seat belts
3
4
5
6
belt tensioners
airbags
if these have been subjected to a load in an
accident. The restraint systems should be
checked and replaced if necessary if they
have been subjected to a load or damaged
in an accident.
The maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
7
8
9
48


Getting started
Driving
Driving
Starting the engine
The starter inhibitor prevents the engine
from being started if a gear is selected and
the clutch pedal not fully depressed.
Shift the transmission to neutral.

Vehicles with Telligent gearshift or
Telligent automatic gearshift: The
transmission neutral position N must be
shown in the multi-function display.
Disengage power take-off.
The J power take-off display or the
c tipper body indicator lamp must
not light up.
Vehicles with flame-start system: Wait
until the q indicator lamp goes out
( page 129).
Transmission neutral position N
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and wait at least one second
until the immobiliser is deactivated.
Without depressing the accelerator

pedal, turn the key to position 3 and
hold it in this position until the engine
starts.
Do not drive off straight away. Leave

the engine to idle for a short time until
sufficient oil pressure has built up. This
prevents wear and potential damage to
the engine.
Quickly warm up the engine by driving

in the middle range of the engine
speed. Observe the green section in
the rev counter as you do this.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the engine will reach its operating
temperature after approximately
10 20 minutes. The engine's full power output becomes available once the
operating temperature has been
reached.
Release the key when the engine has

started.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
49
Getting started
Driving
Vehicles with hot-water auxiliary heating: At ambient temperatures below

20 C, pre-heat the engine before
starting ( page 327).
3 Further information can be found in the

After the engine has been started

Reservoir pressure in the compressedair system
There must be sufficient reservoir pressure
in the following pressure circuits before a
journey is started:
in brake circuit 1 or 2 3 the event
message with red status display must
go out
in the spring actuator pressure circuit

the ! indicator lamp in the instrument panel must go out
in the auxiliary consumers circuit

the event message with yellow status
display must go out
7
8
9
50
Event messages in the multi-function display indicate insufficient reservoir pressures. At the same time the STOP lamp will
light up.
Risk of accident
If the reservoir pressure in the compressedair system is too low it will not be possible to
brake the vehicle or to change gear. The operating reliability and road safety of the vehicle are jeopardised. Do not start off until
the reservoir pressures have been reached
and the STOP lamp goes out.
Getting started
Driving
Checking steering wheel play
With the engine running
turn the front wheels to the straightahead position.
Turn the steering wheel to left and
right. The front wheels must begin to
move when the steering wheel is
turned by not more than 30 mm
(1.2 in), measured at the steering
wheel rim.
If this is not the case, have the steering
and steering linkage checked immediately.
Risk of accident
If the steering wheel play is greater than

30 mm, the vehicle can no longer safely
maintain a straight line. The direction of
travel will need to be corrected continually.
The operating reliability and road safety of
the vehicle are jeopardised. Have the steering system inspected.
Cab tilt lock
The cab tilt lock indicator lamp in the

instrument panel must go out once the engine has been started.
If the indicator lamp does not go out:

Tilt the cab back to the driving position
( page 453).
Risk of accident
An unlocked cab could tilt forwards if the vehicle is braked sharply. Only start off once
the cab is tilted fully back and locked in this
position.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
51
Getting started
Driving
Releasing the parking brake
The ! parking brake indicator lamp

in the instrument panel will go out.
i
If the reservoir pressure in the parking
brake circuit is too low and the engine
cannot be started to charge the reservoirs, it is possible to release the
parking brake mechanically or pneumatically ( page 483).
3
4
5 1 Brake fully applied, lever engaged
6
7
8
Move the lever to release position 3.
2 To raise the lever

3 Released position
If necessary, wait until sufficient reservoir pressure has built up in the brake
circuits and the STOP lamp has gone
out.
Raise parking brake lever 2 out of fully
applied position 1.
52
Pulling away and changing gear

Risk of accident
The movement of the pedals must not be obstructed.

If floormats and carpets are fitted, ensure these are secured correctly and
cannot slip and that there is sufficient
pedal clearance.
Do not place any loose objects in the
driver's footwell. Such objects could interfere with the pedals in the event of
sudden acceleration or braking manoeuvres. The objects could block the pedals
and it might be impossible to brake, depress the clutch or accelerate.
Store all loose objects or secure them
so they cannot get into the driver's footwell during a journey.
Getting started
Driving
Do not start off if:

the reservoir pressure in brake circuit 1
or 2 3 is below 6.8 bar (event message with red status indicator)
the auxiliary consumer reservoir
pressure is too low (event message with yellow status indicator)
there is insufficient oil pressure
the STOP lamp is lit.
on vehicles with pneumatic suspension:
the chassis frame is not in the
drive
position.
Brake circuit 1 and 2 reservoir pressure display
1 Brake circuit indicator lamp 1

Do not drive off straight away. Leave

engine to idle for a short time until sufficient oil pressure has built up. This
prevents wear and potential damage to
the engine.
2
3
Quickly warm up the engine by driving

in the middle range of the engine
4
speed. Observe the green section in
the rev counter as you do this.
Depending on the ambient temperature, the engine will reach its operating 5
temperature after approximately
10 20 minutes. The engine's full pow6
er output becomes available once the
operating temperature has been
reached.
7
8
9
53
Getting started
Driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
If the warning signal sounds when shifting to a lower gear, do not engage the
clutch but select a higher gear instead.
There is a risk of engine damage from
overrevving.
Pulling away Hydro-pneumatic

gearshift
If the vehicle is driven at too high or too

low an engine speed, the engine will be
damaged.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Do not rely on hearing to judge

when to change gear. Observe the
green range in the rev counter.
Avoid the red range in the rev counter.
Under no circumstances should the
engine speed exceed 2,500 rpm
when the continuous brake is in operation.
8
9
54
DaimlerChrysler recommends pulling away

in 1st to 4th gear, depending on load and
gradient.
Move the gear lever to the desired
gear, but without using force.
Release the parking brake.
Slowly release the clutch pedal and
slowly depress the accelerator.
Immediately after pulling away, test the
service and parking brakes. Pay attention to the traffic situation as you do
this.
Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to
the left or right and that it slows down
in a controlled manner.
Risk of accident
If a brake or a brake circuit fails, do not continue the journey. Stop the vehicle at once
(road and traffic conditions permitting).

Getting started
Driving
Changing gear Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift
!
A warning signal heard when changing
down indicates that the target gear is
too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, do not engage the clutch. Select
the next highest gear instead. There is
a risk of engine damage.
Apply slightly increased pressure on
the gear lever to overcome the lock between the gear ranges.
Move the gear lever to the desired

gear, but without using force.
i
To change between gear ranges L and
H, e.g. when changing from 4th to
5th gear, the clutch pedal must remain
depressed.
Pulling away Telligent gearshift
If you wish to pull away from stationary in

transmission neutral position N, the
Telligent gearshift will only permit selection of the 1st to 4th gears or reverse gear.
Risk of accident
If the clutch pedal is released before a gear

is selected, the transmission remains in neutral.
Depress the clutch pedal again within two
seconds and wait until the gear is selected.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
55
Getting started
Driving
Wait until the selected gear is engaged.
A selection sound is heard over the

central loudspeaker.
The gear engaged flashes briefly on the

left in the gear indicator.

this.
5
6 Depress the clutch pedal.
7
8
Press and hold down function button

1 and push gear lever forwards 2 until a resistance can be felt and hold in
this position.
The selected gear flashes briefly on the
right in the gear indicator.
56

Risk of accident

Getting started
Driving
Changing gear Telligent gearshift
Guide the gear lever in the direction of

gear engagement until a resistance can
be felt.
Pulling away Telligent automatic

gearshift
The optimum gear selected by the

Telligent system flashes briefly on the

A selection sound is heard in the central loudspeaker.

Release the gear lever.
1 To shift up
2 To shift down

1 Driving mode selector switch

M Manual mode
A Automatic mode
Press automatic mode A on the driving
mode selector switch.
The driver information system shows
auto in the multi-function display.
57
Getting started
Driving
Press function button 1.
Push gear lever 2 forwards.

Telligent automatic gearshift engages
a suitable gear.
right in the gear indicator and then
changes to the left position.
2
3
Release the parking brake and slowly

depress the accelerator.
The vehicle pulls away.
5
6
If a gear is selected when the auxiliary

consumer reservoir pressure is
too low, a system fault will result. The
engine must be stopped and restarted.
8
9
58

this.
Risk of accident

Getting started
Driving
Changing gear
Risk of accident
Accelerating
If the engine speed drops below 550 rpm,

Telligent automatic gearshift will switch
off. This could lead to critical driving situations when driving up or downhill. Do not let
the engine speed drop below 550 rpm.
Switching on the headlamps
Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the maximum speed is reached
for the driving situation and the gear
engaged, Telligent automatic gearshift selects the next highest optimum
gear.
2
3
4
Decelerating
Release the accelerator pedal.
Slowly depress the brake pedal.
Telligent automatic gearshift changes

down to the optimum gear.
Light switch
M Lights off
B Dipped-beam headlamps on
Turn the light switch to B.
7
8
9
59
Getting started
Driving
Switch on the lights.
2 Push the combination switch on the left

3
4
Indicating a turn
The combination switch can be found on
the left of the steering column.
Indicating a right turn

Engage combination switch in
position 1.
of the steering column forwards and

engage.
The / right turn signal indicator

lamp flashes in the instrument panel.
The A main-beam headlamps indicator lamp lights up in the instrument

panel.
If a trailer is attached, the right-hand

( trailer/semitrailer indicator lamp
also flashes.
Indicating a left turn
Engage combination switch in
position 2.
5
Combination switch
1 To indicate a right turn

2 To indicate a left turn
The & left turn signal indicator lamp

flashes in the instrument panel.
If a trailer is attached, the left-hand
) trailer/semitrailer indicator lamp
also flashes.
8
9
60
Getting started
Driving
Windscreen wipers
The combination switch can be found on
the left of the steering column.
Single wipe
Check at regular intervals that the wiper blades are clean and undamaged.
Turn the rotary switch briefly towards

the steering column up to the pressure
point.
The windscreen wiper wipes once without windscreen washer fluid.
Switching the windscreen wipers on

Turn rotary switch to the required position depending on the intensity of the
rain.
Windscreen wipers off
5 Intermittent wipe
Normal wipe
To switch the windscreen wipers on/off
Rapid wipe
Windscreen washer system
Wiping with windscreen washer fluid

Turn the rotary switch to the stop towards the steering column and hold in
this position.
4
5
Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the

windscreen as long as the rotary switch
is in the rearmost position.

7
8
9
61
Getting started
Parking and closing
Parking and closing
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press lever downwards, swing into test

position 3 and hold.
Applying the parking brake

Risk of accident
The braking efficiency of the parking brake

may not be sufficient on uphill or downhill
gradients to prevent the laden vehicle from
rolling away. In the test position, check
whether the braking force of the spring actuators is adequate to hold the vehicle. If necessary, the vehicle's wheels should be
chocked as an additional safety measure.
The vehicle could start moving spontaneously. Always check that the lever has engaged correctly in the fully applied position,
or else it may move back automatically to
the released position.
8
9
62
The vehicle must not move. If the braking force of the spring actuators on the
towing vehicle is not sufficient to hold
the vehicle, chock the wheels as an additional safety measure.
1 Released position
2 Fully-applied position
3 Test position
Swing lever out of released position 1
to fully-applied position 2.
Allow lever to swing back from test position 3 to fully-applied position 2

and engage in this position.
The ! parking brake indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument panel.
Getting started
Parking and closing
Stopping Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift
Brake the vehicle.
Depress the clutch pedal fully.
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Hold the vehicle using the service
brake or the parking brake
( see page 62).
Release the clutch pedal.
i
When the transmission is in neutral, the
gear lever is in the gate between 3rd
and 4th gear, or between 5th and
6th gear.
Stopping Telligent gearshift

Brake the vehicle.
If necessary, change down a gear.
Press neutral button on gear lever.
N flashes on the right in the gear indica-
tor.
Telligent gearshift engages neutral.
brake or the parking brake
( see page 62).
Stopping Telligent automatic

gearshift
Risk of accident
The vehicle could roll away with the engine

running and a gear engaged. Telligent automatic gearshift disengages automatically
when the idle speed is reached.
3
4
Always hold the vehicle using the service

brake or the parking brake when you stop.
5
Brake the vehicle.
Telligent automatic gearshift disengages automatically just before the idle
speed is reached.
6
7
Automatic mode (A):

When the vehicle is stationary, a pullaway gear is selected.
63
Getting started
Parking and closing
i
Manual mode (M):
When the vehicle is stationary, the selected gear remains engaged.
3 Stopping the engine Telligent automatic gearshift
Risk of accident
A parked vehicle could roll away as the

Telligent automatic gearshift always engages neutral position once the engine has
been switched off. You cannot park the vehicle with a gear engaged. Always hold the vehicle using the parking brake.
Stopping the engine

Leave engine running for approximately one to two minutes at idle if
the coolant temperature is above
95 C
it had been run at maximum output,
e.g. uphill.
Release the accelerator pedal.
Stop the vehicle.
Apply the parking brake

( see page 62).
Turn the key back to position 0 in the

ignition lock.
Press neutral button 1 on the gear lever.

N flashes on the right in the gear indicator.
Telligent gearshift engages neutral.

Switch off the engine.
8
9
64
Getting started
Parking and closing
Opening the door from the inside
Locking with the key
Locking using the radio remote

control
The radio remote control will work regardless of the direction in which it is pointed.
from some distance. To avoid theft, the radio remote control should only be used in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
Left-hand door
Pull interior door handle 1 to open

door
1 To unlock
2 To lock
A locked door can always be opened

from the inside using the interior door
handle.
The driver's and co-driver's door always lock simultaneously.
3
4
The radio remote control

1 Interior door handle
Locks the driver's and co-driver's door

centrally
Locks the side windows automatically
on vehicles with enhanced central locking system
5
6
Locks the sliding/tilting sunroof auto7

matically on vehicles with enhanced
central locking system, depending on
the position of the lock switch
8
9
65
Getting started
Parking and closing
1 Activates/deactivates the anti-theft

alarm system.
Press locking button 1 for approximately one second.

The driver's and co-driver's door will
lock.
Opened side windows close automatically.
The turn signals will flash 3 times.
The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically, depending on the position of

the lock switch.
3
Risk of injury
Take care when closing the power windows

and the sliding/tilting sunroof that nobody
becomes trapped in them.
5
1 Locking button
2 Unlocking button

the vehicle.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. They could open a locked door from
the inside and endanger themselves and
others.
8
9
66
Vehicles with enhanced central locking

system:

The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
i
Turn signals only flash if the locking
procedure is successful.
Safety
Occupant safety
General
Driving safety systems 1
Underride guard
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
67
Safety
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
Restraint systems
This section describes the most important

aspects of the restraint systems of the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle equipment level,

the restraint systems consist of:
seat belts
4 belt tensioners
airbag
5 Seat belts, belt tensioners and the airbag

6
7
8
are supplementary restraint systems

whose protective functions complement
one another.
Always fasten your seat belt before starting off. Airbags and belt tensioners will
only be able to perform their protective
function if the occupants are wearing their
seat belts properly.
68
The driver's airbag and belt tensioners

are always installed together in a vehicle.
seat belts
belt tensioners
airbags
Risk of injury
Do not modify components of the restraint

systems or interfere with restraint system
wiring. The belt tensioners or airbag could
be triggered accidentally or fail to function
and therefore no longer protect in the event
of an accident.

accident. The restraint systems should be
checked and replaced if necessary if they
have been subjected to a load or damaged
in an accident.
Safety
Occupant safety
Seat belt
Wearing seat belts is a legal requirement in

many countries observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.
The locking action of the inertia reel can

be checked by pulling sharply on the
belt.
Regardless of such requirements, all occupants should wear a seat belt for every
journey.
Information about wearing seat belts can
be found in the "Getting started" section
( page 46).
This information applies only to seat belts
fitted at the plant in which the vehicle was
manufactured.
Inertia reel How it works
The inertia reel will prevent the belt strap
from being pulled out further if
the vehicle is decelerated suddenly in
any direction and
if the belt is pulled out sharply
Seat belt warning system

Optional extra
A warning buzzer will sound for approximately 10 seconds if the driver's seat
belt is not engaged.
Seat belts which have been subjected to a

heavy load in an accident must be replaced.
1
2

3
4
5
Always fasten your seat belt before starting

off. Airbags and belt tensioners will only be
able to perform their protective function if
the occupants are wearing their seat belts
properly.
Risk of injury
8
9
69
Safety
Occupant safety
1 Belt tensioners
2
In an impact, the belt tensioner tightens

the belt to pull it close to the body thus optimising the protective function of the seat
belt.
3
Risk of injury
4
5
6
7
Damage or accident-related stress to the restraint system (seat belt, anchor points, belt
tensioner or airbag) may mean that the system will not be able to provide the protection for the occupants. For this reason,
damage or accident-related stress to restraint systems should be inspected immediately at a qualified specialist workshop
and, if necessary, the system should be replaced.
8
9
70

Driver's airbag
The airbag offers additional protection
against injury and complements the protective functions of the belt tensioner and
seat belt.
The airbag is located beneath the padded
boss of the steering wheel.
Risk of injury
Airbags and belt tensioners will only be able

to perform their protective function effectively if the occupants are wearing their seat
belts properly and are sitting properly.
Because the airbag inflates in a matter of
milliseconds, there is a risk of serious injury
or death.
Safety
Occupant safety
Risk of injury
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury

caused by inflation of the airbag in milliseconds, observe the following:
Choose a seat position that allows you
to sit as far back from the airbag as possible, but still allows you to drive the vehicle safely.
Only hold the steering wheel by the rim.
Do not lean over the padded boss of the
steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion or when the key is in position 2
in the ignition lock. This allows the airbag to inflate fully.
Do not cover the padded boss of the
steering wheel or affix badges or stickers to it. Otherwise correct functioning
of the airbag cannot be guaranteed.
Because the airbag inflates in a matter

of milliseconds, there is a high risk of injury.
Severe injuries could be caused by being very near the point where the airbag
is triggered.
Do not touch any parts of the airbag
once it has been triggered. Parts of the
airbag could be hot.
Correct operation of the airbag module is no
longer guaranteed after 15 years of service.
For safety reasons, the airbag module
should be replaced after 15 years at the latest.

If you sell the vehicle, you should pass the
Operating Instructions on to the new owner.
The buyer or others would otherwise not be
aware of and be able to reduce the risks of
injury.
1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
71
Safety
Occupant safety
1 Function of airbag and belt tensioner

2
The airbag and belt tensioners are only operational once the key has been turned to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
The airbag and belt tensioners will be trig-
3 gered from a certain degree of vehicle deceleration, e.g. in a frontal collision.

The seat belt will tension automatically so
4 that the strap is close to the body.

5
6
i
Although smoke is released, this neither
constitutes a health hazard nor implies
that fire has broken out in the vehicle.
7
8
9
72
Risk of injury
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury

caused by inflation of the airbag in milliseconds, observe the following:
Choose a seat position that allows you
to sit a far back from the airbag as possible, but still allows you to drive the vehicle safely.
Ensure that small children are kept away
from the airbag inflation point as serious
or fatal injuries could otherwise result.
Safety
General
General
Navigation system
Risk of accident
Operation of audio and mobile

communication equipment
Stop the vehicle to enter data into the navigation system. Attention would otherwise
be drawn away from the traffic.
The navigation system is unable to take account of the load-bearing capacity of bridges or the permissible headroom in tunnels or
under bridges. The driver is responsible for
ensuring that bridge load-bearing capacities
and maximum headroom capacities are not
exceeded.
e.g. telephone, two-way radio, fax machine, etc.

Risk of accident
Operate the audio or mobile communication

equipment only when road and traffic conditions permit. Attention would otherwise be
drawn away from the traffic.
In the Federal Republic of Germany it is

forbidden to use mobile telephones
without a permanently installed handsfree system while the vehicle is in motion or while the engine is running.
2
3
Observe the legal requirements in all

countries concerned.
4
5
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle is
covering a distance of some 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
i
7

8
9
73
Safety
General
1 Operation and retrofitting of mobile te-
In the Federal Republic of Germany it is

forbidden to use mobile telephones
without a permanently installed handsfree system while the vehicle is in motion or while the engine is running.
Bank cards, credit cards or other cards

with magnetic strips should not be kept
near the telephone bracket and loudspeaker.
lephones, two-way radios and fax machines

Risk of accident
3
4
5
6
Operating mobile telephones, two-way radios and fax machines that have an aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in
the vehicle's electronic systems.

When retrofitting
As a result, the operating reliability and vehicle safety are considerably jeopardised.
mobile telephones
Only use the telephone with a permanently

installed hands-free system and if the traffic
conditions allow it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away from the traffic.
fax machines
7
8
9
74
two-way radios
the relevant installation specifications
issued by Mercedes-Benz are to be observed. Contravention of these specifications could invalidate the vehicle's
general operating permit
(EU Directive 95/54/EC).
If a magnetic strip is kept in the vicinity

of this equipment, the data stored on
the card could be deleted or modified.
Safety
General
Tyres
Risk of accident
Air conditioning
Tyres age from the influence of sunlight and

the environment. The rubber of the tyre
gradually loses its elasticity. Tyres become
harder and more brittle and they begin to
split through age.
Safety requirements
Specialist knowledge is required for service and repair work to the air conditioning.
For this reason, such work should only be
carried out by a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Tyres more than six years old are no longer

safe for use.
Risk of injury
Replace the tyres, irrespective of wear, after

six years at the latest. This also applies to
the spare wheel.
Leaking refrigerant from the air conditioning

can cause frostbite. Avoid all contact with
refrigerant. If refrigerant comes into contact
with the skin, consult a doctor immediately.
Checking the age of tyres ( page 390).
If the air conditioning is damaged in an

accident, do not switch the system on.
This could result in damage to the air
conditioning system.
Have the air conditioning system

checked.
The maintenance work should always

be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you
visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance
work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
4
5
6
7
8
9
75
Safety
Driving safety systems
1 The following driving safety systems are

described in this section:
Telligent brake system (BS) with ABS

Telligent brake system (BS) with ABS
and ASR
3 Telligent stability control (SR)
Telligent
roll control
4 Lane assist (SPA)

Reversing warning
5
6
i
During the winter, the best performance is only attained from the driving
safety systems in conjunction with
M+S tyres (winter tyres).
7
8
9
76
Risk of accident
The risk of an accident is higher:

at high speeds, especially when cornering
on wet or slippery road surfaces
if a safe distance is not kept from the vehicle in front
The driving safety systems are unable to
overcome the laws of physics. For this reason, adapt your driving style to current road
and weather conditions.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels from locking
when the brakes are applied. The vehicle
thus remains steerable.
It is operational from walking pace, regardless of road surface conditions.
Safety
Telligent brake system (BS)
The Telligent brake system features all

the control functions of ABS, ASR and SR.
The Telligent brake system ensures particularly good braking efficiency with an
even shorter braking distance. The
Telligent brake system can detect emergency braking situations via the integrated
brake assist system. To conserve the
wheel brakes, the Telligent brake system
can also employ the vehicle's engine
brake/retarder, depending on the laden
weight of the vehicle and the weather conditions.
The Telligent brake system imparts

control over the trailer that results in
the vehicle and trailer/semitrailer automatically contributing to the braking
effort of the entire vehicle and trailer
combination in accordance with their
weight. This means the vehicle and
trailer combination has improved braking characteristics. On 4 x 2 vehicle
and semitrailer combinations, the
Telligent brake system monitors the
temperature of the wheel brakes.
Function check
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock. The multi-function display will light up
for approximately two seconds. At the
same time, the warning buzzer sounds.
2
3
4
5
6
Function check of brake systems
1 ABS on tractor vehicle

2 ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS
on trailer/semitrailer
8
9
77
Safety
1 The multi-function display will then show:

ABS on tractor vehicle
2 or
3
ABS on tractor vehicle and

ABS on trailer/semitrailer
Risk of accident
If there is no display or
the display does not go out after three
seconds or
the display does not go out when the vehicle pulls away,
anti-lock protection is not guaranteed. The
vehicle cannot be steered if the wheels lock
during braking. The vehicle could skid due to
locked wheels. The vehicle can still be
slowed down using the normal brakes. Drive
with particular care. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible.
4
5
6
7
8
9
78

Safety
Event messages
Vehicles with Telligent brake system
(BS)
Risk of accident
An event message with a yellow status indicator means the braking characteristics
could be affected. Drive with particular care.
Have the brake system checked and repaired as soon as possible by a qualified
specialist workshop.

Risk of accident
An event message with a red status indicator means the braking characteristics are affected.
The pedal travel and pedal force required to brake the vehicle/vehicle and
trailer combination may be increased.
The anti-lock function may be deactivated.
The vehicle can still be slowed down using
the normal brakes. Drive with particular
care. Have the brake system checked and
repaired immediately by a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For
work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
that maintenance work is carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
79
Safety
or
without function restriction
Malfunctions in the Telligent stability

control (SR) are shown by the multifunction display as a Telligent brake
system (BS) event message.
3 Vehicles with Telligent brake system

(BS)
4 An event message from the tractor vehicle

5
6
7
brake system is shown by the multi-function display with:

function restriction
instructions
fault location and
system abbreviation "BS"
8
9
80
without instructions
but with fault location and
system abbreviation "BS"
At the same time, the status indicator will
light up yellow or red.
Tractor vehicle BS event message
(example)
1 System abbreviation
2 Status indicator (yellow or red)
3 Function restriction
4 Instructions
5 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
A Trailer/semitrailer
Safety
An event message from the trailer or semitrailer brake system is shown by the multifunction display:
with fault location and
the system abbreviation "ABS trailer/

semitrailer"
or for trailer/semitrailer and electropneumatic brake system with the system abbreviation "EAB".
At the same time, the status indicator will
light up yellow or red.
4
"ABS/EBS trailer" event message with ABS
fault message (example)
4 Instructions
5 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
"EBS trailer" event message (example)
4 Instructions
5 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
5
6
7
8
9
81
Safety
1 To drive the tractor unit without semitrailer

or with semitrailer without ABS:
Insert the connector of connecting cable in the "blank socket".

To drive the tractor vehicle with a semitrail-
3 er having ABS or electronic trailer brake:

4
Remove connector of connecting cable

from empty socket and insert in trailer
socket.
Semitrailer tractor vehicle (example)
Brake system memory function (example)
1 Blank socket
2 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin
Memory function of Telligent brake

system (BS)
When the key is turned to position 2 in the

ignition lock and there had been a dynamic
fault in the Telligent brake system the
last time the vehicle was driven, an event
message will indicate this.
4 Instructions
5 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
Semitrailer tractor vehicle (example)
82
Safety
Excessive wheel brake temperature
4 x 2 semitrailer tractor vehicles
An event message with yellow status indicator will indicate excessive temperatures
in the wheel brakes.
Drive with particular care. Adapt driving style and try to use the continuous
brake (exhaust brake/retarder) to
brake the vehicle where possible.
Once the wheel brake temperature
drops back below the critical level, the
display will go out.
The system is unable to detect and display increases in temperature caused

by defects in the wheel brakes (seized
calliper, reduced air gap etc.).
2
3
Risk of accident
An event message with a yellow status indicator means the braking characteristics
could be affected. Drive with particular care.
4
5
6
1 Excessive wheel brake temperature

event message
2 Status indicator (yellow)
7
8
9
83
Safety
1 Braking with anti-lock protection

2
3
4
5
6
In an emergency, apply full pressure to

brake pedal. This guarantees optimum deceleration of the vehicle.
Risk of accident
If a trailer/semitrailer without ABS is attached, this could be over-braked if the

brakes are applied fully. There is a danger
that control over the vehicle could be lost.
Avoid applying brakes fully unless it is an
emergency to prevent the wheels of the
trailer/semitrailer from locking.
7
8
9
84
The BS or ABS anti-lock braking systems do

not relieve you of the responsibility for
adopting a driving style which suits traffic
and road conditions. True running and steerability of the vehicle/vehicle and trailer
combination under braking is improved. The
anti-lock protection is not capable, however,
of overcoming the laws of physics and cannot protect against the consequences of not
keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in
front or excessive speed when cornering, for
instance.
If the multi-function display shows the

event message
ABS on trailer/semitrailer
or
ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS on
trailer/semitrailer
the anti-lock protection for the trailer/
semitrailer or for the tractor vehicle and
trailer/semitrailer is not operational.
Safety
Risk of accident
If the multi-function display shows just the

event message "ABS trailer/semitrailer",
there is a danger of the trailer/semitrailer
over-braking.
There is a danger of control over the vehicle
being lost if full braking effort is applied.
Avoid applying brakes fully unless it is an
emergency to prevent the wheels of the
trailer/semitrailer from locking.
Telligent
Vehicles without
automatic gearshift: On a slippery road surface, declutch as
well so that the ABS control system is not affected by the engine braking effect.
i
The continuous brake switches itself
off automatically during ABS intervention. The b indicator lamp does not
go out.
ABS deactivation
If ABS is switched off, it may be possible to
achieve shorter stopping distances on
rough terrain and on unmade roads
(e.g. soft or extremely corrugated surfaces
and on downhill slopes).
Risk of accident
2
3
4
The vehicle could skid due to locked wheels.

If ABS is switched off, the wheels may lock
and skid under braking. The vehicle cannot
be steered if the wheels lock during braking.
ABS must always be switched on when driving on public roads.
6
7
8
9
85
Safety
Deactivating ABS
i
The "Tractor vehicle and trailer/ semitrailer ABS off" display is only available
on trailers/semitrailers with EBS
Press upper section of switch 1.
ABS is deactivated.
The multi-function display shows tractor vehicle ABS off.
4
1 ABS OFF switch
i
On vehicles with ABS deactivation:
6
7
Deactivate ABS for off-road travel.

The next time the engine is started,
ABS is automatically activated.
Switch ABS off again for off-road driving.
8
9
86
1 Display for tractor vehicle ABS off

2 Status indicator (yellow)
3 Display for tractor vehicle and trailer/
semitrailer ABS off
On trailers/semitrailers with EBS, the

multi-function display shows tractor
vehicle and trailer/semitrailer ABS off.
At the same time, the status indicator
will light up yellow.
Safety
Reactivating ABS
ABS is reactivated.
The display in the multi-function display must go out.
Acceleration skid control (ASR)

Acceleration skid control prevents the
drive wheels from spinning when the vehicle pulls away or during acceleration, regardless of the road conditions.
Activating ASR
The v ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up and then goes
out after two seconds.
Risk of accident
If the ASR is switched off and the wheels

slip, the vehicle could skid.
1 ASR OFF switch
Acceleration skid control does not relieve

you of the responsibility of driving the vehicle in a manner which suits road and traffic
conditions.
If the indicator lamp does not go out, have
ASR checked.
6
7
8
9
87
Safety
1
2
3
4
5
Risk of accident

6
7
8
9
88
Driving with ASR
If the drive wheels start to spin on one or

both sides of the vehicle, ASR switches itself on automatically.
During the winter, the best performance is only attained from ASR in conjunction with winter tyres.
The v ASR indicator lamp lights up in

the instrument panel.
If traction problems occur when the vehicle is driven with chains or driven on
loose ground (e.g. sand or gravel),
switch off acceleration skid control.
If the drive wheels spin on one side,

ASR brakes them automatically.
If the drive wheels spin on both sides,
ASR automatically reduces engine
power output.
Vehicles with two driven rear axles:

On a slippery road, engage the "inter-axle"
differential lock ( page 253).
Safety
Deactivating ASR
Cruise control or the cruise control

continuous brake cannot be activated
during skid control.
If cruise control was already switched
on, it will remain active. It is not possible to accelerate or decelerate using
the cruise control function.
Reactivating ASR
Press upper section of switch 1 again.

ASR is activated. The v ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will go
out.
2
3
4
1 ASR OFF switch

ASR is deactivated. The v ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will
flash.
6
7
8
9
89
Safety
Telligent stability control (SR)

4 x 2 semitrailer tractor vehicles
2 Telligent stability control only operates
3
4
within physical limitations. In critical driving situations, such as sudden evasive manoeuvres or increased speed in corners, it
reduces skidding, jack-knifing or tipping of
the semitrailer. This is independent of the
load condition of the semitrailer or the type
of road surface.
Telligent stability control is operational regardless of whether or not the

service brake and continuous brake are
engaged.
Handling characteristics
Understeering
The vehicle moves off the correct path 1
over the front axle to the outer edge of the
carriageway 2.
1 Intended
2 Actual
8
9
90
The vehicle breaks away through the rear

axle. Moving off the intended path 3, the
vehicle turns toward the inner edge of the
carriageway 4.
Path correction (oversteering)

Path correction (understeering)
Oversteering
3 Intended
4 Actual
Safety
Activating SR
Deactivating SR
Press upper section of switch 1 again.

The v SR/ASR indicator
lamp lights up and should go out after
two seconds. This indicates that Telligent stability control is active.
i
When the key is turned to position 2 in
the ignition lock, Telligent stability
control is activated automatically.
Reactivating SR
1 SR OFF switch
The stability control and acceleration

skid control functions are active.
The flashing SR/ASR indicator

lamp v in the instrument panel will
go out.
Driving with SR
Telligent stability control is an extension

of the Telligent brake system (BS), which
already incorporates both ABS and ASR.
The stability control and acceleration

skid control functions are deactivated.
The v SR/ASR indicator lamp in

the instrument panel will flash.
7
8
9
91
Safety
1 If Telligent stability control recognises a
During automatic control, the v

SR/ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will light up.
critical driving situation, the following automatic control interventions will stabilise
the tractor and trailer combination:
Reduction in engine power output
3 Targeted intervention in the brake system on each wheel of the tractor vehicle individually
4 Actuation of the semitrailer brake system
5 Braking of the entire vehicle and trailer

combination
6
7
8
9
92
Risk of accident
Telligent stability control does not relieve

you of the responsibility of driving the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the loading of
the vehicle and the road and traffic conditions. Stability control is not capable, for example, of overcoming the laws of physics
and cannot protect against the consequences of the semitrailer vehicle being driven at
excessive speed in corners.
Excessive speed in corners could lead to
control over the vehicle being lost. Therefore, brake the vehicle in good time when
approaching corners, so that there is no
danger when cornering.
Safety
Telligent stability control is only active when the vehicle is moving at a

speed of at least 6 mph (10 km/h). If
reverse gear is engaged, stability control will be deactivated.
SR event message
During the winter, the best performance is only obtained from Telligent
stability control in conjunction with
M+S tyres (winter tyres).
Telligent stability control messages are

shown by the multi-function display as a
Telligent brake system (BS) event message.
Switch off Telligent stability control if

traction problems occur when driving
with snow chains or on loose surfaces
(e.g. sand and gravel).
At the same time, the multi-function display indicates any function restriction and
the status indicator lights up yellow.
Telligent stability control is then deactivated.
Telligent stability control is automatically deactivated:
if there is a malfunction in
Telligent stability control
Risk of accident
if there is a malfunction in
Telligent brake system which affects Telligent stability control.
Excessive speed when cornering could lead

to control over the vehicle being lost. Drive
with particular care. Therefore, brake the vehicle in good time when approaching corners, so that there is no danger when
cornering.
5
6
7
8
9
93
Safety
Acknowledging event message
Have Telligent stability control inspected.
Press the or button on

the multi-function steering wheel.

workshop.
or
If the cause of the malfunction is not

rectified when the engine is started
again, the event message is shown
again in the multi-function display.
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
94
Press the button on the instrument panel.

The message is cleared. The system
abbreviation is shown in the reminder
section.
Safety
Telligent roll control (WR)
4x2 and 6x2 vehicles with steel/airsprung front axle and air-sprung rear axle:
Telligent roll control controls the chassis
suspension electronically. Depending on
the laden weight of the vehicle, the driving
situation and the road properties, the
chassis suspension regulates itself automatically.
When driving,
rolling movements of bodies with a
high centre of gravity e.g. box bodies,
are reduced
safety in critical driving situations is increased, e.g. lane change or sudden
evasive manoeuvres
Malfunctions in Telligent roll control

are shown in the multi-function display.
An event message in the multi-function
display is indicated by the system abbreviation HM.
2
3
ride comfort is improved on poor road

surfaces
Telligent roll control is gentle on sensitive freight
pitching movements are reduced when

the vehicle pulls away or brakes
6
7
8
9
95
Safety
1
2
3
4
Risk of accident
If there is a Telligent roll control event

message, the risk of the vehicle tipping over
in corners is increased. The suspension's
damping characteristics may be affected.
Drive with particular care. Slow down in
particular when approaching corners.
Telligent roll control should be repaired as
soon as possible.


7
8
9
96
Lane assist
Lane assist is a convenience system which
continuously monitors the position of the
vehicle in relation to the roadside markings
through a camera behind the windscreen.
If the road lane markings are driven on or
crossed, an audible warning in the form of
a "rumble strip" noise will sound in the lefthand or right-hand cab loudspeaker.
1 "Lane assist" camera
Safety
Risk of accident
Lane assist is merely a tool to assist the driver. When driving, you are responsible for
keeping the vehicle on the correct lane and
in the correct direction.
Lane assist can only give a warning when
the road lane markings are driven over or
crossed if these are easily detectable.
Active Lane assist will not give a warning if:
the speed of the vehicle is below 40 mph
(60 km/h)
Risk of accident
Adverse weather conditions, such as:

snow
slush
heavy rain
and a very dirty windscreen
can impair the function of Lane assist. You
should therefore switch on the windscreen
wiper, for example, to keep the area around
the camera free from dirt.
Note that the function of Lane assist is limited:
if the lane markings are difficult to detect (e.g. if the road is covered by snow,
sand or debris)
if there are shadows or several markings

on the road (e.g. roadworks)
when the main-beam headlamps are

switched on
Risk of accident
in tight corners
a turn signal is on
the vehicle is decelerating
7
8
9
97
Safety
1 Switching on Lane assist

Lane assist is activated.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights
up. A brief crackling noise will be heard
from the loudspeakers in the cab.
2
3
4
5 1 Lane assist switch
6
7
8
9
98
If Lane assist was already activated before the engine was started, the crackling noise will be heard as the engine is
started.
The radio is automatically muted when
a Lane assist warning is being given.
i
If a Lane assist warning is not possible,
the f "Lane assist" indicator lamp
will light up in the instrument panel.
Switching off Lane assist
Lane assist is deactivated.
The indicator lamp in the switch will go
out.
Safety
Reversing warning
The reversing warning does not relieve you

of your duty to make sure that there are no
persons/obstacles behind the vehicle.
Risk of accident
The reversing warning is an audible warning device built into the rear lamp cluster
of the vehicle. The reversing warning is activated and emits a warning tone when reverse gear is engaged.
If necessary, a second person should assist

during manoeuvring.
3
4
1 Reversing warning
5
6
7
8
9
1. Legal requirement in Austria
99
Safety
Underride guard
Underride guard
1
2
Folding underride guard
Risk of accident
The underride guard can be folded up for

off-road journeys, for example.
The underride guard must be folded down

and locked in this position when the vehicle
is driven on public roads. Only this way can
a vehicle be prevented from becoming
jammed beneath the frame in the event of a
collision.
3
4
Underride guard (example)
5
6
7
Underride guard (example)
1 Unlocked
2 Locked
8
9
100
1 Unlocked
2 Locked
3 Folded down
4 Folded up
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Seats and berths
Starting and stopping the engine 1
Brakes
Lighting
Instrument panel
2
3

Gear selection 4
Driving
Driving systems 5
Good visibility
Climate control
Open-air
6
7
Features
8
9
101
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
1 The "Controls in detail" section contains
detailed information about the functions of

the vehicle.
2 Do not read this section until you are fully

3
conversant with the basic functions of the

vehicle.
You can read about the basic functions in
the "Getting started" section.
4
5
Opening and closing doors

Risk of accident and injury
Only drive with the doors properly closed. If

you open or close the doors while the vehicle is in motion there is a risk of injury.
the vehicle.
Do not leave children alone in the vehicle.
They could open a locked door from the inside and endanger themselves and others.
6
7
8
9
102
If you unlock the vehicle using the radio

remote control, you must open one of
the doors within 25 seconds. Otherwise the electronics system relocks the
vehicle.
handle.
Before the vehicle can be locked, all
doors must be closed. The lock-out protection prevents opened doors from
being locked.
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Vehicle key
Central locking
The
vehicle
is
equipped
with
a
special
key
When you unlock the vehicle using the
Included with the vehicle are two keys.
system. You can only start the engine usradio remote control, the interior light
lights up for approximately ten seconds. ing the keys coded to the vehicle.
Locking/unlocking driver's door
The interior light goes out when the
i
key in the steering lock is turned to poUnlocking/locking doors using the key
If a key is lost, obtaining a replacement
sition 1. If a door is open, the interior
is a time-consuming process which only
light goes out after approximately
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can
five minutes.
perform for you.
When pressing the buttons of the radio
For this reason, DaimlerChrysler recomremote control, always hold for approximends that you always keep an easily
mately one second. This avoids malaccessible spare key with you for emerfunctions.
gencies.
Left-hand door
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 unlocked
2 locked
8
9
103
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
1 Exterior door release mechanism

2
3
4
To lock
To open the door, pull the door handle

on the outside.
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes
out.
All doors must be closed. The vehicle

locks centrally.
Unlocking
Only the driver's and the co-driver's
door can be opened using the key.
Unlocking
To lock
The driver's and co-driver's door always lock simultaneously.
Press switch 3.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch flashes.
5
6
7
8
The vehicle unlocks centrally.
Unlocking/locking doors using

the "Door lock" switch
You can lock and unlock the vehicle centrally via the door lock switch in the control
panel of the driver's and co-driver's door.
This is useful, for example, to unlock the
co-driver's door from inside or to lock the
vehicle before driving off.
104
Door lock switch in driver's door
i
If the vehicle was locked from the outside, the anti-theft alarm system is activated if switch 3 is pressed.
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Opening the door from inside
Central locking with anti-theft alarm

system
Included with the vehicle are:
two keys
two radio remote controls
Unlocking/locking doors using key
The locking and unlocking function is the
same as on vehicles with central locking
( page 103).
1 Interior door handle

To open the door, pull door handle 1
on the inside.
To activate the anti-theft alarm system

at the same time, hold the key in the
locked position for longer than
two seconds.
The vehicle is locked. The turn signals
flash 3 times1.
The anti-theft alarm system is primed.
i
If there is no visual confirmation, the
anti-theft alarm system is activated but
at least one of the components that are
monitored is not in an operational condition and is not being monitored.
1
2
3
4
5
6
i
handle.
7
8
9
1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.
105
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
1 Locking and unlocking doors using the

radio remote control
Included with the vehicle are
The turn signals flash 3 times.
two radio remote controls
The turn signals flash once1.
The enhanced central locking system is an

extension of the central locking system.
Unlocking driver's and co-driver's door
5 Press the button twice.

Enhanced central locking system

two keys

Driver's and co-driver's door locks.
2 Unlocking driver's door

3
Locking driver's and co-driver's door
The turn signals only flash if the locking

procedure is successful. If there is no
confirmation from the turn signals1, not
all components/vehicle access points
monitored by the anti-theft alarm system are in the ready position
( page 111).
1 Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly
Unlocking/locking doors using the key

The vehicle should be locked using the key
in the same way as any standard central
locking system ( page 103).
If you lock a vehicle with enhanced central
locking system, the following also have to
be closed
the driver's and co-driver's door windows
the sliding/tilting sunroof
8
9
106
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Unlocking/locking doors using the key
The power windows feature protection

against entrapment.
The vehicle should be locked using the key

in the same way as any standard central
locking system ( page 103).
The closing function is interrupted if an

object prevents the side window from
closing fully.
The sliding/tilting sunroof remains
open if the closure lock is activated before you lock the vehicle ( page 341).
The enhanced central locking system is
only effective if
the key in the steering lock is in
position 0 or removed
you lock or unlock the vehicle using the
key in the driver's door or if you use the
radio remote control
both doors are closed
Locking and unlocking the doors using

the radio remote control
Unlocking the driver's door

Convenience opening
Hold key in driver's door lock for longer
than three seconds in the "unlock" position.

The driver's door unlocks

The turn signals flash once1
The side windows open
The sliding/tilting sunroof moves
into the raised position
Unlocking driver's and co-driver's door

Press the button twice.
5
6

When you release the key, the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof
stop moving.
7
8
9
107
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
1 Locking driver's and co-driver's door


The driver's and co-driver's door lock.
The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically, depending on the position of

the lock switch.
The turn signals flash three times1.
Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock
Protection against entrapment feature

in power windows.
Before locking, select position of

sliding/tilting sunroof on closure lock
switch.
Opened windows close automatically

when the vehicle is locked. The closing
function is interrupted if an object prevents the side window from closing fully.

i
7
Turn signals only flash if the locking

procedure is successful.
8
9
108
1 Closure lock switch
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Activating
Press the upper section of the P
closure lock switch.
up.
The next time the vehicle is locked, the
sliding/tilting sunroof remains open.

The radio remote control works regardless
of the direction in which it is pointed.
from some distance. To avoid theft, the radio remote control should only be used in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
Closes the sliding/tilting sunroof

automatically on vehicles with the enhanced central locking system, depending on the position of the closure
lock
1
2
Activates/deactivates the anti-theft

alarm system
The radio remote control

Deactivating
Press the upper section of the P
closure lock switch.
The indicator lamp in the switch should
go out.
The sliding/tilting sunroof closes when
the vehicle is locked.
Unlocks the driver's and co-driver's

door in succession
Locks the driver's and co-driver's door

centrally
Closes the side windows automatically

on vehicles with the enhanced central
locking system
1 Locking button
2 Unlocking button
109
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
1 Press and hold locking/unlocking button for approximately one second.
2
3
i
If you unlock the vehicle using the radio
remote control and none of the doors
are opened within 25 seconds, the vehicle locks itself again automatically.
4
Risk of injury
5
6
When closing the power windows and the

sliding/tilting sunroof, ensure that nobody
7
8
9
110
i
when the battery in the radio remote
control needs to be replaced.
Replacing the battery ( page 534).
Loss of a radio remote control
If a radio remote control is lost, a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can prevent further use by deactivating all of the
radio remote control units.
Be prepared to hand over all available

radio remote control units to the
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for recoding.
The vehicle can then only be locked/
unlocked with the recoded radio remote control units.
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Anti-theft alarm system

The anti-theft alarm system protects the
tractor vehicle and the attached trailer/
semitrailer against break-in and theft.
The activated anti-theft alarm system triggers an optical and acoustic alarm if:
a door is opened
the maintenance flap is opened
the cab is tilted
a stowage compartment is opened on
the driver's or co-driver's side
a connecting cable to the trailer or
semitrailer is disconnected
the driver's door is unlocked using the
"Lock door" switch in the driver's door
control panel if the vehicle was locked
from the outside
the voltage supply is interrupted due to

the battery terminal clamps being undone, for example.
supply to the anti-theft alarms is interrupted
the panic switch in the cab interior is
pressed
a signal is set off by sensors fitted by
the body manufacturer.
To activate the anti-theft alarm system
with monitoring of all sensors, the following must be observed:
Only those components that were in
the ready position, i.e. locked or attached, when the alarm was activated
will trigger an alarm.
The anti-theft alarm system only monitors closed or attached components.
The turn signals1 confirm the locking

procedure with activated anti-theft
alarm system only when all components are in the ready position.
1
2
On vehicles with enhanced central

locking system, the side windows close
first and then the sliding/tilting sunroof before the turn signals confirm
completion of the locking procedure.
It is possible to place a component in

the ready position up to ten seconds
after the anti-theft alarm system has
been activated. The anti-theft alarm
system then monitors this component.
The anti-theft alarm system cannot

monitor trailers or semitrailers with
LED tail lamps.
The multi-function display shows
Trailer cannot be monitored!.
6
7
8
9
1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly
111
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
1 Anti-theft alarm system for vehicles for

the transport of hazardous goods
Activating or deactivating the anti-theft

alarm system from outside the vehicle
The functional differences in the anti-theft

alarm system are listed as follows:
To lock the vehicle centrally and to activate

or deactivate the anti-theft alarm system:
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated and the voltage supply is interrupted
via the emergency-off switch, an alarm
sounds.
the radio remote control or
4 If the voltage supply has been inter5

6
7
rupted via the emergency-off switch,

the anti-theft alarm system cannot be
activated as the anti-theft alarm system will then sound an alarm.
Lock the vehicle using the key in
the driver's door to prevent an
alarm.
Do not hold the key in the locked
position for longer than one second. The anti-theft alarm system is
not primed.
8
9
112
the key (in driver's door only)

should be used.
i
The key in the ignition lock must be in
the 0 position or removed.
Activating using the key

When locking the vehicle, hold key in
the locked position for approximately
two seconds.
system: opened side windows and
sliding/tilting sunroof close automatically.
The vehicle locks and at the same time
the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Deactivating using the key
Unlock the vehicle by turning the key to
the unlock position ( page 103).
The vehicle is unlocked. The anti-theft
alarm system is deactivated.
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Deactivating using the radio remote
control
All turn signals and the indicator lamp
in the anti-theft alarm system switch
flash once1.
i
If none of the doors are opened within
25 seconds,
the vehicle locks itself again automatically
the anti-theft alarm system that
was previously deactivated is activated once again
Activating using the radio remote

control

system:
The driver's and co-driver's door lock.
The turn signals flash three times1.
The indicator lamp in the anti-theft
alarm system switch flashes if all monitored components are in the ready position.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
113
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
1 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp

2
The indicator lamp in anti-theft alarm system switch 1 indicates to the driver the
status of the anti-theft alarm system in its
various stages of operation.
3
4
5
6
1 Anti-theft alarm system switch
7 If the anti-theft alarm system is activated:

The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes.
8
9
114
If the anti-theft alarm system is deactivated:

The indicator lamp in switch 1 is off.
Deactivating from inside the vehicle

Press the upper section of switch 1
once.
Activating or deactivating the anti-theft

alarm system from inside the vehicle
If the anti-theft alarm system is switched

on from inside the vehicle, it can only be
switched off in this way.
The indicator lamp in switch 1 goes

out.
Activating from inside the vehicle
Vehicles with immobiliser:

once.
If you activated the anti-theft alarm

system from inside the vehicle, you can
deactivate it by starting the engine.

The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes.
Both doors lock at the same time.
The prerequisite is that the immobiliser

can recognise the key.
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
The multi-function display indicates
Anti-theft alarm
a malfunction
If an alarm is activated, all turn signals and

the dipped-beam headlamps flash and the
alarm sounds.
an alarm source that is not in the ready

position (closed or attached) when the
anti-theft alarm system is activated
from inside the vehicle ( page 111).
The event message indicates the alarm
sources to be checked and, if necessary,
an instruction on what to do.
Anti-theft alarm system event message
(example)
1 Alarm source
2 Instructions
1
2
After a predetermined period of approximately five minutes, the alarm switches

off.
The acoustic alarm switches off after approximately 30 seconds.
After the anti-theft alarm system is deactivated, the multi-function display shows an
alarm message when the ignition key is
turned to position 1 in the steering lock.
5
6
7
8
9
115
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
1 The multi-function display shows the
Panic alarm
2 The message must be acknowledged by
If more than one alarm was set off, the

multi-function display shows the first
alarm.
You can activate the panic alarm at any

time by pressing the anti-theft alarm system switch.
source of the alarm or the reason it was activated.

the driver.
3 Press the or button on the

multi-function steering wheel.
Cancelling the alarm

If an alarm is activated, it is possible to
cancel it by:
If the alarm is activated, all turn signals and

the dipped-beam headlamps flash and the
alarm horn sounds1.
Unlocking the vehicle using the radio

remote control
Pressing the button once.
Unlocking the vehicle using the key in

the driver's door
Turn the key in driver's door to the

"unlock" position and hold for
two seconds ( page 103)
Alarm message (example)
8 1 Source or reason why alarm was activated
If the alarm system has been activated

from inside the vehicle:
1 Anti-theft alarm system switch
Press the upper section of the antitheft alarm system switch in the
switch panel once ( page 114)
1. Great Britain: If the alarm is activated, only the
alarm horn sounds.
116
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Activating
Press the lower section of anti-theft
alarm system switch 1 once.
The panic alarm is activated.
Both doors lock.
On vehicles with enhanced central
locking system: Both side windows
close.
i
The closing function is interrupted if an
object prevents a side window from
closing fully.
Risk of injury
Take care when closing the power windows

and the sliding/tilting sunroof that nobody
the vehicle.
vehicle. They could open a locked door from
the inside and endanger themselves and
others.
To release
Press the lower section of anti-theft

alarm system switch 1 once.
The panic alarm switches off.
The doors remain locked.
The anti-theft alarm system maintains
its previous status.
2
3
4
i
The panic alarm switches off automatically after a maximum of 30 seconds.
The optical alarm terminates after a
maximum of five minutes. During this
period, the doors remain locked and
the anti-theft alarm system maintains
its previous status.
5
6
7
8
9
117
Controls in detail
Seats and berths
Seats and berths
Seats
The vehicle may be equipped with different

types of seats depending on the equipment level.
Observe the operating instructions issued

by the manufacturer.
Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary and with the parking brake
applied. The movement of the seat could
otherwise lead to you losing control over the
vehicle and causing an accident.
Adjusting the seat while driving would also

divert your attention away from the road and
traffic conditions.
8
9
Ensure, when adjusting the seat, that you

select a relaxed position that does not promote body fatigue.
The seat catches must audibly engage.
118
Make sure that none of the occupants or

you yourself become caught in the seat
when it is being adjusted.
i
Adjust backrest into vertical position, if
possible.
Ensure that all occupants have secured their

seat belts before commencing any journey
( page 46).
Set the distance to the pedals so that

you can comfortably depress them fully.
Before exiting the vehicle, lower the suspension seat fully, otherwise the seat could rise
and trap your legs between the steering
wheel and the seat.
With both hands on the steering wheel,

the arms should be slightly bent.
!
Vehicles with upper berth:
To avoid damage to the berth and
seats.
Fold up the berth before adjusting
the seat ( page 121).
Move the backrest forwards before
folding down the berth.
Adjust height adjustable head restraints so that the back of the head is
supported approximately at eye level.
Do not operate several control elements for seat adjustment at the same
time.
To prevent noises while driving, the codriver's seat should be fully lowered if it
is not being used.
Controls in detail
Seats and berths
Seat adjustment, driver's suspension
seat
"Getting started" section ( page 41).
Seat adjustment, co-driver's function
seat (example)
Adjusting the backrest
Folding up the seat cushion
Sit down on the seat and pull the adjustment lever 1 upwards.
Push seat cushion 2 towards the

backrest until the seat cushion audibly
engages (click).
The backrest moves forwards.

Apply or release pressure to/from
backrest to adjust backrest to desired
position.
Release adjustment lever.
Folding down the seat cushion

Push seat cushion 2 towards the
backrest again until the seat cushion
audibly disengages.
2
3
4
Fold down seat cushion 2.
5
6
7
8
1 Backrest adjustment lever
2 Seat cushion
119
Controls in detail
Seats and berths
1 Centre seat head restraint

2
3
4
5
Risk of injury
Removing the head restraint

Pull the head restraint up to the stop.
Simultaneously press in and hold the

retainers 1.
Only drive the vehicle with head restraints

fitted so that occupants are protected
against critical injuries should an accident
occur.
Adjust the head restraints so that they support the back of the head at approximately
eye level. This reduces the risk of injury to
the head and neck area in case of an accident or similar situation.
Pull the head restraint sharply up and

out.
Installing head restraints
Head restraint
1 Safety retainers
Insert head restraint in guides.

Push head restraint down to the stop.
The head restraint locks in place automatically.
Adjust to the desired position.
6
7
8
9
120
Controls in detail
Seats and berths
Folding the berth up
Upper berth
Risk of injury
Folding the berth down

(sleeping position)
To prevent damage to the berth and

seats, ensure that there is enough
space for the upper berth before it is
folded down. Move the backrests of the
driver's and co-driver's seats forward.
Only use the berth when the vehicle is stationary. It is forbidden for anyone to be in or
on the upper berth while the vehicle is in
motion.
3
4
Do not drive the vehicle unless the berth has

been folded up and is secured by the belts.
When folding the berth in/out, take care to
ensure that your fingers do not get trapped
between the parts of the berth.
i
Before adjusting the seats, fold the upper berth up. When doing this, avoid
damage to the berth and the backrest.
1 Belt buckles
Fold berth up and hold in place,

Push the securing belt tongues 1 into
the belt buckles until they audibly engage,
If necessary, adjust the seats back into

position.
7
2 Belt buckle release button
121
Controls in detail
Seats and berths
1 Lift berth up slightly, hold in place and
press the red release button of the belt

latches 2,
2 Release securing belt,

Fold the berth down.
Folding out the access step
Lower berth
Press against access step and then release.
Risk of injury
The access step folds out and engages

audibly.
3
Upper berth access step
Folding in the access step
The access step is there to assist you in ac-
Push release lever 1 downwards.

Push access step down onto stop.
in the instrument panel.
Take hand away from release lever 1.
4 cessing the upper berth and is integrated

5
6
7
8
1 Release lever
122
A person on the lower berth should be secured in place with the restraint system
when the vehicle is in motion.
When folding the berth in/out, take care to
ensure that your fingers do not get trapped
between the parts of the berth.
Controls in detail
Seats and berths
Use when the vehicle is in motion
Hook restraint system 2 in eye 1 on

cab roof.
i
The covers for the stowage compartments can be found beneath the mattress ( page 348).
3
4
Recliner
Lower berth restraint system
The recliner seat in the single cab is not designed to be used permanently as a codriver's seat. However, for exceptional
cases, it can be used as a seat for passengers.
5
Recliner
7
8
9
123
Controls in detail
Seats and berths
1
2
3
4
5
Risk of injury
Fold backrest of co-driver's seat down

towards the seat cushion,
Make sure, before commencing any journey,

that the person occupying the recliner seat
has his/her seat belt applied ( page 46).
Position swivel bar 1 vertically and

engage downwards,
Fold up 1/3 part of mattress onto
backrest.
When converting the recliner into a berth,

make sure that no one can become caught
in the seat.
Conversion to recliner
When the seat is being used as a berth, the

person occupying it must be secured by:
Lower berth with two-part mattress
the seat belt ( page 122)
1 Swivel bar
the locked backrest securing bar
Conversion to berth
when the vehicle is in motion.
Fold 1/3 part of mattress onto 2/3

part,
Pull swivel bar 1 upwards vertically,
release and fold up towards the backrest,
Set up backrest towards cab backwall.
7
8
9
124
Controls in detail
Immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents the engine from
being started by unauthorised persons.
You can only start the engine using the
keys supplied with the vehicle.
The vehicle is equipped with a special key
system.
Deactivating the immobiliser

Turn the key in ignition lock to position
2. Hold in position 2 for approximately
0.5 seconds.
If the immobiliser recognises the coded
key, the immobiliser switches off. The
engine can be started.
i
Activating the immobiliser
Remove the key from the ignition lock.
The immobiliser electronics are activated.
If you do not hold the key in position for

the specified duration or an incorrect
key is used, the multi-function display
shows CODE.
If five unsuccessful attempts are made
with an incorrect key, the waiting period is extended by one minute every
time the key is used in an attempt to
start the engine.
For the waiting period, the key must be in

position 2 in the steering lock.
i
After four unsuccessful attempts, it
may be necessary to use the spare key.
Slowly turn the key. Wait briefly
(approximately 0.5 seconds) in
between positions 2 and 3 in the steering lock.
If a key is lost, obtaining a replacement
is a time-consuming process which
only a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
can perform for you.
For this reason, DaimlerChrysler recommends that you always keep an easily accessible spare key with you for
emergencies.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
125
Controls in detail
1
2
3
4
5
ADR emergency-off switch

Vehicles used for the transportation of hazardous goods:
Vehicles used for the transportation of hazardous goods are equipped with two emergency-off switches. The switches are
intended to allow isolation of the power
supply and to prevent spark generating
short circuits that could set off a fire or explosion.
The following components are supplied
with electricity even if the isolation switch
has been pressed:
6 Tachograph
7
8
9
126
i
If the voltage supply is interrupted by
actuation of the emergency-off switch
if the anti-theft alarm system is active,
the anti-theft alarm system sounds an
alarm. Ensure the anti-theft alarm system is deactivated before interrupting
the power supply using the emergencyoff switch.
Risk of accident
The switch interrupts the power supply to all

main electrical consumers.
The engine switches off automatically.
The following have no function:
Power steering
Vehicle lighting
Anti-lock protection
Electronic gear selection
The vehicle can no longer be kept under control.
Only operate the emergency-off switch if
there is imminent danger and the vehicle is
stationary. It must never be operated while
the vehicle is in motion.
Controls in detail
Emergency-off switch in cockpit
Activating
Deactivating
The switch is located in the cockpit on the

left or right-hand side next to the heater
control panel.
Fold cover upwards.
Push down cover until it audibly engages.
Remove switch pin 1.

All electrical consumers apart from the
tachograph and the anti-theft alarm
system are isolated from the power
supply system.
The voltage supply for all electrical consumers is reinstated.
2
3
4
5
6
1 Emergency-off switch (example)
7
8
9
127
Controls in detail
1 Emergency-off switch on outside of

2
Activating
Deactivating
vehicle
Open cover,
The switch is on the co-driver's side behind

the cab.
Push lever 1 upwards.
Push down cover until it audibly engages.
All electrical consumers apart from the

tachograph and the anti-theft alarm
system are isolated from the power
supply system.
3
4
5
6 1 Emergency-off switch
7
8
9
128
The voltage supply for all electrical consumers is reinstated.
Controls in detail
Flame-start system
At low ambient temperatures, the flamestart system makes it possible to quickly
and easily start the engine.
Environmental note
The advantages of the flame-start system

are:
The electronics system activates the

flame-start system at a temperature below
4 C as soon as the ignition lock is in
position 2. The q indicator lamp in the
instrument panel shows that the flamestart system is being primed.
When the engine has been started, the system remains active until the coolant temperature is at 0 C.
Optimal combustion which leads to
A considerable reduction in harmful exhaust emissions while the engine is

warming up
At coolant temperatures above 4 C,

the q indicator lamp lights up to
show the function check of the flamestart system.
Avoidance of poor cold running properties
The electronic system switches the

flame-start system off initially
if you start the engine while the
q indicator lamp is on.
Do not start the engine until the indicator lamp has gone out.
if you do not start the engine within
30 seconds after the q indicator lamp has gone out.
Activate the flame-start system
again before starting the engine.
2
3
4
5
6
Less load on battery and starter
7
8
9
129
Controls in detail
Brakes
Brakes
1
2
3
4
5
Parking brake
The parking brake is designed to prevent a
parked vehicle from rolling away. It actuates the spring-loaded cylinders.
i
Trailer/semitrailer parking brake, see
manufacturer's operating instructions.
Trailer/semitrailer with EU brake system:
If the trailer is attached, the parking
brake also has an effect on the service
brakes of the trailer/semitrailer.
6 Applying ( page 62) or releasing

( page 52) parking brake.
7
8
9
130
Hillholder
Activating hillholder
The hillholder is an extension of the

Telligent brake system and offers pulling
away assistance.
When pulling away on hills, the hillholder prevents the vehicle from rolling
backwards
When reversing up gradients, the hillholder prevents the vehicle from rolling
forwards
1 Hillholder switch
Press the upper section of hillholder
switch 1.
The hillholder is primed but not active.
Bring the vehicle to a halt using the
brakes.
The hillholder is active automatically.
The k hillholder indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument panel.
Controls in detail
Brakes
i
As long as you maintain even the slightest of pressure on the brake, clutch or
accelerator pedal, the hillholder remains active.
Deactivating hillholder
When you drive off in your vehicle, the hillholder is deactivated automatically.
The k hillholder indicator lamp in the
instrument panel goes out.
Risk of accident
If none of the pedals are pressed when the

hillholder is active (accelerator, clutch or
brake pedal), a warning buzzer sounds briefly. The hillholder is deactivated and the
k hillholder indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out. The vehicle could roll
away unintentionally.
Switching off hillholder
Press the lower section of hillholder

switch 1.
The k hillholder indicator lamp
goes out and the function of the hillholder is deactivated.
2
3
i
The hillholder remains primed as long
as upper section of switch 1 is
latched.
When you apply the parking brake,
the k hillholder indicator lamp in
the instrument panel goes out. The hillholder function is no longer active but
remains in the primed state.
4
5
6
7
8
9
131
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
1 Information about switching on lights and

turn signals ( page 59).
Light switch
There may be a slight deviation in the

function of the light switches described
here due to legal requirements in all
In countries where traffic drives on the

side of the road opposite to that which
is normal in the country where the vehicle was registered, there is a danger of
oncoming vehicles becoming dazzled
due to the symmetry of the dippedbeam headlamps.
3
M
Lights off
Side lamps, switch illumination
Dipped or main-beam headlamps on
Front foglamp indicator lamp

(green)
Rear foglamp indicator lamp

(yellow)
7
8
9
132
For journeys in these countries, mask

the headlamps ( page 517).
Controls in detail
Lighting
Headlamp range control

Depending on the laden state of the vehicle, the focus of the dipped-beam headlamps can rise or fall. Always adjust the
headlamp range control in such a way that
oncoming vehicles are not dazzled.
Reducing headlamp range
Switching on the front foglamps
Turn thumbwheel from position 0

downwards until the dipped-beam
headlamps no longer dazzle oncoming
vehicles.
Setting headlamp range to neutral
Turn thumbwheel to position 0.
4
5
With dipped-beam headlamps on:

Pull light switch out onto first stop.
The green indicator lamp in the
light switch lights up.
6
7
8
9
133
Controls in detail
Lighting
1 Switching on rear foglamps

2
3
Combination switch
With dipped-beam headlamps and front

foglamps on:
The combination switch is located to the

left of the steering column.
Pull light switch out onto second stop.
Indicating change of direction

( see page 60).
The yellow indicator lamp in the

indicator lamp lights up.
Switching on main-beam headlamps

Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Turn the light switch to position B.
The dipped-beam headlamps are on.
Push the combination switch in direction 1 onto detent.
The A main-beam headlamp indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights
up.
4
5
Headlamp flasher
Pull the light switch in direction 2.
6
2 Headlamp flasher
7
8
9
134
Controls in detail
Lighting
Light switch unit

The light switch unit is equipped for various lighting functions. The light switch unit
is located on the left next to the multi-function steering wheel.
Work-area lamp
Load compartment light
Switching on
Switching on

1.

F.

up.
Switching off
1.
The indicator lamp in the switch goes
out.
1 Work-area lamp
2 Load compartment light
3 Rotating beacon lamp
4 Headlamp cleaning system

up.
Switching off
F.

out.
The work-area lamp switches off automatically if the vehicle accelerates.
7
8
9
135
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rotating beacon lamp
Switching on

D.
up.
4
5
1 Work-area lamp
2 Load compartment light
3 Rotating beacon lamp
4 Headlamp cleaning system
Switching off
D.
out.
6
7
8
9
136
Headlamp cleaning system

Y.
The headlamp cleaning system sprays
washer fluid onto both headlamps for
approximately 0.3 seconds.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps will still operate
if the steering lock is in position 0.
Switching on hazard warning lamps
Switching off hazard warning lamps
Press switch 1.
Press switch 1 again.
The indicator lamp in the hazard warning lamp switch, the turn signal indicator lamps in the instrument panel and
all turn signals on the vehicle flash.
The indicator lamp in the hazard warning lamp switch, the turn signal indicator lamps in the instrument panel and
all turn signals on the vehicle go out.
1
2
3
4
5
1 Hazard warning lamp switch
6
7
8
9
137
Controls in detail
Lighting
1
2
3
4
Interior lighting
Interior lighting switches
In the vehicle interior there are four different types of lighting:

Interior lighting
Reading lamp
Nightlight (green)
Ambient lighting (blue)
The different modes of lighting can be
switched on and regulated individually.
5
6
i
If the voltage supply drops below 22 V,
the electronics system switches the interior lighting off.
7
8
9
138
Co-driver's door control panel

Switch unit above windscreen
1 Ambient lighting
2 Driver's reading lamp
3 Interior lighting
4 No interior lighting when door open
5 Nightlight
3 Interior lighting
6 Co-driver's reading lamp
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on interior lighting
Briefly touch switch 3 U.
i
From a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h), the electronics system
dims the cab lighting.
Berth switch unit
3 Interior lighting
7 Central interior lighting off switch
When you open a door, the interior and

entry lights light up. The lighting goes
out after approximately 30 minutes,
even if one of the doors is still open.
Switching lighting on when vehicle is in

motion
The electronics system switches the interior lighting on with reduced brightness.
1
2
3
i
The level of brightness can be adjusted
while the vehicle is motion.
4
5
Dimming interior lighting

Hold down switch 3 U.
The brightness is reduced. Dimming
continues for as long as the switch is
held down. Once dimming is reduced to
the minimum level, the function is reversed. Brightness increases.
6
7
8
9
139
Controls in detail
Lighting
1 Switching off interior lighting

Activating "no interior lighting when

door open" function
The interior lighting goes out.
2
or
3
4
5
Press and hold switch 4 L in the

switch unit above the windscreen until
a brief signal sounds.
Driver's and co-driver's reading lamp

If the interior and entry lights are to remain
off when the doors are opened:
Press and hold switch 4 L in the
switch unit above the windscreen until
a brief signal sounds.
7
8
9
140
If you switch the interior lights on before opening the door, they remain on.
Deactivating "no interior lighting when
door open" function
Press switch 7 I in berth switch

unit.
When you start the engine, the interior

lighting switches on by the door opening, is switched off by the electronics
system.
The switch for the driver's reading lamp

2 S is located in the switch unit above
the windscreen. The switch for the co-driver's reading lamp 6 S is located in the
control panel of the co-driver's door.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on reading lamp
Switching off reading lamp
Switching off nightlight
Briefly touch switch 2 S

or 6 S.
Briefly touch switch 2 S

or 6 S.
Press switch 5 Q in the switch

unit above the windscreen.
The respective reading lamp lights up.
The respective reading lamp goes out.
The nightlight goes out.
Dimming reading lamp
Nightlight (green)
Press and hold switch 2 S

or 6 S.
The nightlight or green light is dazzle-free

and intended to aid orientation while the
vehicle is in motion.

Switching on the nightlight
Press switch 5 Q in the switch

unit above the windscreen.
The nightlight lights up.
7
8
9
141
Controls in detail
Lighting
1 Ambient lighting (blue)

2
The ambient lighting is intended for the vehicle when it is parked.
Switching off ambient lighting
Press and hold switch 1 O in the

switch unit above the windscreen.
Briefly touch switch 1 O in the


3
4
5
6 Switching on ambient lighting
7
Dimming ambient lighting
Briefly touch switch 1 O in the

8
9
142
The ambient lighting goes out.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Instrument lighting
Brighter
The instrument lighting consists of the instrument panel lighting and switch illumination.
Press and hold the button until required degree of brightness has been
achieved.
Dimming instrument lighting
Darker
The degree of instrument lighting brightness can be adjusted using the

and buttons in the instrument panel.
Press and hold the button until required degree of brightness has been
achieved.
Adjustable reading lamp
2
3
4
5
Reading lamp
Switching on
Turn switch cover to position 1.

Switching off
Turn switch cover to position 2.
8
9
143
Controls in detail
Instrument panel
Instrument panel
1
2
Total distance recorder
Rev counter
Depending on the country, the speed and

distance travelled are recorded in miles or
kilometres.
The rev counter shows the engine speed.

The scale is split into three areas.
3 Resetting the trip meter

4
Press and hold button the button

in the instrument panel until the trip
meter is reset to zero.
5
6
1 Trip meter
2 Total distance recorder
7
8
9
144
Controls in detail
Instrument panel
1 Green
2 Yellow
Economical operating range

Engine brake operating range
The econometer is active
Operation of the vehicle in the economical

range has the following effects
at speeds above 12 mph ( 20 km/h)
low fuel consumption
3 Red
Overrevving range
low wear and tear
4 Green diode
strip
Econometer
In some exceptional circumstances, operation outside the economical range may be

necessary, for example:
if the relation between the engine

speed and the selected gear does not
appear to be correct at an almost constant speed
2
3
The econometer does not light up

if the engine speed is at an economical
level in terms of fuel consumption
on gradients
On vehicles that are used predominantly for long distance driving, the rev
counter features an econometer.
when overtaking
if the speed drops below 6 mph

(10 km/h)
Econometer
Several segments of the econometer light

up depending on the how much the engine
is placed under load. This range indicates
the most economical rev range in terms of
fuel consumption.

gearshift:
In the automatic mode of operation
Avoid overrevving range.

This could lead to engine damage.
7
8
9
145
Controls in detail
Instrument panel
1 The econometer goes out

2
Driving with the econometer
two seconds after the engine has

reached the displayed speed range
if high output is requested from the engine
3 if the clutch pedal is depressed for

longer than five seconds
4 if neutral is selected at the transmission for longer than five seconds.
5
6
7
8
9
146
If the engine speed is higher than the economical speed range indicated:
If the engine speed is lower than the economical speed range indicated:
select a higher gear.
select a lower gear.
Controls in detail
Instrument panel
Outside temperature display
Even if the outside temperature display

shows temperatures that are just above
freezing point, the roads could still be icy.
This applies in particular to shaded areas or
bridges.
Risk of accident
The display in the rev counter can show the

outside temperature in two temperature
scales.
Degrees Celsius (C)
Degrees Fahrenheit (F)
Changing the unit of measurement for
temperature ( page 205).
Extreme temperature changes are not

shown in the outside temperature display
immediately. This prevents an incorrect
reading as a result of the engine heat when
the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly.
1 Outside temperature display
3
4
5
6
i
Extreme temperature changes are not
shown in the outside temperature display immediately. This prevents an incorrect reading as a result of the
engine heat when the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly.
7
8
9
147
Controls in detail
Instrument panel
1
2
Time
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the quantity of fuel in
all fuel tanks of the vehicle.
The display in the rev counter can show the

time in two different ways depending on
requirement.
If the fuel volume drops to 14% of the maximum level, an event message is shown in
the multi-function display indicating this.
12 hour mode
3 24 hour mode
Changing clock mode ( page 206).
4
5
6
1 12 hour clock mode
7
8
9
148
Controls in detail
Instrument panel
i
The volume of fuel in litres and the distance that can be travelled with that
amount of fuel can be called up in the
driver information system in the trip
computer menu ( page 166).

circuits 1 and 2
The instrument shows the pressure in the
brake circuit with the least amount of pressure. The brake circuit in question is
shown by an active indicator lamp.
If the reservoir pressure in one of the brake
circuits drops below 6.8 bar, an event
message is shown in the multi-function display indicating this.
2
3
4
The reservoir pressure of both brake circuits can be called up in the monitoring
info menu ( page 162).
6
7
8
9
149
Controls in detail
1 The driver information system is activated

when the key in the ignition lock is in
position 2.
Maintenance
2 The driver information system features the

following functions:
5
6
7
Page
Information about vehicle
operation
Digital speedometer
160
Monitoring info
161
Trip computer
166
Control functions
Navigation system
Operating audio equipment
359
Mobile telephone
350
Reading Fleetboard text

message
169
Auxiliary heating
177
Wakeup call
178
8
9
Viewing/confirming service
due dates
171
Settings
3
4
Page
150
Display configuration
183
Activating menu
183
Monitoring load
189
Clock
197
Service products
198
Changing units of measurement
205
Page
Changing language
182
Transmission control back up

mode
189
Diagnostics
207
Display of malfunctions
Event message
175
Controls in detail
Risk of accident
Use the driver information system only if the

traffic situation permits it. Attention would
otherwise be drawn away too much.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle is
covering a distance of some 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The driver information system shows all information in the multi-function display. If
necessary, this information may be accompanied by acoustic signals.
Structure
The driver information system features various menus.
The number of menus depends on
There are several functions combined in

each of the menus under the main category. In the Audio menu, for example, there
are functions for operating the radio or the
CD player. In the Monitoring info menu,
all the main information dealing with operation can be called up. In the Settings
menu, all functions are found for making
adjustments to the display and for the vehicle.
whether the vehicle is stationary or

in motion
the equipment level of the vehicle
which additional menus in the Settings menu, sub-menu Configuration have been activated
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
151
Controls in detail
Driver information system menus
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
152
Controls in detail
Menu
Page
Menu
1 Actros info
160
2 Monitoring info
161
Configuration
184
3 Trip computer
166
Load
189
Time
197
4 Navigation
Page
d Settings
183
5 Audio
169
Service products
198
6 Telephone
169
Units
205
7 New SMS message

(Fleetboard)
169
8 Maintenance
171
MB item number
209
9 Event info
175
Events
210
a Auxiliary heating
177
Binary values
213
b Alarm
178
Measured values1
213
c Language
182
e Transmission control
207
f Diagnostics
207
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 For service personnel only
8
9
153
Controls in detail
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
User guidance

symbol ? 6, you can make a selection or adjustment using the + and
- buttons on the multi-function
steering wheel. However, volume control using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel is then no longer possible.
The user guidance at the top of the multifunction display shows where you are in
the driver information system and which
steering wheel buttons should be used for
navigation.
The name of the menu 3 is shown in
the centre of the multi-function display
The number 13 2 to the left of the
menu name shows that the Settings
menu is the 13th in the driver information system
The number 1 5 to the right of the
menu name shows that the list is the
first display/function in the Settings
menu
8
9
154
1 Symbol for steering wheel and

buttons
2 Menu number
3 Menu name
4 Symbol for steering wheel j and
k buttons
5 Display/function number
6 Symbol for steering wheel and
buttons
The quantity and numbering of the

menus can differ depending on the vehicle equipment level.
Controls in detail
System navigation
Menu navigation
The structure of the driver information system is circular.
The structure within the menus is usually

circular as well.

The display shows the next menu.
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly.
Each time the button is pressed, the
display shows the next menu until it returns to the start of the loop.
i
In the Settings, Language and Diagnostics menus, a menu list is displayed
instead of the functions.
You can navigate in the menu list using
the + and - steering wheel buttons. The multi-function display shows
the ? symbol next to the menu list.
Press the j or k button on the

the next function or item of information.
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly.
Each time the button is pressed, the
multi-function display shows the next
function until it returns to the start of
the loop.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
155
Controls in detail
1
2
3
The multi-function display is split up into
set areas. The gear indicator is always displayed. All other displays show the function of a vehicle system or information that
is shown automatically by the driver information system.
Function
Page
1 User guidance
154
2 Digital speed display
160
3 Level control display
186
4 Gear indicator
219
5 Reminder with system

symbol
160
1 Vehicles with Telligent gearshift and Telligent

automatic gearshift
5
6
7
8
9
156
Function
6 Differential lock display
Page
185
Starting-off aid switched

on display (6x2 vehicles)
296
Starting-off aid switched

on display (6x2/4 vehicles)
297
Hendrickson leading axle

raised display
297
Trailing axle raised display

(vehicles with pneumatic
suspension)
298
Nummek axle raised display (vehicles with pneumatic suspension)
299
7 Cruise control/Limiter/
ART display
267
Controls in detail
Event message
If there are malfunctions on the vehicle,
the driver information system informs the
driver with an event message. The background colour of the message indicates
the degree of importance in terms of operational and road safety of the vehicle. The
driver must acknowledge this message
( page 159). If more than one message is
displayed, the driver information system
shows the messages in succession.
If the malfunctions are serious, a warning
buzzer and a STOP lamp may accompany
the event message.
Risk of accident
If the STOP lamp lights up, the operational

and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised
Event message with red status display

Risk of accident
Stop the engine
The operational and road safety of the vehicle is at risk if there is a message with red
status display.
When bringing the vehicle to a halt, take the

traffic situation into consideration.
The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change
Rectify faults before starting a journey.
If it is possible to continue driving, adjust driving style respectively
Bring the vehicle to a halt in all cases
5
Red
Adjust driving style as appropriate or bring vehicle to a halt.
Carry out action in accordance

with the event message.
Rectify fault immediately. Have
affected system checked.
8
9
157
Controls in detail
Red
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified

DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For
work relevant to safety and work
on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a
3
4
5
Continuing the journey
may lead in some circumstances to vehicle damage
may mean in some circumstances that legal requirements are not being adhered
to
8
9
158
Event message with yellow status

display
Yellow
Adjust driving style.

Carry out action in accordance
with the event message.
Have the fault rectified as soon as
possible.
Maintenance work should always
be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools for the work required. For
work relevant to safety and work
on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a
!
The operational and road safety of the
vehicle is impaired.
The vehicle's driving and braking
characteristics may change
Adjust driving style
Controls in detail
Event message with action to be carried out
Event message with symbol
Event message for acknowledgement

or
Press the button in the instrument panel.
1 Red status display

2 System abbreviation/Symbol
( page 208)
3 Fault location
L Tractor vehicle
A Trailer/Semitrailer
4 Functional restriction
5 Instructions
6 Reminder ( page 160)
2 Coolant temperature symbol

7 Yellow status display
8 Reminder
1
2
3
The message is cleared. The system

abbreviation is shown in the reminder
section.
If the fault is not rectified the next time

the engine is started, the driver information system repeats the event message.
6
7
8
9
159
Controls in detail
1 Reminder
2
3
4
In order that the acknowledged event message is not forgotten, the driver information system shows the relevant symbol or
system abbreviation in the reminder section. If there are several messages that
must be displayed due to legal requirements, the reminder function shows these
one after the other in the reminder section.
Actros Info menu
Faults that must be displayed due to legal requirements have a red or yellow
background.
In the Actros Info menu you can choose between three different displays:
The messages stored in the reminder

section can be viewed in the Event-Info
menu ( page 175).
Digital speed display
Neutral
Date
Symbols:
Collective symbol for malfunctions
BS
There are faults that must be

displayed due to legal requirements. Example: ABS.
7
Digital speed display
8
9
160
Controls in detail
Changing Actros Info menu display
After the functional check, the multifunction display always shows the
menu that was last selected.
Call up the Actros Info menu.
Calling up the Actros Info menu

multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display
shows the desired display.
Monitoring info menu

In the Monitoring info menu you can call up
information which is important for the operation of the vehicle.
Page

brake applied
Coolant temperature
162
Reservoir pressure
162
Engine oil level
163

multi-function steering wheel continually until the Actros Info menu is shown
in the multi-function display.
Axle load indicator
163
Load info
165
Trailer ID
165
Converter and clutch unit temperature
166
2
3
4
5
6
7
i
Further information can be called up by
selecting the Monitoring info sub-menu
from the Diagnostics menu.
8
9
161
Controls in detail
1 Calling up the Monitoring info menu
Calling up the coolant temperature
Calling up the reservoir pressure
Call up the Monitoring info menu.

shows Coolant temperature.
1 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 1

2
3
4

brake applied
shows Monitoring info.
7
8
9
162

shows Brake pressure.
Controls in detail
Calling up the engine oil level
Topping up engine oil ( page 418).
i
Do not top up engine oil unless prompted to do so.
Calling up the axle load indicator
Vehicles with axle load measurement device:
Engine oil level display, oil level 3.5 l

shows Oil level.
The axle load measuring device determines the axle load from the pressure in
the air springs when the vehicle chassis is
in the driving position.
4
Axle load indicator
Set chassis to driving position

( page 294).
Switch off starting-off aid

( page 296).

shows Axle load Overall.
7
8
9
163
Controls in detail
The axle load measuring device is not

calibrated nor is it a system capable of
calibration. The measured data only
provides an approximate guide which is
not suitable for official use.
3
4
5
6
If the chassis is not in the driving position when the axle load indicator is selected, the arrows in the level control
display flash
. The multi-function
display does not show the axle loads.
If there is a notable difference between
the axle load indicator and the weighbridge results, the axle load indicator
can be adjusted.
Setting the axle load indicator
Indicator lamps 1 and 2 should not

light up.
Press
"M1" 5 for the 1st axle
"M2" 6 for the 2nd axle
"Driving position" 7 for the
3rd axle
Drive vehicle onto single axle weighbridge.
Call up the axle load indicator.
8
9
164
and hold.
Level control operating unit
Set chassis to driving position

( page 294).
Press button 3 or 4 to switch off level control operating unit.
To increase the displayed value, press

and hold the "Raise" button 8 until the
displayed value equals the value indicated by the weighbridge.
or
To decrease the displayed value, press
and hold the "Lower" button 9 until
the displayed value equals the value indicated by the weighbridge
Controls in detail
Calling up the load info
Trailer or semitrailer with telematics in accordance with ISO 11992 and associated
sensor technology:
The trailer ID is the chassis number of

the trailer.
The multi-function display can show the

following information depending on the
equipment level of the trailer or semitrailer:
3
4
Load temperature
Load pressure
Fluid load volume
Trailer ID
Trailer/semitrailer monitoring
( page 378).
Load temperature

multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display
shows Load.
Calling up the trailer ID
Trailer or semitrailer with telematics in accordance with ISO 11992:
5
6
Trailer ID

shows Trailer ID.
7
8
9
165
Controls in detail
1 Calling up the converter and clutch unit

temperature
Vehicles with converter and clutch unit:
Trip data
Trip computer menu

In the trip computer menu you can call up
the following information
Page
3
4
7
8
Converter temperature display

shows WSK temperature.
166
duration of journey in hours
166
average speed in kilometres per hour
Fuel level and range
168
average fuel consumption in litres per

100 kilometres
distance travelled in kilometres
Trip data
Calling up the trip computer
The trip data comprises:

shows Trip computer.
Controls in detail
The trip data can be viewed
Calling up the trip data
After reset from the point at which

the data was last reset ( page 167)
Call up the trip computer.
A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can

alter the reset time.
After start if the key has been removed from the ignition lock for longer
than four hours
The trip data After reset is shown in

the multi-function display.
shows the trip data After start.
Resetting trip data
After start, automatically
The driver information system resets the
trip data After start if
Trip data after start
1
2
After start, manually


shows Trip computer, After start.
Press the l button in the instrument panel and hold until the trip data
is reset After start.
the ignition lock is in position 0 for

longer than four hours or
5
6
7
the key has been removed from the ignition lock for longer than four hours
8
9
167
Controls in detail
1 After reset, manually
Calling up the fuel level and range
2
3

multi-function steering wheel to select
the next menu.
The multi-function display shows the

trip data After reset.
Press the l button in the instrument panel and hold until the trip data
After reset is reset.
4 Fuel level and range

This function shows the following informa-
5 tion in the multi-function display:

current tank contents in litres
Fuel level and range
6 estimated range in kilometres with cur- Press the j button on the multirent fuel level
7
8
9
168
Quitting trip computer
function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows

Tank contents and Range.
Controls in detail
Audio menu
Using the functions in the audio menu, you
can operate the basic functions of the audio equipment ( page 359).
Telephone menu
New SMS menu
Vehicles with hands-free system:
Vehicles with FleetBoard :
Using the functions in the telephone menu,

you can operate the basic functions of a
mobile telephone connected to a handsfree system ( page 350).
The driver information system indicates in

the reminder section of the multi-function
display when a text message has been received by FleetBoard. If you wish to read
the text message, call it up in the new SMS
menu.
Risk of accident
2
3
4
Operating mobile telephones that have an

aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle's electronic systems.
As a result, the operating reliability and road

safety is at considerable risk.

conditions allow it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away too much.
7
Receiving several text messages
8
9
169
Controls in detail
1 Calling up the New SMS menu

2
3
Risk of accident
The priority is to focus your attention on the

traffic conditions. Only read the text messages if the traffic situation permits it.
4 With the vehicle stationary and the parking

brake applied
5
6
7
Deleting SMS
Each text message consists of at least

2 pages.
The last page of a text message is the

prompt to delete the message.
The last page of the text message is the

prompt to delete the message.
Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel.
i
The multi-function display only shows
the next text message once the current
text message has been deleted.

next page of the text message.

shows New SMS.
first page of the text message.
SMS delete command
8
9
170
Controls in detail
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The selection bar is on Yes.
The driver information system deletes
the current text message and displays
the next one.
If no other text messages are stored in
the system, the multi-function display
shows: No SMS message.
Maintenance menu
The Maintenance menu serves as a means

of
calling up the service due dates for the

vehicle and the assemblies calculated
by the Telligent maintenance system
confirming the completion of service

work


service due dates in individual submenus in the order they are due. The
number 1 in the menu list shows
which sub-menu you are in.
The driver information system deletes

the current text message and moves on
to the next menu.
Further service information can be

found in the Diagnostics menu, in the
Service Info submenu.
or
Calling up the Maintenance menu
1 Item that requires service

2 Item designation
3 Estimated service due date
4 Distance remaining
5
6
!
If you do not keep to the service due
dates, this could lead to the vehicle or
assemblies becoming damaged. Always keep to the schedule for service
work.
7
8
9
171
Controls in detail

brake applied
2
3
4
5

shows the Maintenance menu.
the service due dates for individual
items.
If the Telligent maintenance system is

unable to calculate the service due
date, the multi-function display shows
--.--.-- instead of the service due
date.
8
9
172
The Telligent maintenance system automatically indicates the service due dates
14 days in advance.
Furthermore, the maintenance system indicates
current service due dates
exceeded service due dates
particularly late service due dates in
the case of the brake system
i
6
Service note
Each time you turn the ignition lock to

position 2, the multi-function display
shows the service messages for approaching or current service due dates.
If you do not acknowledge a service

message ( page 173), the multi-function display always show it for approximately 20 seconds.
Risk of accident
If you override a service note, you could be

putting the operational reliability and road
safety of the vehicle at risk. There is a danger of important assemblies, such as the
brake system, failing due to worn parts and
this could lead to an accident. Always adhere to the scheduled service due dates.
!
If the service work is not carried out at
the time specified, the result could be
increased wear and damage to the vehicle or assemblies.
Controls in detail
Acknowledging service message

multi-function steering wheel
or
Press the button in the instrument
panel.
Approaching service due date
Service due date passed
2
3
In the case of an approaching, current

or late service due date, the service
4
message is cleared.
5
6
7
8
Current service due date
Particularly late service due date (brake

system)
173
Controls in detail
Risk of accident
There is a danger of the brake system failing

as a result of worn brake linings.
Have the brake system repaired immediately by a qualified specialist workshop.
4
5
6
7
8

The service message for a particularly late
service due date relating to the brake system cannot be acknowledged using the
steering wheel buttons. The service message cannot be deleted. It remains in the
multi-function display.
174
Confirming completed service work
!
If you
confirm that service work has been
carried out when this is not the
case, increased wear and even
damage to the vehicle or assemblies could be the result
confirm a current or an approaching
service due date, the Telligent
maintenance system recalculates
the date. To avoid damage to the
vehicle or assemblies, the relevant
service work may need to be carried out immediately.
Do not confirm service work until the
specified service work has been carried
out.
1 Reset button
i
Use a pointed object, such as a pen to
press the reset button in the instrument
panel.
Call up the Maintenance menu.
Press and hold the j or k button on the multi-function steering
wheel until the driver information system in the multi-function display shows
the desired service due date.
Controls in detail
Press and hold reset button in the instrument panel for one second.
The driver information system resets
the displayed service due date. The
multi-function display shows --.--.--.
!
Once you have confirmed a service,
check whether the oil grade and viscosity (SAE grade) is the same as that
which has been used in the assembly.
If necessary, adjust the setting
( page 198).
Quitting maintenance menu
Event info menu
Calling up the Event info menu
The Event info menu serves as a means of

selecting the events stored in the reminder
section. Unlike the display of a new event,
only the control unit abbreviation/ symbol
and the fault location have a red or yellow
background.
If the cause of the event is no longer
present while you are viewing the information, the driver information system removes the event from the display.
2
3
4
1 Control unit abbreviation
2 Functional restriction
3 Reminder
4 Instructions
5
6

the next menu.
7
8
9
175
Controls in detail
1
2
Risk of accident

traffic conditions. Only read the event info if
the traffic situation permits it.
3
4
5
6

brake applied
shows Event info.
7
8
9
176
Quitting event info menu

the last acknowledged event in the

the next menu.
The number in the menu list next to the

arrow symbol shows the number of
events.
If there is no new event, the multi-function display shows No malfunctions.
further events.
Controls in detail
Switching on auxiliary heating
Vehicles with auxiliary heating:
Risk of fire and poisoning
Continuous heating ( page 328),
The Auxiliary heating menu serves as a

means of
Timed heating ( page 332),
The auxiliary heating may not be used in enclosed spaces such as garages or workshops unless there is suitable extraction,
whether in timer or preselected mode, due
to the risk of poisoning and suffocation.
Auxiliary heating menu
Checking the operating data of the auxiliary heating

Activating the preselected heating requirements
Adjustment
of the heating temperature
of the heating duration and
the remaining time of the auxiliary
heating on the timer or preselected
operation
Preselected heating ( page 334).
At filling stations and tanking systems, the

auxiliary heating must be switched off due
to the risk of explosion.
In places where vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g. in the vicinity of fuel, coal, wood
dust and grain stores or similar), the auxiliary heating must be switched off.
Vehicles for the transportation of hazardous
goods: Comply with relevant safety regulations.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
177
Controls in detail
1 Calling up the auxiliary heating menu

shows Auxiliary heating.
3
4
5
6
7
8

brake applied
Operating data for auxiliary heating, preselect 1
Risk of accident

traffic conditions. Only adjust the settings
on the auxiliary heating when the vehicle is
stationary.
178
Alarm menu
There is an alarm clock function integrated
The alarm menu comprises the following:
Page
Setting alarm mode
179
or
Setting alarm time memory
180
Press the lower section of auxiliary

heating switch .
Setting alarm time
180
The multi-function display shows the current operating data depending on the selected mode of operation ( page 327).
There are three modes available:

Off
Radio
Buzzer
Controls in detail
Calling up the Alarm menu

brake applied

traffic conditions. Only adjust the settings
on the alarm when the vehicle is stationary.

shows Alarm.
Risk of accident
Setting alarm mode/switching alarm

off
Call up the Alarm menu.
shows Setting alarm mode.
Alarm menu
The selected alarm mode can be seen

in the change bar.

multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the desired alarm mode can
be seen in the highlight.
1
2
Radio
Buzzer
Off
The driver information system accepts
the selected settings and continues
onto the next menu.
4
5


onto the next function.
7
8
9
179
Controls in detail
If you would like to woken up by the radio, the ignition lock must be in position 1.
Setting alarm time memory

There are two memory slots for the alarm
time.

shows Set memory.
The highlight is on the selected memory slot.
multi-function steering wheel to
change between the memory slots.
5
6

onto the next menu.

1 Alarm time memory 2
180

Setting alarm time

Call up the alarm menu.
shows Set memory.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows Set
hour. The highlight is on hours.

multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the desired hour has been selected in the highlight.
Controls in detail
The multi-function display shows Set
minutes. The highlight is on minutes.

onto the next menu.
Switching off alarm
Press any button on the multi-function

steering wheel.
The alarm is turned off.


4
5
6

multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the desired minutes are
shown in the highlight.
7
8
9
181
Controls in detail
Changing language
The language menu serves as a means of

selecting the language for the multi-function display.
The Language menu can only be selected in the multi-function display when
the vehicle is stationary.
With the vehicle stationary and the hand

brake applied
The following languages are available in

the driver information system as standard:
If the language for the country in which

the vehicle was sold is English, only
English and German are available.

shows Language.
Language menu
German
4 English
5
Language of country in which vehicle

was sold
Other languages can be installed in the

driver information system by a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired
language.


the chosen language and continues
onto the next menu.
8
9
182
Controls in detail
Settings menu
The settings menu serves as a means of
Page
Activating/deactivating
Page
Adjusting
Cruise control sound
184
Differential lock
permanent display
185
Level control permanent

display
186
Page
Activating menus
Load monitoring
restrictions
189
Diagnostics
188
Clock
197
Transmission control
189
Service fluid grades
198
Unit of temperature
measurement
205
Clock mode
12 h/24 h
206
The settings menu can only be selected

in the multi-function display when the
vehicle is stationary.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
183
Controls in detail
1 Calling up the Settings menu
Cruise control sound menu
The Cruise control sound menu serves as a

means of activating and deactivating the
acoustic signal during operation of the various driving systems:
Limiter
Cruise control
Telligent distance control (ART)
4
brake applied
6
7

shows Settings.
8
9
184
Calling up the Cruise control sound

menu
brake applied
Call up the Settings menu.
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration.
shows Cruise control sound.
Controls in detail
Activating
Permanent display of differential lock

and additional equipment
1
2
Deactivating
The Differential lock permanent display

menu serves as a means of activating the
display when the locks are disengaged.
The differential lock display shows operation of the following equipment:
Quitting Cruise control sound menu

multi-function steering wheel to accept
the settings and to move on to the next
menu.
Transfer case/through-drive lock

Differential lock
4
1 Differential lock permanent display
Power take-off
Leading/trailing axle

function in the configuration menu.
Telligent distance control ( page 280).
8
9
185
Controls in detail
1 Selecting differential lock permanent

display

brake applied
Call up the Settings menu

( page 184).

Quitting differential lock permanent

display
menu.
Level control permanent display

The Level control permanent display menu
serves as a means of activating the display
when the level control is switched off.
The level control display shows the status
and operation of the Telligent level control.
Telligent level control ( page 290).
5 Press the j or k button on the

6

shows Differential lock permanent
display.
7 Activating
8

Deactivating
9 Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
186
1 Level control permanent display
Controls in detail
Selecting level control permanent
display
brake applied
Call up the settings menu.
shows Level control permanent display.
Activating
Arrow buttons in radio mode menu
Truckline CC30, CC70 or CD70 audio

equipment:
Deactivating
The Arrow buttons in radio mode menu

serves as a means of assigning functions
to the arrow keys for radio operation
( page 362).
1
2
3
4
Quitting level control permanent display menu

menu.
5
6

7
8
9
187
Controls in detail
1 Arrow buttons in cassette mode menu

2
3
Truckline CC30, CC70 or CD70 audio

equipment:
The Arrow buttons in cassette mode menu
serves as a means of assigning functions
to the arrow keys for cassette operation
( page 365).
Diagnostics menu activation
Activating
Diagnostics menu activation can be selected using the Display diagnostics menu
function ( page 207).

Deactivating
Calling up diagnostics menu activation

brake applied
( page 184).
5
6

shows Display diagnostics menu.
7
8
9
188

Quitting diagnostics menu activation
menu.
Diagnostics menu ( page 207).
Controls in detail
Enabling transmission control back up
mode menu
Activating
Load temperature monitoring in

trailer/semitrailer, min./max. temperature
Trailer/semitrailer telematics with load

temperature monitoring system:
The menu serves as means of adjusting the

thresholds for the load temperature monitoring system.
Quitting Transmission control back up

mode menu
Setting range: 125 C to +125 C.

( page 184).

menu.
The driver information system monitors

the load temperature. If the temperature
rises or drops, an event message indicates
the deviation.



shows Enable transmission control
backup mode.
Transmission control back up mode

( page 207).
Transmission control back up mode serves

as a means of activating the Transmission
control back up mode menu ( page 207)
for Telligent gearshift/ automatic gearshift.
Calling up the Transmission control
back up mode menu
brake applied

Deactivating
4
5
6
7
8
9
189
Controls in detail
1 Calling up the Min. temperature menu

2
Adjusting lower threshold temperature

brake applied
The min. temperature decreases in 1

increments.

( page 184).

4
5
6
To change the setting quickly, press

and hold the appropriate button.
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Load.

shows Min. temperature. The highlight
3 is on the lower threshold temperature.
Quitting min. temperature menu

1 Load temperature monitoring system
2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight
Call up the Min. temperature menu.
The minimum temperature increases in

1 increments.
8
9
190

the setting and to quit the setting
menu.
the setting and to move on to the max.
temperature menu.
Controls in detail
Calling up the maximum temperature
menu
Adjusting the upper threshold temperature

brake applied
The maximum temperature decreases

in 1 increments.

( page 184).
i

multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Load.
Quitting the Max. temperature menu

multi-function steering wheel until the
multi-function display shows Max. temperature.

the setting and to quit the Settings
menu.
The highlight 3 is on the upper threshold temperature.
1 Load temperature monitoring system

2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight
Call up the max. temperature menu.

the settings.
The maximum temperature increases

in 1 increments.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
191
Controls in detail
1 Load pressure monitoring in trailer/

semitrailer, min./max. pressure
Trailer/semitrailer telematics with cargo

pressure monitoring:

thresholds for the load pressure monitoring system.
4
5
Calling up the Min. pressure menu

brake applied
( page 184).
Setting range: 0 bar to 25 bar.

highlight is on Load.

the load pressure. If the pressure rises or
drops, an event message indicates the deviation.

multi-function display shows Min.
pressure.
The highlight 3 is on the lower threshold pressure.
6
7
8
9
192
Adjusting the lower threshold pressure
1 Load pressure monitoring

2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight
Call up the Min. pressure menu.
Controls in detail
The minimum pressure increases in
0.1 bar increments.
The minimum pressure decreases in
0.1 bar increments.
i
Quitting the Min. pressure menu
menu.

the setting and to move on to the Max.
pressure menu.
Adjusting the upper threshold
1
2
Calling up the Max. pressure menu

brake applied
( page 184).

1 Load pressure monitoring

2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight

multi-function display shows Max.
pressure.
Call up the Max. pressure menu.
6
7
The highlight 3 is on the upper pressure threshold.
8
9
193
Controls in detail
The maximum pressure increases in

0.1 bar increments.
The maximum pressure decreases in

0.1 bar increments.
i
5

6 Quitting the Max. pressure menu

7

menu.

the setting.
194
Liquid load volume monitoring in

trailer/semitrailer, min./max.
quantity
Selecting the minimum volume
Trailer/semitrailer telematics with liquid

load volume monitoring:

( page 184).

thresholds for the liquid load volume monitoring system.

highlight is on load.
Setting range: 0 l to 128,510 l

multi-function display shows Min.
quantity.

the liquid load volume. If the volume rises
or drops, an event message indicates the
deviation.

brake applied
The highlight 3 is on the lower threshold.
Controls in detail
Adjusting the lower threshold

The minimum quantity decreases in 2 l
increments.
i
Quitting the Min. quantity menu
1 Liquid load volume monitoring
2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight
Call up the Min. quantity menu.
The minimum quantity increases in 2 l
increments.

menu.
the setting and to move on to the Max.
quantity menu.
Calling up the Max. quantity menu

brake applied
( page 184).
multi-function display shows Max.
quantity.
The highlight 3 is on the upper threshold.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
195
Controls in detail
1 Adjusting the upper threshold

2
Call up the Max. quantity menu.
Quitting the Max. quantity menu

menu.
The maximum quantity increases in 2 l

increments.
The maximum quantity decreases in 2 l

increments.
5 1 Liquid load volume monitoring
2 Trailer 1
3 Highlight
6
7
8
9
196


the setting.
Controls in detail
Clock menu
The Clock menu is used to set the time in
the rev counter.
Setting time, hours
brake applied
( page 184).
highlight is on Clock.
multi-function display shows Setting
clock, hours.

shows the desired hour.
Setting clock, minutes
Call up the Settings menu.
Quitting menu for setting clock, hours

highlight is on Clock.

the setting and to select the previous
or next menu.

multi-function display shows Setting
clock, minutes.

the setting and to select the minutes
setting or the start screen for the Settings menu.

shows the desired minutes.
2
3
4
5
6
7
The highlight is on hours.
8
9
197
Controls in detail
1 Quitting the menu for setting clock, min- Fluids and lubricants menu
utes
2
3
4

or next menu.
the setting and select the start screen
of the Settings menu or the hours setting.
5
6
7
8
9
198
The fluids and lubricants menu serves as

means of setting the properties of the fluids and lubricants.
!
If you make changes to the properties
of the fluids and lubricants, the Telligent maintenance system modifies
the service due dates accordingly.
To avoid damage to the vehicle assemblies, the properties specified for the
fluids and lubricants must be the same
as those of the fluids and lubricants actually used.
The following settings are possible:

Page
Fuel sulphur content/
biodiesel fuel (FAME)
199
Engine oil viscosity
200
Engine oil grade
202
Transmission oil grade
203
Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).
Controls in detail
Fuel sulphur content
Selecting fuel sulphur content display
For operation of the vehicle, the sulphur

content of the diesel in the vehicle must be
entered.
If the sulphur content entered for the

fluid/lubricant is not the same as the
sulphur content of the fuel used, there
is a danger of the engine becoming
damaged.

brake applied
A higher sulphur level accelerates the

ageing process of the engine oil. The
Telligent maintenance system calculates
the date for engine oil change on the basic
of the sulphur level specified.
Observe "Fuel sulphur content" chart
( page 567).
Biodiesel (FAME)
!
If you use biodiesel (FAME), you must
select FAME in the fluids and lubricants/
fuel sulphur content menu. This is also
required for a mixture of conventional
diesel fuels and biodiesel fuels. The periods for changing engine oil and engine oil filters are more frequent than
for conventional diesel fuels with low
sulphur content ( page 564).

( page 184).
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Fluids/ lubricants.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel until the multifunction display shows Fuel sulphur
content.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
199
Controls in detail
1 Changing fuel sulphur content
Select the fuel sulphur content display

( page 199).
Press and hold the reset button (for approximately one second) in the instrument panel until the desired fuel
sulphur content is shown in the multifunction display or until FAME is shown
if biodiesel is being used.
2
3
4
5
To press the reset button in the instrument panel, use a pointed object, such
as a pen.
Observe "Fuel sulphur content" chart

( page 567).
The fuel sulphur level or FAME (if

biodiesel is used) as seen on the
screen is then set.
Quitting the fuel sulphur level display
the previous or next menu
or
the previous or next display.
8
9
200
Engine oil viscosity display

The engine oil viscosity value in the fluids/
lubricants menu must be the same as the
viscosity class (SAE class) of the oil in the
engine.
!
Always use a viscosity class appropriate for the ambient temperature
( page 558).
Engine oil grade display ( page 202).
Controls in detail
Select engine oil viscosity display
brake applied
Changing engine oil viscosity

( page 184).
Use a pointed object, such as a pen, to

press the reset button in the instrument panel.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Fluids/lubricants.
Press the j button until the multifunction display shows Engine oil
viscosity.
Select engine oil viscosity display.
Press and hold the reset button (for approximately one second) in the instrument panel until the desired engine oil
viscosity is shown in the multi-function
display.
2
3
The engine oil viscosity displayed is

set.
4
Quitting the engine oil viscosity display
or

7
8
9
201
Controls in detail
1 Engine oil grade display

2
3
4
The engine oil grade must be set in accordance with the data sheet values from
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products. The higher the data sheet value,
the higher the engine oil grade level. The
data sheet value in the fluids/ lubricants
menu must be the same as that of the engine oil actually used.
5
6
7
Risk of engine damage. If possible, do

not mix engine oils of different grades.
If you mix engine oils of different
grades, the data from the poorest
grade must be entered in the fluids/ lubricants menu. The periods for changing the engine oil are more frequent
compared with those for engine oil of
the same grade.
8
9
202

Engine oil viscosity menu ( page 200).
Calling up the Engine oil grade menu
brake applied
( page 184).
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Fluids/lubricants.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel until the multifunction display shows Engine oil
grade.
Changing the engine oil grade
i
Controls in detail
Call up the Engine oil grade menu
( page 202).
Press the reset button in the instrument panel until the multi-function display shows the desired engine oil
grade.
The engine oil grade shown in the multifunction display is now set.
Quitting the Engine oil grade menu
the previous or next menu.
Transmission oil grade menu

The transmission oil grade must be set in
accordance with the data sheet values
from Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products. The higher the data
sheet value, the higher the transmission oil
grade level. The data sheet value in the
fluids/lubricants menu must be the same
as that of the transmission oil actually
used.
!
Danger of transmission damage. If possible, do not mix transmission oils of
different grades. If you mix transmission oils of different grades, the data
from the poorest grade must be entered in the Fluids/lubricants menu.
The periods for changing the transmission oil are more frequent compared
with those for transmission oil of the
same quality.
1
2
Call up the Transmission oil grade

menu

brake applied

( page 184).
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel continually until the highlight is on Fluids/lubrications.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel until the multifunction display shows Transmission
oil grade.
203
7
8
9
Controls in detail
1 Changing the transmission oil grade

i
2
Observe the "Service products and capacities" section ( page 569).
4
5
6
7
8
9
204
Call up the Transmission oil grade

menu.
Quitting the transmission oil grade

menu
Press and hold the reset button (for

approximately one second) in the instrument panel until the desired transmission oil grade is shown in the multifunction display.

The transmission oil grade shown in the

multi-function display is now set.
or
Controls in detail
Units menu
The units menu serves as a means of
switching
the unit of temperature measurement
between C/F
the clock mode between 12 h/24 h
Units menu, temperature unit
The menu is used to specify the way temperature is displayed for the entire instrument panel.
The following modes are available:
Degrees Celsius (C)
Degrees Fahrenheit (F)
Calling up the Units menu, Temperature unit
Changing the temperature unit

brake applied

( page 184).

highlight is on Units.

multi-function display shows Units
Temperature unit:.
The highlight 1 is on the current setting.
Degrees Celsius (C) display
Degrees Fahrenheit (F) display

7
8
9
205
Controls in detail
1 Quitting the temperature unit display

2

the setting and to move on to the next
menu.

the setting and to quit the display.
4
12 h/24 h

( page 184).
highlight is on Units.
multi-function display shows Units
Clock mode.
The highlight 1 is on the current setting.
12 hour mode
The clock display in the instrument

panel is in 12 hour mode
8
9
206
24 hour mode
The clock display in the instrument
panel is in 24 hour mode
Quitting the menu for setting the clock
mode
or next menu.
the setting and to quit the display.
Controls in detail
Transmission control back up mode

menu
Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/ automatic gearshift:
If there is a malfunction or complete failure
of
the gearbox electronics
Diagnostics menu
The Diagnostics menu is used in fault finding. It comprises a list of all the control
units installed in the vehicle which will vary
depending on the equipment level.
The following information is available for
each control unit:
the drive control
Function
the gearshift unit
MB item number
209
the gearbox signal wire
Events
210
you can still reach a workshop using the

transmission control back up mode.
Binary values
213
Measured values
213
Deleting events
212
Page
The Diagnostics menu can only be selected

when the vehicle is stationary
when the Settings menu/
Configuration is activated
( page 184)
2
3
4
!
Check event menus of all control units
at regular intervals for events. Rectify
any faults in the stored events before
commencing a journey.
The Transmission control back up

mode menu can only be selected once
it has been activated in the Settings
menu.
5
6
7
8
The gearshift detects if there is a need

for substitute operation and indicates
when transmission control back up
mode is selected with an event message.
207
Controls in detail
1 Control unit abbreviations

2
3
5
6
7
System
Abbreviations
System
GS
Telligent gearshift
MS
Modular switch panel
Abbreviations
System
AG
Automatic gearshift
HM
Rear module
NOX
APU
Air-Process-Unit
HPS
Hydraulic-pneumatic
gearshift
Exhaust emission
treatment (DeNOx)
NR
Telligent level control
PFA
Particulate filter system
PSM
Programmable special
module
ART
Abbreviations
BS
Telligent distance
control
Battery isolation switch
EAB
Electronic trailer brake
EDW
FLA
Flame-start system
FM
Front module
FR
Drive control
GM
General module
208
Heating control/air
conditioning
INS
Instrument panel
KB
Clutch mechanism
RAD
Radio
KOM
Communication
interface
RS
Retarder control
SPA
Lane assist
KS
Clutch control
SRS
Safety restraint system
KSA
Convenience closing
system
MR
Telligent engine control
Telligent brake system
BTS
HZR
Controls in detail
Calling up the Diagnostics menu
Abbreviations
System
TCO
Tachograph
TEL
Telephone, hands-free
system
TMB
Door module, co-driver's

door
TMF
Door module, driver's

door
TP
Telematics platform
WR
Telligent active roll

stabilizer
WS
Telligent maintenance
system
WSK
Converter and clutch

unit
ZDS
Central data memory
ZHE
Auxiliary heating
ZL
Telligent trailing axle
MB item number
The MB item number identifies the control
unit.
Selecting the MB item number

brake applied
Call up the Diagnostics menu.

brake applied
Turn the key in ignition lock to
position 2.
multi-function display shows Diagnostics.

highlight is on the desired control unit
abbreviation.
multi-function display shows the system abbreviation and the MB item no.
menu list.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
209
Controls in detail

highlight is on MB item no.
2 Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
3
4
5
6

MB item number.
Events menu
In the Events menu, the driver information
system stores all system malfunctions for
a period of 2.5 days. A Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre can carry out a diagnosis of
the faults based on the stored events.
Selecting events
brake applied
Call up the Diagnostics menu
( page 209).
highlight is on Diagnostics.
list of control units.
highlight is on the desired control unit
abbreviation.
multi-function display shows the system abbreviation and the MB item no.
menu list.
8
9
210

highlight is on Events.
The multifunction display shows the
first event in memory 1 of the control
unit. If there is no new event, the multifunction display shows No events.
i
A fault which has not been rectified is
represented by 2 as being current.
The event priority 3 and the event
code 4 assist the Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre in rectifying the fault.
Controls in detail
Quitting the Event menu
If there are no further events, the multifunction display shows: Delete event?
The highlight is on No.
multi-function steering wheel to move
on to the next menu.
1 Event number
2 Current event
3 Event priority (1st digit)
4 Event code (digits 2 5)
event text 5 and the action to be
taken 6.
5 Event text
6 Instructions
2
3
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to return to the

menu list.
Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel to return to the

previous display.

next event.
If there are no further events, the multifunction display shows: Delete event?
8
9
211
Controls in detail
1 Deleting events
The following options are available:
Deleting events from an individual control unit
The highlight is on Yes.
2 You can delete the events from an indi-

vidual control unit
3
4
5
6
7
You can delete the events from all control units

Events deleted and returns to the
Diagnostics menu.
It is possible to carry out a fault diagnosis based on the stored events.

The event memory should therefore
only be deleted at a qualified specialist
workshop.
knowledge and tools for the work required.
8
9
212
Press button on the multi-function steering wheel.
Call up the event menu of the desired

control unit.
If there are no further events, the multifunction display shows Delete events?
Controls in detail
Deleting events from all control units
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Delete events.
Binary values
i
The binary values are intended to assist
Mercedes-Benz Service Centres in vehicle diagnosis.

Delete events.
Call up the Diagnostics menu

( page 209).
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Diagnostics.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to select the
list of control units.

The highlight is on Yes.
2
3
Measured values
The measured values are intended to

assist Mercedes-Benz Service Centres
in vehicle diagnosis.

5
6

Event deleted message and returns to
the Diagnostics menu.
8
9
213
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Gearshift
1 The vehicle is equipped with a fully syn2

3
chronised 4 speed transmission. Half stages (post-selection) are also possible which
doubles the number of gears. The pre-selection group provides a high and a low ratio for each of the gears. This means that
there are 16 forward and 2 reverse gears
available.
4 To select the gears, the vehicle is equipped

with the following modes of gearshifting:
Page
5
6
7
Risk of accident
If the reservoir pressure is too low in the

auxiliary consumer circuit, complete declutching and secure gear change cannot be
guaranteed. The driver information system
displays an event message. Under certain
circumstances you may not be able to pull
out of dangerous situations effectively. Do
not accelerate or change gear until the reservoir pressure in the auxiliary consumer circuit is sufficient and the message clears
from the screen.
Reservoir pressure in auxiliary consumer

circuit too low
1 Auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure

2 Yellow status indicator
HPS
Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift
215
EPS III S
Telligent gearshift
218
EPS III SA
231
Try to maintain the engine speed in the

economic range. See also "Rev counter".
Drive in the lowest possible gear.
8
9
214
Controls in detail
Gearshift
i
Change gear in good time when approaching steep gradients.
If possible, block change and avoid
changing gear unless absolutely necessary.
Always fully depress the clutch pedal
when changing gear.
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS)

The hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) is designed with a double H layout and is split
into a low and a high gear range. The low
gear range "L" comprises the reverse gear
and gears 1 to 4. The high gear range "H"
comprises the gears 5 to 8. The split
groups can be selected using the switch on
the front of the gear lever.
Change gear smoothly without using

force.
Gear change methods

On vehicles with HPS there are three ways
to operate the transmission:
Gear selection in low ratio, e.g. for offroad driving
Gear selection in high ratio e.g. for onroad driving
Gear selection in either low or high ratio, e.g. when vehicle is fully laden
4
5
Only select reverse gear at idling speed

and when the vehicle is stationary.
When the vehicle is stationary and the

transmission is in neutral, the engine
only speeds up after a delay.
7
8
HPS gearshift pattern
215
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1
2
Pulling away
DaimlerChrysler recommends pulling away
in 1st to 4th gear, depending on load and
gradient.
3 Without using force, select desired

gear using gear lever.
4 Release the parking brake.

5
6
7

service and parking brakes. When doing this, observe the traffic situation.
the left or right and that it comes safely
to a halt.
8
9
216
Risk of accident
If the vehicle pulls to the left or right during

the brake test or it does not come to a halt
safely, there is a danger that the brakes
could fail and you could cause an accident.
If continuing your journey is not possible,
park the vehicle and have it towed away. If it
is possible to continue your journey, drive at
a suitable speed to a specialist workshop
and have the brake system checked.
Changing gear
!
too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, do not engage, select next highest gear. There is a risk of engine
damage.
the gear lever to overcome the lock between the gear ranges.
Without using force, select desired
gear using gear lever.
Controls in detail
Gearshift
i
When changing between gear ranges
"L" and "H", e.g. from 4th to 5th gear,
the clutch pedal must remain depressed.
Selecting the splitter group

The splitter group allows the vehicle to be
driven in a higher or lower ratio in the selected gear without the need for gear
change.
High-range splitter group
Place split-shifter in upper position 1.

Keep clutch pedal depressed until the
splitter group is selected.
2
3
Low-range splitter group

Place split-shifter in lower position 2.
Keep clutch pedal depressed until the
splitter group is selected.
4
5
6
Split-shifter
1 High-range splitter group

2 Low-range splitter group
8
9
217
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Stopping
Brake the vehicle.
2 Depress the clutch pedal fully.

3 Apply the parking brake

( see page 62).
i
5
6
When the transmission is in neutral, the

gear lever is in the gate between 3rd
and 4th gear, or between 5th and
6th gear.
Selecting reverse gear

Wait for a period of three to six seconds
until the layshaft has come to rest in
the transmission.
Guide gear lever to the left into the reverse gear gate.
the gear lever to overcome the lock.
Engage reverse gear.
Vehicles with reversing horn:
The reversing horn is activated.
To proceed, release parking brake.
7
8
9
218
Telligent gearshift
Telligent gearshift (EPS III S) is an electronic-pneumatic gear selection device. To
change gear, the gear lever or the half-gear
rocker on the gearshift unit must be moved
in the desired direction.
Telligent gearshift allows you to
let the Telligent gearshift select the
optimum gears for you (Telligent selection) or
determine the point of gear change
yourself (driver's choice)
Controls in detail
Gearshift
In both cases, the gear can be selected
directly:
Depress the clutch pedal
Select a gear
Release the clutch pedal
or
Gearshift with preselection:
Select a gear
Depress the clutch pedal
The Telligent gearshift engages the
gear
Release the clutch pedal
Gear indicator
This gear indicator shows the following information in the multi-function display:
the engaged gear and the selected

splitter group on the left 1 and
the recommended or preselected gear

(flashing) with the appropriate splitter
group on the right 2
x
Transmission neutral position
Reverse gear
4
1 Engaged: 8th gear, high splitter group
2 Preselected: 7th gear, low splitter
group
5
6
7
8
9
219
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1
2
Gear lever
The gearshift unit is located on a separate

folding armrest on the driver's seat.
Function button
Shift up
Shift down/select reverse
Neutral button
Half-gear rocker
4
Gearshift unit on right-hand drive vehicles
5
6
7
8
9
220
Shift gear up
Shift gear down
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Selecting neutral

As soon as neutral is engaged, N is
shown on the left in the gear indicator.
i
Neutral position N can be selected from
any gear when the gear lever and the
half-gear rocker are in the basic position.
When you declutch or select transmission

neutral, either engine braking or tractive
power is interrupted. In certain circumstances the vehicle cannot be brought to a halt.
Never select transmission neutral when the
vehicle is in motion.
Risk of accident
3
4
5
6
Apply the brakes and bring the vehicle

to a halt.
Press and hold neutral button 1.
tor.
221
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1
2
Pulling away
If you wish to pull away from stationary
with the transmission in neutral N, the
Telligent gearshift only permits selection
of 1st to 4th gears or reverse gear.
3 Select the appropriate gear in which to pull

away given
4 the load
uphill/downhill gradients
5 the traction
i
6
7
Activate the differential locks

( page 253) and the starting-off aid
( page 296) if you encounter traction
difficulties.
Direct gearshift
i
If you move the gear lever with the
function button forwards to drive away
with the transmission in neutral, the
Telligent gearshift selects the second
gear with fast splitter group.
If you move the gear lever forwards or
backwards to the end position when
the vehicle is in motion, gear selection
is with Telligent driver's choice.
Risk of accident

is selected, the transmission remains in neutral.
Depress clutch pedal again within two seconds and wait until the gear is selected.
8
9
222

Press and hold function button 1,
move gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 2 and hold in this position.
Controls in detail
Gearshift
A selection sound can be heard in the
to a halt.
Risk of accident

If continuing your journey is not possible,
park the vehicle and have it recovered by a
breakdown service. If it is possible to continue your journey, drive at a suitable speed to
a specialist workshop and have the brake
system checked.
If you choose the direct gearshift option, block changing with the vehicle in
motion is limited to
a half-gear using the half-gear rocker and
a full gear using the gear lever in

conjunction with the applied function button.
Shifting with preselection
Shifting a gear with preselection means

that the gear you wish to select is preselected using the gear lever or the half-gear
rocker and the gear change is initiated by
depressing the clutch pedal.
6
7
8
9
223
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 The Telligent gearshift stores the prese-
lected gear
for two minutes when the vehicle is

stationary
for ten seconds when the vehicle is in

motion
Construction-site vehicles:
When the differential locks are activated, the Telligent gearshift stores the
preselected gears for 30 seconds.
If you choose the preselect gearshift

option, block changing is limited to two
gears.
During the period allowed for preselection, the selected gear can be changed
or deleted as required.
8
9
If the period for preselection has

elapsed and no gear has been selected,
the previously selected gear remains
engaged.
224
Move gear lever and/or half-gear rocker in the direction of the gear change
continually until a resistance can be
felt and until the relevant gear flashes
on the right in the gear indicator.
Changing preselection
Select a different gear during the period allowed for preselection using the
gear lever with function button or the
half-gear rocker.
The newly selected gear flashes on the
right in the gear indicator. The period
allowed for preselection starts again.
Deleting preselection
Press neutral button during period allowed for preselection.
The preselected gear shown in the right
of the gear indicator is deleted.
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Changing gear
The Telligent gearshift offers 4 ways in

which to change gear when the vehicle is in
motion:
Direct gearshift with Telligent driver's
choice ( page 227)
Preselected gearshift with Telligent
driver's choice and preselection
( page 227)
The Telligent gearshift monitors gear

selection. If the driver chooses a gear
that would lead to overrevving of the
engine, a warning signal sounds. The
Telligent gearshift selects a "safe"
gear. The warning buzzer turns off as
soon as the gear lever or the half-gear
rocker is in the basic position.

is selected, the Telligent gearshift selects
transmission neutral.
Risk of accident
Depress clutch pedal again within two seconds and wait until the gear is selected.
3
4
and
Direct gearshift ( page 222)

Preselected gearshift ( page 223)
6
7
8
9
225
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 Telligent driver's choice
2
3
4
5
If you move the gear lever forwards to 1

or backwards to 2 when the vehicle is in
motion without pressing the function button, Telligent driver's choice is activated.
The Telligent gearshift selects the optimum gear.
i
If the optimum gear is already engaged,
the Telligent gearshift selects the
next half-gear up or down as appropriate.
The influencing factors which aid the

Telligent gearshift in determining the optimum gear are
Road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Engine load
Status of continuous brake
Laden weight of vehicle
1 Shift up
2 Downshift
7
8
9
226
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Direct gearshift
Preselected gearshift
You decide whether gear change should be

up or down by means of the gear lever. The
Telligent gearshift selects the optimum
gear. The point of gear change is determined by actuation of the clutch pedal.
The preselected gear can be changed

or deleted during the period allowed for
preselection.
Move gear lever to change gear until a

resistance can be felt.
The optimum gear selected by the
Telligent gearshift flashes briefly on
the right in the gear indicator.
The gear engaged is displayed on the
Release the gear lever.
The Telligent gearshift stores the preselected gear

for two minutes when the vehicle is
stationary
for ten seconds when the vehicle is in
motion
When the differential locks are activated, the Telligent gearshift stores the
preselected gears for 30 seconds.
If the Telligent gearshift finds, during

the period allowed for preselection,
that the preselected gear is no longer
optimum due to a change in driving
conditions, it modifies the gear preselected.
If the period for preselection has
elapsed and no gear has been selected,
the previously selected gear remains
engaged.
Move gear lever to change gear until a
3
4
5
6
7
The gear selected by the Telligent

gearshift flashes on the right in the
gear indicator.
8
9
227
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 Wait until the selected gear is engaged. Deleting preselection

2

3 Slowly release the clutch pedal and

4 Changing preselection
5
6
7
Select a different gear during the period allowed for preselection using the
gear lever with function button or the
half-gear rocker.
The newly selected gear flashes on the
right in the gear indicator. The period
allowed for preselection starts again.
8
9
228
Press neutral button during period allowed for preselection.

The preselected gear shown in the right
of the gear indicator is deleted.
Stopping
Brake the vehicle.
Press the neutral button.
tor.
The Telligent gearshift selects neutral.
brake or the parking brake.
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Press and hold function button 1 and

move gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt 2 and hold in this
position.
Reverse gear is engaged when
a selection sound is heard in the
R can be seen on the left in the gear
indicator.
Release gear lever and function button.
i
You can only select reverse gear R
when the vehicle is stationary and neutral N is selected.
To proceed, release parking brake.

Construction-site mode
When the differential locks are engaged
( page 253) the Telligent gearshift selects construction-site mode. In construction-site mode, the Telligent gearshift
shortens the period between gear changes
and thus minimises any interruption in
traction.
2
3
4
i
When construction-site mode is activated and you select a gear with
Telligent driver's choice, block changing is limited to:
5
6
Upshift: a maximum of one gear

Downshift: a minimum of one gear
7
8
Reverse gear cannot be selected with

the preselection feature ( page 223).
229
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1
2
Rapid change of direction

This procedure may be necessary to rock
out a bogged-in vehicle for example.
i
To rock out the vehicle, always start in
reverse gear.
If necessary, engage the differential
locks ( page 253).
Engage reverse gear.

Press function button 1 and move

gear lever forwards until a resistance
can be felt 2 to preselect a forwards
gear.
5
6
As soon as you feel the vehicle driving

backwards, depress the clutch pedal.
7
8
9
230
Watch the gear indicator, when a forwards gear has been engaged, release
the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal.
gear lever backwards until a resistance
can be felt 3 to preselect the reverse
gear.
As soon as you feel the vehicle driving
forwards, depress the clutch pedal.
Watch the gear indicator, when the reverse gear has been engaged, release
the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal.
Repeat the gear change procedure until
the vehicle is free.
Controls in detail
Gearshift
The Telligent automatic gearshift (EPS III

SA) is an electronic-pneumatic gear selection device with automated clutch actuation. To change gear, the gear lever or the
half-gear rocker on the gearshift unit must
be moved in the desired direction.
Gear indicator
This gear indicator shows the following information in the multi-function display:
the engaged gear and the selected

splitter group on the left 1 and
the recommended or preselected gear

(flashes) with the appropriate splitter
group on the right 2
x
Transmission neutral position
Reverse gear
4
1 Engaged: 8th gear, fast splitter group
2 Preselected: 7th gear, slow splitter
group
5
6
7
8
9
231
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 Modes of operation
Telligent
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The
automatic gearshift can be
used in two modes of operation.

The gearshift unit is located on a separate
folding armrest on the driver's seat.
Automatic mode "A" ( page 239).

You select a gear in which to pull away.
The Telligent automatic gearshift selects the gear depending on the
Gear lever
1
Function button
Shift up
Changing down/selecting reverse
Neutral button
Road speed
Half-gear rocker
Shift gear up
Engine load
Shift gear down
Manual mode
Automatic mode

Manual mode "M" ( page 243).
You select a gear in which to pull away
and when the vehicle is in motion, you
also determine the point and direction
of gear change (up or down). The electronics system engages the optimum
gear.
232
Gearshift unit
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Selecting operating mode
Risk of accident
The automatic and manual operating

modes can be selected using the operating
mode selector switch on the gearshift unit.
When the vehicle is being driven off-road or

with engaged differential locks in automatic
operating mode A, Telligent automatic gearshift can lead to undesired interruptions in
traction. The result of this could be dangerous driving situations.
For such journeys, always select manual
mode of operation M so that you can determine yourself when gears should be selected in accordance with the driving situation.

the current mode of operation in the
multi-function display following the
function check of the instruments.
The mode of operation can be changed

at any time when the ignition lock is in
position 2.
You can modify the gear chosen by the
Telligent automatic gearshift in both
modes of operation.
1 Operating mode selector switch
M Manual mode
A Automatic mode
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
233
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 Selecting manual mode
Selecting automatic mode
If you change from manual to automatic mode
when the vehicle is stationary and

with 4th gear selected
the Telligent automatic gearshift selects 2nd gear with fast splitter group.
4
5 Press manual mode M on the operating
mode selector switch.
Press automatic mode A on the operating mode selector switch.
man. in the multi-function display.
auto in the multi-function display.
7
8
9
234
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Engaging forward gears

In automatic mode you only need the gearshift unit
to pull away
to select reverse gear
to select transmission neutral
In manual mode you can determine the
point and direction of gear change (up or
down) for every gear using the gearshift
unit.
i
You can change the gear selected by
the Telligent automatic gearshift at
any time.
Changing gear when the vehicle is in

motion
Selecting a gear
Move gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt to change up or
backwards to change down.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages the optimum gear for the operating conditions.
Changing engaged gear
To change the gear engaged by the

Telligent automatic gearshift, you can
change up 2 or down 3 a full gear
using the gear lever or
change up 4 or down 5 a half-gear
using the half-gear rocker.
6
Move gear lever forwards 2 or

backwards 3.
8
9
235
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 Selecting gears
Selecting neutral
As soon as neutral is engaged, N is

shown on the left in the gear indicator.
Neutral position N can be selected from

any gear when the gear lever and the
half-gear rocker are in the basic position.
3
4
Risk of accident
5 Move half-gear rocker upwards 4 or

downwards 5.
6
7
i
In the neutral position N and with reverse gear engaged, the transmission
changes between slow and fast splitter
groups or vice versa.
Apply the brakes and bring the vehicle

to a halt.
Press and hold the neutral button 1.
N flashes on the right in the gear indicator.
236
When you select neutral, either engine braking or traction is interrupted. In certain circumstances the vehicle cannot be brought
to a halt. Never select neutral when the vehicle is in motion.
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Stop the vehicle.
Reverse gear R can only be selected

when

gear lever backwards 2 until a resistance can be felt.
the engine is running

the vehicle is stationary
2
3
neutral N is selected.
Reverse gear is engaged when
a selection sound can be heard in

the central loudspeaker
R can be seen on the left in the gear

indicator
To proceed, release the parking brake.

Slowly depress the accelerator.
7
8
9
237
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1
2
Rapid change of direction

This procedure may be necessary to rock
out a bogged-in vehicle for example.
i
To rock out the vehicle, always start in
reverse gear.
If necessary, engage the differential
locks ( page 253).
Select reverse gear and depress the accelerator.
As soon as you notice the vehicle driving backwards, press function button
1 and move the gear lever forwards
2 until a resistance can be felt.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a forwards gear.
6
7
8
9
238
As soon as you notice the vehicle driving forwards, press function button 1
and move the gear lever backwards 3
until a resistance can be felt.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages the reverse gear.
Repeat the gear change procedure until the vehicle is free.
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Automatic mode
Pulling away
i
too low, a system fault occurs. The engine must be stopped and restarted.
Move gear lever in desired direction of
travel 2.

The vehicle starts to move.
to a halt.
1
2
3
4
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a suitable gear.

right in the gear indicator and then
changes to the left position.
5
6
7
8
9
239
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Risk of accident

Bring the vehicle to a halt and have it recovered by a breakdown service. The brake system should be checked at a specialist
workshop.
Changing the starting gear

To block change up by two gears from
the gear you have currently engaged,
move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt.
To change up by one gear from the gear
you have currently engaged, press the
function button and move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be
felt.
To change down by one gear from the
gear you have currently engaged, press
the function button and move the gear
lever backwards until a resistance can
be felt.
To change up one half-gear, move the
half-gear rocker upwards until a resistance can be felt.
To change down one half-gear, move
the half-gear rocker downwards until a
8
9
240
Changing gear
Risk of accident

the Telligent automatic gearshift automatically disengages the gear. This could lead to
critical driving situations when driving up or
down hill. Do not allow the engine speed to
drop below 550 rpm.
The influencing factors which aid the

Telligent automatic gearshift in determining the optimum gear are
Road speed
Engine load
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Using the accelerator pedal you can actively influence the point of gear change and
the target gear.
Easy on the
accelerator
Heavy on the
accelerator
Shift up early
Shift up late
Accelerating
Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the maximum speed is reached
for the driving situation and the gear
engaged, Telligent automatic gearshift selects the next highest optimum
gear.
Kickdown
Decelerating
The kickdown function provides maximum

acceleration for the vehicle.
Take your foot away from the accelerator pedal.
Depress the accelerator past the pressure point until stop.
Slowly depress the brake pedal.

The Telligent automatic gearshift
shifts down into an optimum gear.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a lower gear.

Once the desired speed has been
reached, ease back on the accelerator.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a higher gear.
1
2
3
or
Activate the continuous brake

( page 262).
5
6
7
Manual gearshift
To advance the point of gear change,
move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages the next highest optimum gear.
241
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 Shifting down manually

2
Move gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt.

3 or
Press function button.
i
too low. To avoid overrevving of the engine, the Telligent automatic gearshift
only shifts down into a "safe" gear.

shifts down a gear.
5
or
6 Move half-gear rocker downwards.

7

shifts down a half-gear.
8
9
242
Risk of accident
Do not allow the engine to run unnecessarily
Brake the vehicle

The Telligent automatic gearshift disengages the gear just before idling
speed is reached.
Stopping
4 Move gear lever backwards.
Environmental note

running and a gear engaged. The Telligent
automatic gearshift disengages the gear
when idling speed is reached.
When you bring the vehicle to a halt, always
hold it using the service/or parking brake.
When the vehicle is stationary, a pullaway gear is selected.
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Manual mode
If the vehicle is left to stand for 60 seconds with a gear engaged, a warning
signal sounds. N flashes on the right in
the gear indicator.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you select manual mode if you intend driving the
vehicle off-road to avoid undesired upshifting, for example.
After another 30 seconds, another

warning signal sounds and the
Telligent automatic gearshift selects
neutral.
Manual mode has the following differences

compared to automatic mode:
To keep the transmission in the selected gear, briefly press the accelerator
pedal or the function button within
90 seconds of the vehicle having been
brought to a halt.
The pull away gear remains engaged
for another 90 seconds.
The pull away gear is 2nd gear in the

high splitter group
The options for changing gear with the

vehicle in motion are
using Telligent automatic gearshift by moving the gear lever

(Telligent driver's choice) or
using the function button and gear

lever for a full gear or via the halfgear rocker for a half-gear.
3
4
The driver must actuate gear change
The kickdown function is not available

When the vehicle is brought to a halt,
the Telligent automatic gearshift does
not select a pull away gear
6
7
8
9
243
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 Pulling away
Push the gear lever forwards 2.
If the gear you select with the

Telligent automatic gearshift is unsuitable, change the pull away gear.
The selected gear flashes briefly on

the right in the gear indicator. The
2nd gear in the high splitter group.
When the gear is engaged, the indicator shows the gear on the left.
2
3
4

The vehicle starts to move.
6
7
8
i
too low, a system fault could occur. The
engine must be stopped and restarted.
244
When you stop with manual mode activated, the Telligent automatic gearshift will not engage a pull away gear.
Select a suitable gear in which to pull
away.
Changing the pull away gear

To change up by one gear from the gear
you have currently engaged, press the
function button and move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be
felt.
To change down by one gear from the
gear you have currently engaged, press
the function button and move the gear
lever backwards until a resistance can
be felt.
To change up one half-gear, move the
half-gear rocker upwards until a resistance can be felt.
To change down one half-gear, move
the half-gear rocker downwards until a
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Upshifting with Telligent driver's
choice
Changing gear
Risk of accident

the Telligent automatic gearshift automatically disengages the gear. The engine braking effect will be lost or traction will be
interrupted. This could lead to dangerous
driving situations. Do not allow the engine
speed to drop below 550 rpm.
Move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 1.

Telligent automatic gearshift shifts
into a higher optimum gear. It will shift
up by at least a half-gear. When the
gear is engaged, the indicator will show
the gear on the left.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
245
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 Downshifting with Telligent driver's
choice
2
3

shifts into a lower optimum gear. It will
shift down by at least a half-gear. The
selected gear flashes briefly on the
right in the gear indicator. When the
gear is engaged, the indicator will show
the gear on the left.
Upshifting by one gear
i
4

too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, the Telligent automatic gearshift
will only shift down into a "safe" gear.
5
6
7 Move the gear lever backwards until a
resistance can be felt 1.
8
9
246
Press and hold function button 1.
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 2.
Downshifting by one gear

Telligent automatic gearshift shifts up
by one gear. When the gear is engaged,
the indicator will show the gear on the
left.
Move the gear lever backwards until a

resistance can be felt 2.
by one gear. When the gear is engaged,
the indicator will show the gear on the
left.
1
2
3
4
i
5
6
Press and hold function button 1.
7
8
9
247
Controls in detail
Gearshift
1 Upshifting by one gear
Downshifting by one gear

2
3
4
5 Move the half-gear rocker upwards un- Move the half-gear rocker downwards
6
7
til a resistance can be felt 1.
until a resistance can be felt 2.

by one half-gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear
on the left.

Telligent automatic gearshift shifts
down by one half-gear. When the gear
is engaged, the indicator will show the
gear on the left.
8
9
248
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Stopping
Risk of accident

running and a gear engaged. The Telligent
automatic gearshift will disengage the gear
when idling speed is reached.
Always hold the vehicle using the service
brake or the parking brake when you stop.
Environmental note
Do not allow the engine to run unnecessarily
Brake the vehicle.
If the vehicle stands still for longer than

60 seconds, a warning signal will sound
and N will flash on the right in the gear
indicator.
The Telligent automatic gearshift will

disengage the gear just before idling
speed is reached.
!
When you stop with manual mode activated, the Telligent automatic gearshift will not engage a pull away gear.
Select a suitable gear in which to pull
away.
After another 30 seconds, another

warning signal will sound and the
neutral.
To keep the transmission in the selected gear, briefly press the accelerator
pedal or the function button within
90 seconds after the vehicle has been
brought to a halt.
The gear will remain engaged for another 90 seconds.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
249
Controls in detail
Gearshift
Parking the vehicle
Risk of accident
If you do not use the parking brake to hold

the vehicle, there is a risk of it rolling away.
The Telligent automatic gearshift always
selects neutral when the engine has been
switched off. You cannot park the vehicle
with a gear engaged. Always hold the vehicle
using the parking brake.
2
3
4
Stop the vehicle.
Apply the parking brake ( page 62).

Select neutral 1.
7
8
9
250
Controls in detail
Driving
Driving
Tachograph
An event message is displayed in the

multi-function display by the driver information system if there are any faults
in the tachograph or its equipment.
Use the tachograph to record and comply

with the legal requirements in respect of
Driving time
Working time
Tachograph,
SIEMENS VDO Automotive "KIENZLE"
Short breaks
Long breaks
Speed limits.
Observe the separate Operating Instructions in the vehicle document wallet.
Risk of injury
G
Tachograph, TVI
When you enter and exit the vehicle or move

about in the cab, there is a danger of you injuring yourself on the opened tachograph.
Always keep the tachograph closed.
i
A correctly filled out disc must always
be inserted in the tachograph for any
journey.
1
2
Tachograph discs with recorded information must be kept for at least 1 year.
Repair work and removal and installation of the tachograph may only be
carried out by an authorised workshop.

5
6
7
8
9
251
Controls in detail
Driving
Transfer case
You can only engage the transfer case

when the vehicle is stationary and in
neutral.
On vehicles with Telligent automatic

gearshift:
Selector positions of transfer case
Press operating mode selector switch

M.
On-road selector position
The multi-function display shows man.
Turn transfer case switch to

position 1.
On-road operation is engaged.
Off-road selector position
Turn transfer case switch to

position 2.
Off-road operation is engaged.
6
7
8
Switch for transfer case
1 On-road selector position

2 Off-road selector position
252
3 Operating mode selector switch

A Automatic mode
M Manual mode
Controls in detail
Driving
i
The transfer case off-road position is
intended primarily for driving off-road
or up steep slopes.
In neutral position 0, there will be no
drive from the transfer case to the driving axles. The neutral position 0 of the
transfer case is only required for
switching from position 1 to 2.
Differential locks
If necessary, engage differential locks on
slippery roads or for off-road use for example.
Engaging differential locks
The individual differential locks can

only be operated in sequence.
Risk of accident
Steering is impaired when a differential lock

is engaged. Never drive on a surface with
high grip when the differential locks are engaged.
3
4
5
Turn differential lock switch to

position 1.
When the vehicle is in motion, the

transfer case switch must always be in
on-road 1 or off-road position 2.
The inter-axle lock/through-drive is

engaged.
0 Off
1 Inter-axle lock, transfer case/throughdrive
2 Cross-axle lock, rear axle
3 Cross-axle lock, front axle
6
7
8
9
253
Controls in detail
Driving
1 Turn differential lock switch to
position 2.
2
3
4
5
If the driving wheels slip, do not engage

the differential locks. There is a danger
of the differential locks becoming damaged.
The rear axle lateral lock is also engaged.

Turn differential lock switch to
position 3.
Engage only when the vehicle is stationary or creeping forwards slowly.
The front axle lateral lock is also engaged.

The multi-function display shows the relevant status once the switch process has
completed.
1 Cross-axle lock, front axle

2 Inter-axle lock, transfer case/throughdrive
3 Cross-axle lock, rear axle
# Differential locks engaged
+ Differential locks disengaged
7
8
9
254
Pull away carefully. In certain circumstances, the locking function of the differential locks may not be fully
engaged.
Controls in detail
Driving
Disengaging differential locks
Turn differential lock switch from 1 to

position 0.
The inter-axle lock/through-drive is
disengaged.

position 2.
The lateral lock of the front axle is disengaged.
position 1.
Power take-offs
The engine must run at a specified speed
to drive auxiliary equipment (e.g. pumps).
The differential lock indicator in the multifunction display will be deactivated.
the accelerator pedal
If the indicator is not deactivated when the

lateral lock is disengaged:
the multi-function lever on the steering

column ( page 265)
Drive the vehicle backwards and forwards slightly.

If the indicator does not go out when the
inter-axle lock is disengaged:
The engine speed can be controlled with
3
4
an overspeed switch
or automatically with the constant engine speed switch
depending on the equipment level.
Stop the vehicle and drive the vehicle

backwards for a short distance.
6
7
The lateral lock of the rear axle is disengaged.
8
9
255
Controls in detail
Driving
i
Vehicles with engine speed governor:
When the power take-off is activated, it

is possible to exceed the governed engine speed.
3
!
4
5
In the case of custom vehicle conversions, observe manufacturer's operating instructions.

Do not switch on power take-off until
the parking brake is applied

neutral is selected
7
8
9
256
The multi-function display shows the Apply

the parking brake ! event message.
If the J power take-off symbol flashes

in the multi-function display, the power
take-off cannot be engaged. The electronics system has not automatically recognised the vehicle's operating state
(transmission in neutral, vehicle stationary, parking brake applied).
Apply the parking brake and repeat the

selection process.
Check the vehicle's operating state

and repeat the selection process.
Notes for vehicles with programmable

special module (PSM)
If the parking brake is released, the power
take-off cannot be engaged.
i
If the display flashes again, consult a
workshop.
Controls in detail
Driving
Engaging transmission-dependent
power take-off
Press the upper section of switch 1.

The indicator lamp in the switch and
the J power take-off symbol flash
Note on power take-off symbol:
# Power take-off engaged
1 Power take-off switch 1
i
The transmission-dependent power
take-off can only be engaged when:
Transmission with electronic gear

change inhibitor:
When the power take-off is engaged, the transmission cannot be
operated
+ Power take-off disengaged
Transmission without electronic gear

change inhibitor:
Disengaging transmission-dependent
power take-off
PTO can be operated with vehicle

stationary
PTO can be operated only if 1st,

2nd or 3rd gear is selected with vehicle in motion

the J power take-off symbol go out
2
3
4
5
6
!
If the power take-off is engaged, do not
change gear when the vehicle is in motion.
neutral is selected
7
8
9
257
Controls in detail
Driving
power take-off with splitter group

gearshift
The power take-off can be run at 2 differ-
With the engine running at idling speed:
splitter group.
preselect fast or slow speed using the

half-gear rocker on the control panel of
the Telligent gearshift.
1 Engaging transmission-dependent
2 ent speeds by selecting the low or high
3 Vehicles without Telligent automatic

gearshift
4 With the engine running at idling speed:

5
6
preselect fast or slow speed using the

split-shift on the gear lever or the halfgear rocker on the control panel of the
Telligent gearshift.
Up = fast
Down = slow
7 Depress the clutch pedal fully.

8
After about ten seconds, press the upper section of the power take-off
switch 1. The PTO will be engaged or
disengaged.
9 Release the clutch pedal.
258
Engaging engine-dependent power

take-off (NMW)
Press the upper section of power takeoff switch 1. The PTO will be engaged
or disengaged.
i
Clutch actuation is automatic with the
Telligent automatic gearshift.
i
The engine-dependent power take-off
can only be engaged when:
neutral is selected
Controls in detail
Driving
with the engine running at a maximum
speed of 1,700 rpm.
the J power take-off symbol in the
multi-function display flash.
Power take-off display:
# PTO engaged
+ PTO disengaged
Transmission with electronic gear change

inhibitor:
The transmission cannot be operated

when the power take-off is engaged.
Transmission without gear change inhibitor:
The power take-off can be engaged

whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion.
Disengaging engine-dependent power

take-off (NMW)
Engaging engine-resident power takeoff
The engine-resident power take-off can

only be engaged when:

multi-function display go out.
4
multi-function display flash.
Power take-off symbol:
# PTO engaged
neutral is selected
+ PTO disengaged
5
6
7
8
9
259
Controls in detail
Driving
1 Disengaging engine-resident power

take-off
2
3

multi-function display go out.
Switching on constant engine speed

function
The constant engine speed function can
only be switched on when:
neutral is selected

up.
i
When the constant engine speed function is switched on, the working speed
will remain constant regardless of the
engine load.
4
Switching off constant engine speed
function
Press the lower section of switch 1.

out.
6
7
1 Constant engine speed switch
8
9
260
Controls in detail
Driving
Continuous brake
Risk of accident
Do not operate the engine brake or retarder

on a slippery road surface. The wheels could
lock. The vehicle could skid.
1 Green
2 Yellow
Engine brake operating range
3 Red
Overrevving range
4 Green diode
strip
Econometer
On long downhill stretches, downshift

in good time and operate the engine
brake to make use of the engine braking effect. Note the effective engine
braking range (yellow section) marked
on the rpm counter.
5
6
7
8
9
261
Controls in detail
Driving
Vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift:
1 Operating the continuous brake

2
3
4
Pull multi-function lever, continuous

brake (engine brake/retarder) from
position 0 to position 1, 2, 3, 4
or 5.
If the d brake indicator lamp lights up

in the instrument panel when the continuous brake is operated, the speed of the vehicle is too high for a lower gear to be
selected:
When the continuous brake is operated, the b indicator lamp lights up in

the instrument panel.
When the lever is in position 1, the

braking effect is at its least.
When the lever is in position 5 the

braking effect is at its greatest.
7
8
9
262
Decelerate using the service brake.

Multi-function lever, continuous brake (example)
i
If the service brake is applied when the
continuous brake is active, the transmission will shift down in accordance
with the driving situation.
Controls in detail
Driving
Deactivating the continuous brake
Engine brake
Move multi-function lever to

position 0.
The engine braking effect is dependent on

the engine speed. High engine speed
means high engine braking effect.
The continuous brake is deactivated

and the b indicator lamp goes out
If the b indicator lamp does not go out:
Have the continuous brake serviced or
repaired as necessary.
1
2
At an engine speed of below 900 rpm,

the engine brake is ineffective. The engine brake can only be used in a rev
range between 900 rpm and approximately 2,300 rpm.

workshop.
5
1 Optimum engine braking efficiency
6
7
8
9
263
Controls in detail
Driving
1 Retarder
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Risk of accident
If the multi-function display shows a retarder event message F, it is possible to deactivate the retarder during ABS regulation
or by depressing the accelerator. At the
same time, the status indicator will light up
red. Drive with particular care. Have the retarder serviced or repaired as necessary.
264
The retarder's braking effect is reduced automatically depending on the coolant temperature.
Adjust driving style.
On long downhill stretches, in particular, downshift in good time to make use
of the engine braking effect.
i
If the retarder's braking effect is reduced automatically due to the coolant
temperature, the multi-function display
will show an event message G.
If the retarder indicator lamp b
lights up with the lever in position 0,
do not operate the retarder. Have the
retarder checked.

workshop.
Notes on cleaning and care of retarder
( page 416).
Controls in detail
Driving
Idling speed
After the engine has been started, the
idling speed is regulated automatically according to the coolant temperature.
It is possible to increase the engine speed
using the multi-function lever on the steering column. In this way, it is possible to
provide the necessary speed for auxiliary
equipment, such as pumps.
Adjusting idling speed
Using the multi-function lever on the steering column it is possible to set the idling
speed between approximately 550 rpm
and a maximum of 750 rpm with the vehicle stationary.
2
3
4
Vehicles with ART
1 To increase idling speed

2 To reduce idling speed
3 To switch off increased idling speed
Observe the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.
5
6
Vehicles without ART
7
8
9
265
Controls in detail
Driving
1 Increase idling speed by approximately

2
3
20 rpm
Decrease idling speed by approximately

20 rpm
Move the multi-function lever to

position 1 .

position 2 .
The idling speed will be increased in increments of approximately 20 rpm.

Increase idling speed
4 Hold the multi-function lever in

position 1 .
The idling speed will be increased to a

maximum of approximately 750 rpm
6
7
8
9
266
The idling speed will be decreased in increments of approximately 20 rpm.

To reduce idling speed
Hold the multi-function lever in
position 2 .
The idling speed will be decreased to a
maximum of approximately 550 rpm.
Deactivate increased idling speed

position 3 5.
The increased idling speed is deactivated.
i
When the vehicle is in motion, the increased idling speed will switch off automatically at a speed of above
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
Switching between various driving
systems
You can switch between the following driving systems:
Limiter
Cruise control
i
Switching between driving systems is
immediate. The multi-function display
is deactivated for approximately three
seconds. During this period there is no
indication of road speed or distance in
the multi-function display.
Switching from limiter to cruise control

and back
i
You can switch between the limiter and
cruise control:
1
2
whether these are active or inactive
with the vehicle stationary or in motion
4
5
6
7
8
9
267
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching from Telligent distance
control to limiter and back
1
2
The limiter is activated. The multi-function display shows c.

Press button 1 briefly.
The Telligent distance control is activated. The multi-function display
shows b.
3
4
5 1 Changeover button
Cruise control is activated. The multifunction display shows d.
7 Press button 1 briefly.

The limiter activated. The multi-function display shows c.
8
9
268
Vehicles with ART
1 Changeover button
Controls in detail
Driving systems
control to cruise control and back
Switching between Telligent distance
control and cruise control is only possible
when the vehicle is in motion and cruise
control is activated.
Press rotary switch 1 briefly.

Cruise control is activated. The multifunction display shows d.
Press rotary switch 1 briefly.
The Telligent distance control is activated. The multi-function display
shows b.
To maintain the set maximum speed on

downhill stretches, the limiter will operate
the continuous brake automatically at the
set maximum speed +4 km/h.
The limiter cannot be activated until the vehicle is moving faster than 2 km/h.
Risk of accident
Limiter
Using the limiter, you can limit the road
speed above approximately 10 mph
(15 km/h). You can accelerate using the
accelerator pedal up to the set maximum
speed.
The limiter is intended to assist the driver

only. The driver is responsible at all times for
the speed of the vehicle and for maintaining
an adequate distance to the vehicle in front.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 ART rotary switch
7
8
9
269
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Increasing speed in increments of

0.5 km/h
Move multi-function lever to

position 1 .
Moving the multi-function lever, activates and stores the current speed.
Moving the lever again will have the effect of increasing the speed in increments of 0.5 km/h.
Multi-function lever (example)
5 Activating limiter
6
Press button 2 continually until c

is shown in the multi-function display.
The limiter is selected.
7
8
9
270
i
If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set
speed limit. After about five seconds,
the display will go out.
1 Selected driving system

2 Set maximum speed
3 Limiter symbol
4 Current distance from vehicle in front
Controls in detail
Driving systems
5 km/h
Reverting to set speed limit
2
3
4

position 1 .
Holding the multi-function lever increases the speed in increments of
5 km/h.
Releasing the multi-function lever
stores the current speed after it has
been increased.
Precondition: The limiter was previously

deactivated.

position 2 .
Moving the multi-function lever will select the previously stored speed.
The multi-function display will show the
previously stored speed.
7
8
9
271
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1
2
3
i
If the lever is moved again, the speed
will be reduced by 0.5 km/h.
Decreasing the speed in steps of

0.5 km/h
4
5
Precondition: The limiter is active.

position 2 .
Moving the lever will cause the speed

to be reduced in steps of 0.5 km/h.
7
8
9
272
i
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing the speed in steps
of 5 km/h

position 2 .
Holding the multi-function lever decreases the speed in steps of 5 km/h.
stores the current speed after it has
been reduced.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
273
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 Switching off limiter
Exceeding stored speed limit
Even after the engine has been

switched off, the stored speed limit is
still available.
If it is necessary to exceed the stored

speed limit to overtake, for example:
3
4
5 Move the multi-function lever to
position 3 5.
The limiter is deactivated. The c

display in the multi-function display will
be cancelled.
7
8
9
274
If you drive downhill and downshift

without adjusting the speed, the limiter
will set a temporary engine speed of
approximately 2,200 rpm. The set maximum speed remains in the system and
will be recalled as soon as this is possible in a higher gear.
Depress the accelerator briefly past

the maximum speed point to the stop.
As soon as the overtaking manoeuvre
is over, release the accelerator pedal
and depress it again.
This will bring the set limiting speed
back into effect.
i
If at this time the vehicle is travelling
faster than the stored maximum speed,
the vehicle will be slowed down automatically with the continuous brake.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Cruise control (combined

acceleration/braking control)
Vehicles without Telligent distance control (ART):
Cruise control can store any road speed
above 10 mph (15 km/h).
Cruise control brakes the vehicle when
the set speed is exceeded by 2.5 mph
(4 km/h).
Cruise control accelerates the vehicle on
uphill climbs. On downhill stretches, the
continuous brake brakes the vehicle (engine brake/ retarder).
Risk of accident
Do not operate the retarder on slippery road

surfaces. The wheels could lock. The vehicle
could skid.
Cruise control is intended to assist the driver only. The driver is responsible at all times
for the speed of the vehicle and for maintaining an adequate distance to the vehicle
in front.
Use cruise control only when it is safe to
maintain the vehicle's speed at a constant
level in traffic situations. The cruise control
system is not able to read the road and traffic conditions.
On uphill or downhill stretches, there is

a possibility that the cruise control system may not be able to maintain the set
speed
If you drive downhill and downshift

without adjusting the speed, the limiter
will set a temporary engine speed of
approximately 2,200 rpm. The set maximum speed remains in the system and
will be recalled as soon as this is possible in a higher gear.
When cruise control is activated, there
is no need to depress the accelerator.
3
4
5
6
7
!
Do not exceed the maximum speed in
each of the gears. Keep an eye on the
rev counter ( page 144).
8
9
275
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating cruise control/Increasing

speed
Increasing the speed in increments of

0.5 km/h
Accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator to above 10 mph (15 km/h).

position 1 .
On vehicles with all-wheel drive: Accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal to above 30 mph (approximately
50 km/h).
4

position 1 .
Cruise control is activated. The multifunction display shows . The vehicle will accelerate.
Release the multi-function lever. The

current speed is stored in the memory.
7
8
9
276
Moving the multi-function lever, stores

the current speed.
Moving the lever again will have the effect of increasing the speed in increments of 0.5 km/h.
i
When the speed is changed, the multifunction display will show the current
set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will be cancelled.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
If the lever is moved again, the speed

will be reduced by 0.5 km/h.
set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
Decreasing speed in steps of 0.5 km/h
1 Selected driving system
2 Set speed
3 Cruise control symbol
Precondition: Cruise control active.
Reverting to the set speed limit

position 2 .
Precondition: Cruise control was previously deactivated.

position 2 .
2
3
4
5
Moving the multi-function lever decreases the speed in steps of

0.5 km/h.
6
7
Moving the multi-function lever will select the speed previously stored.
The cruise control system accelerates

the vehicle to the speed previously set.
277
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Automatic cruise control deactivation
Cruise control is deactivated automatically:
3 Reducing speed
4
5
6

position 2 .
Holding the multi-function lever decreases the speed.
stores the current speed.
Deactivating cruise control

position 3 5.
Cruise control is deactivated. The indicator in the multi-function display
will be cancelled.
i
Even after the engine has been
switched off, the stored speed is still
available.
7
8
9
278
if the vehicle is braked using the service brake when the cruise control system is currently accelerating the
vehicle. A short warning signal will
sound.
The speed setting remains in the memory.
if the speed drops below approximately
6 mph (10 km/h), a short warning signal will sound.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
if you switch over to limiter. A short
warning signal will sound.
Reverting to stored speed
if the clutch is kept depressed for longer than five seconds, e.g. during gear
changing. A short warning signal will
sound.
If you depress the clutch for less than
five seconds, cruise control will remain
active.
when the gearbox is left in neutral for
longer than five seconds.
Multi-function lever (example)
1 Revert to stored speed

To revert to the stored speed:

position 1 .
The vehicle continues at the stored

speed again.
Special note on using the cruise control

system
To overtake a vehicle, you can accelerate past the stored speed using the accelerator pedal. As soon as the
overtaking manoeuvre is completed
and pressure is taken off the accelerator pedal, the cruise control system reverts to the stored speed.
On vehicles with all-wheel drive, the

cruise control system is deactivated
automatically when the speed
drops below approximately 30 mph
(45 km/h). A short warning signal will
sound. The speed setting remains in
the memory.
4
5
6
7
8
9
279
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 If the anti-lock braking system or the
acceleration skid control (ASR) is deactivated or defective:
2
3
4
the cruise control system will only

store speeds above 30 mph
(50 km/h)
the cruise control system will be deactivated automatically when the
speed drops below approximately
28 mph (45 km/h)
5 Additional braking with the continuous

brake is possible. The cruise control
system will remain active.
6
7
8
9
When the continuous brake is deactivated, the vehicle will accelerate to the
last stored speed.
If you brake the vehicle using the continuous brake, you can also use the
service brakes. The cruise control system will remain active.
Further information on the continuous
brake ( page 261).
280
Telligent distance control (ART)

The Telligent distance control (ART) is a
convenience system that supplements the
controlling function of the cruise control
system (accelerating/braking control)
with a distance control function.
If the Telligent distance control detects a
slower vehicle ahead, it will slow your vehicle down automatically. Your vehicle will
then be driven at the same speed as that of
the vehicle ahead at a preset distance. The
speed stored in the cruise control memory
remains unaffected.
As soon as the traffic situation permits,
e.g. if the vehicle ahead changes lanes,
your vehicle will accelerate up to the
stored speed in the cruise control memory.
Telligent distance control works like a

conventional cruise control system when
there is no vehicle driving in front.
Risk of accident
Do not use ART on icy roads or in the fog, for

example.
The Telligent distance control cannot automatically adapt the distance to the vehicle in
front to changing road and visibility conditions.
Telligent distance control is merely a tool
to assist the driver.
The driver is responsible at all times for the
speed of the vehicle and for maintaining an
adequate distance to the vehicle in front.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Telligent distance control cannot be activated:
when the vehicle is stationary
during the electronics system self-diagnosis after the engine has been started
at a speed below 10 mph (approximately 15 km/h)

if the clutch is depressed
if the service brake is applied
1 Unsuccessful attempt at activation
during ABS, ASR (acceleration skid

control) or SR control (Telligent stability control)
Activating Telligent distance control
An unsuccessful attempt to activate the

Telligent distance control is shown in the
multi-function display for approximately
three seconds by , km/h.
Telligent distance control can only be activated when the vehicle is travelling at a
speed above 10 mph (15 km/h).
Multi-function lever, cruise control with

integrated ART
Accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator pedal to above 10 mph

(15 km/h),
position 1 or 2 briefly,
The current speed is stored in the
memory.
5
6
7
8
9
281
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Changing the specified distance to the
vehicle in front
Using the ART rotary switch 3, you can

change the specified distance to a vehicle
travelling ahead. The minimum specified
distance to a vehicle in front is approximately 15 m.
2
3
Turn ART rotary switch 3 to position

1 or 2 and select desired distance
specification.
Release ART rotary switch.
The specified distance is stored in the
memory.
i
When changes are made to the distance specification, the multi-function
display shows information about the
specified distance h.
4
5
6
7
If ART is activated, the multi-function display shows:

1 Current distance from vehicle in
front
2 Telligent distance control symbol
3 Current set speed
1 To reduce specified distance
2 To increase specified distance
3 ART rotary switch
8
9
282
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Increasing the set speed
i
When the set speed is changed, the
multi-function display will show the
current set speed. After about five seconds, the display will go out.

0.5 km/h

position 1 .
The current set speed increases in increments of 0.5 km/h.

Release lever. The current set speed is
stored.
3
4
i

position 1 .
The set speed is increased to the next
highest speed in increments of 5 (e.g.
62 km/h to 65 km/h and then
70 km/h and so on).
current set speed is stored.
1 Set speed
2 ART symbol
5
6
7
8
9
283
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 Reducing the set speed

Decreasing the speed in steps of

0.5 km/h
position 2 .
4
5 Hold the multi-function lever in
position 2 .
6
7
Deactivating Telligent distance

control
The set speed is reduced to the next

lowest speed in steps of 5 (e.g.
62 km/h to 60 km/h and then
55 km/h and so on).
8
9
284
The current set speed decreases in

steps of 0.5 km/h.
i

position 3 5.
Telligent distance control is deactivated. The stored speed and the specified distance remain in the memory.
The indicators in the multi-function display will be cancelled ( page 282).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
control to cruise control
Automatic deactivation of Telligent

distance control
Telligent distance control is deactivated
automatically
when the speed drops below 6 mph
(10 km/h)
when cruise control accelerates the vehicle and the service brake is applied at
the same time
Move ART rotary switch briefly in

direction 1.
symbol for the activated cruise
control function and the current specified distance to the vehicle ahead.
when the chassis on vehicles with

pneumatic suspension is not in the
standard position
if the clutch is kept depressed for longer than five seconds, e.g. during gear
changing
If you depress the clutch for less than
five seconds, the Telligent distance
control remains active
if the transmission is set at R or N
1
2
3
If the distance control is automatically

switched off, the warning buzzer will
give a single signal.
if a fault develops in the ART electronics system
6
7
8
9
285
Controls in detail
Driving systems
2
3
4
5
After Telligent distance control has

been switched off automatically, the
cruise control function can still be activated.
If Telligent distance control cannot be
activated, e.g. if there is a fault in the
system, the warning buzzer will sound
once. The control function of the cruise
control system is automatically activated.
Current distance from vehicle in

front
Symbol for activated cruise control function
Current set speed
Driving with Telligent distance control

Telligent distance control is designed for
use on motorways or expressways.
Risk of accident
If a stationary obstacle is encountered, the

vehicle will not be braked automatically. Do
not use ART on B roads, for example, or in
built up areas.
7
8
9
286
Telligent distance control function only

works in interaction with vehicles travelling
ahead. It does not respond to stationary obstacles on the road (e.g. broken down vehicles or a traffic congestion).
Telligent distance control slows the vehicle
down automatically to maintain the set distance to the vehicle travelling in front.
Telligent distance control will be activated
if the vehicle in front changes lanes, for example.
It is absolutely essential to brake the vehicle
using the service brake in addition to the automatic braking function of the vehicle if:
the warning symbol l lights up in the
multi-function display
the warning buzzer sounds twice in succession.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Risk of accident
If a stationary obstacle is encountered, the

vehicle will not be braked automatically. If
Telligent distance control detects a stationary obstacle, only a distance warning is
activated:
The multi-function display shows warning symbol l,
The warning buzzer sounds twice in addition. Decrease driving speed using the
service brakes.
Switch Telligent distance control (ART) off
before leaving motorways or expressways. If
the system cannot detect an obstacle ahead
(e.g. vehicle travelling in front), the vehicle
will accelerate to the stored set speed.
Telligent distance control cannot detect oncoming traffic.

The acoustic warning from Telligent
distance control (ART) can be switched
on or off under Cruise Control acoustic in the Configuration submenu of
the Settings menu ( page 184).
Telligent distance control distance

sensor
Unfavourable weather conditions (e.g.
snow, slush) or heavy soiling of the sensor
cover can impair the Telligent distance
control function.
2
3
4
The retarder and/or engine brake can

be switched on even when ART is active.
If the vehicle is slowed down by the
cruise control system with the continuous brake (engine brake/retarder) and
you depress the brake pedal, the cruise
control system will not be deactivated.
5
6
1 ART distance sensor cover
Keep the sensor cover in the front
bumper clean.
7
8
9
287
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 Telligent distance control distance
warning
This function is also active even when
2 Telligent distance control is switched off.

If there is a danger of colliding with a mov-
3 ing obstacle in your lane, a distance warning will be activated.

Telligent distance control cannot detect
4 oncoming traffic. There will be no distance

warning.
5
6
7
8
9
288
Distance warning
The multi-function display shows the l
distance warning. The warning buzzer
sounds twice in addition.
Risk of accident
There is no automatic distance control (automatic braking), i.e. the driver must slow
the vehicle down using the brakes.
The system cannot always detect complex
driving situations clearly. This may lead to
missing or incorrect distance warnings.
If a distance warning is activated when the

vehicle is in motion:
Pay particular attention to the traffic
situation,
If necessary, avoid the vehicle ahead,
If necessary, brake the vehicle using
the brakes.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Special driving situations with
Cornering, entering and exiting corners
Risk of accident
When cornering, or entering and exiting corners, the system may have difficulty in detecting oncoming traffic. Your own vehicle
may then brake unexpectedly or late.
Problems may occur in detecting oncoming traffic:
on slip roads, whether joining or leaving the main road
if there are moving vehicles on the

verge (e.g. breakdown recovery vehicles)
Problems may occur in detecting oncoming

traffic:
Slip roads, verges

Risk of accident
When cornering, or entering and exiting

corners, the system may have difficulty in
detecting oncoming traffic.
on slip roads, whether joining or leaving

the main road,
if there are moving vehicles on the verge
(e.g. breakdown recovery vehicles).
Your own vehicle may then brake unexpectedly or late.
6
7
8
9
289
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 Offset driving style, lane change
Cutting in
Telligent level control

Pneumatic suspension
The chassis can be lowered or raised using

the control panel to pickup or offload demountable rack systems, containers or
semitrailers. To use the control panel outside the cab,
3
4
remove the control panel from its

bracket.
5 An offset driving style to the vehicle ahead

6
7
can cause problems in detection.

Telligent distance control may have trouble detecting the vehicle ahead if it is offset (i.e. not inline with your vehicle). The
distance to the offset vehicle ahead is too
short. The driver must brake the vehicle to
increase the distance to the vehicle ahead.
Vehicles that cut into your lane without

keeping a safe distance will only be detected by Telligent distance control when the
sensors can pick up the vehicle. The distance to the vehicle cutting in is too short.
The driver must brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the cutting in vehicle ahead.
8
Control panel next to driver's seat
290
Controls in detail
Driving systems
If Telligent level control is active, this

will be shown automatically in the
multi-function display, e.g. chassis
frame below normal position B or
chassis frame above normal
position A.
The level control display is deactivated
when the vehicle leaves the factory.
The level control can be switched on or
off permanently in the Configuration
submenu of the Settings menu in the
driver information system
( page 186).
When the key in the ignition lock is
turned to position 2, the height of the
chassis will be adjusted automatically.
Risk of injury
If you do not replace the control panel in the

bracket designed for this purpose, there is a
danger of tripping on the cable, as you get
out of the cab. Always replace the control
panel in the bracket designed for this purpose to ensure that the cable is routed towards the cab rear.
!
Lower the chassis frame completely
before offloading demountable platforms or containers. Otherwise the
chassis could rebound suddenly when
the exchange body is offloaded. This
could damage the shock absorbers.
If the reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is insufficient, leave

the engine running to build up the pressure in the compressed-air system.
When coupling to semitrailers or picking up demountable platforms or containers, leave the engine running. This
ensures that there is always sufficient
reservoir pressure in the compressedair system.
The multi-function display will indicate
Telligent level regulation by means of
the K system abbreviation/symbol
in the driver information system.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
291
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 Storing the chassis height
1 Operation indicator
Front chassis,
raise/lower
Saving chassis height:
2 Operation indicator
Rear chassis,
raise/lower
Press preselect button 3 or 4.

1 or 2 will light up.
3 On/off
Front chassis preselection,
raise/lower
The chassis height can be stored and recalled using buttons "M1" 5 and "M2" 6.
4 On/off
Rear chassis preselection,
raise/lower
5
6
Control panel
5 M1 chassis height memory 1

6 M2 chassis height memory 2
7 Travel position
8 Raise
9 Lower
a STOP (raising/lowering)
292
Apply the parking brake.

Press raise 8 or lower 9 button. 1

or 2 will light up.
The multi-function display shows chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal position B.
Once the required height is achieved,
press and hold STOP button a and
then press button M1 5 or M2 6.
The chassis height is stored.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Loading and unloading the vehicle
When you load and unload the vehicle and

wish to maintain a constant chassis height,
this height can be stored.
Release STOP button a.

Vehicles with trailing axle: lower the
trailing axle.
If necessary use buttons 8 or 9 on
the control panel to set the desired
height of the chassis.
Run the engine until the pressure regulator cuts out.
Press and hold STOP button a.
i
The key can be removed and the cab
can be locked.
Using buttons 8 or 9 on the control

panel, the desired height of the chassis
can be set.
Run the engine until the pressure regulator cuts out.
Press and hold STOP button a.
Standby switch
If the reservoir pressure in the compressed-air circuit is sufficient, the stored

chassis height will be kept constant for approximately 5 hours.
Release STOP button a.
The chassis height set will remain constant.

Vehicles with trailing axle: lower the
trailing axle.
6
7
8
9
293
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 Raising or lowering the chassis

2 Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.

3
4
5
6
Press preselect button 3 or 4.

1 or 2 will light up. To raise the front
and rear of the chassis equally, press
preselect button 3 and 4. 1 and 2
will light up.
Press raise 8 or lower 9 button. The
multi-function display shows chassis
above normal position A or chassis
below normal position B. Once the
required height is achieved, press the
STOP button a.
7
8
If there is a stored chassis height:

Press button M1 5 or M2 6. The
chassis frame will be raised or lowered
automatically to the stored height.
Driving position
Press the driving position button 7.
The operating lamp will go out. The
chassis will be raised or lowered automatically to the stored height.
i
When the normal position is achieved
(driving position), the indicator for
chassis above normal position A or
chassis below normal position B will
go out in the multi-function display.
Risk of accident
If the chassis is above the normal position

and you do not observe maximum headroom
notices when driving through underpasses,
there is a danger of the vehicle becoming
damaged. Ensure that the vehicle is not
higher than the permitted maximum headroom when it is being driven. In Germany,
for instance, maximum vehicle height must
not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in). Comply
with national legislation in other countries
(also when the vehicle is used for international transport work).
The driving and braking properties of the vehicle can be affected if chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal
position B is shown in the multi-function
display.
Only drive the vehicle when the chassis is in
the normal position (driving position) S.
294
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicles for high-volume goods transport raised driving position
To improve ride comfort, the chassis can
be raised while the vehicle is being driven.
Raising the chassis

The multi-function display shows raised
driving position C.
Lowering the chassis
The C raised driving position indicator in the multi-function display will be
cancelled when the driving position is
reached.
If the chassis is in the raised position and

you do not observe maximum headroom notices when driving through underpasses,
there is a danger of the vehicle becoming
damaged. Make sure that the permissible
height limit is not exceeded when the suspension is raised. In Germany, for instance,
maximum vehicle height must not exceed
4 metres (13 ft 1 in). Comply with national
legislation in other countries (also when the
vehicle is used for international transport
work).
Risk of accident
1 Raised driving position switch
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
295
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1
2
Starting-off aid, three-axle vehicles

If the driving wheels slip on snowy or icy
road surfaces, activate the starting-off aid.
i
The starting-off aid with speed limiter is switched off automatically
when the speed exceeds approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Not
until the speed drops below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) can the
starting-off aid be activated again.
The starting-off aid without gear selection lock is switched off automatically after 120 seconds and
can be switched on again immediately thereafter.
4
5
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension

and vehicles with steered leading axle
Activating the starting-off aid on 6x2
vehicles
Press upper section of starting-off aid
switch 1.
2 will flash in the multi-function display as long as the starting-off aid is active.
6 1 Starting-off aid switch

7
8
6x2 vehicles
2 Starting-off aid/trailing axle display
296
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating the starting-off aid for 6x2/4
vehicles
Press upper section of starting-off aid
switch 1.
3 will flash in the multi-function display as long as the starting-off aid is active.
Hendrickson leading axle
i
Raise leading axle before pulling away.
If reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is too low, run the
engine.
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2,
Press upper section of leading axle

switch 1.
The multi-function display shows raise
leading axle 2.
2
3
Raising leading axle
4
5
6
2 "Raise leading axle" indicator
7
6x2/4 vehicles
3 Starting-off aid/leading axle display
1 Leading axle switch
8
9
297
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 Lowering the leading axle
Trailing axle
Raise the trailing axle of an unladen or
only partially laden vehicle before starting.
2
3
If reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is too low, run the

engine.
Vehicles with rear-mounted loading crane:
5 1 Leading axle switch
Study the operating instructions issued

by the body manufacturer before raising the trailing axle.
Press upper section of leading axle

switch 1.
The indicator in the multi-function display will be cancelled.
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension

Raising the trailing axle
1 Trailing axle switch

High-volume transport vehicles:
The trailing axle cannot be raised.
Press upper section of trailing axle

switch 1.
The multi-function display shows raise
trailing axle/starting-off aid 2.
8
9
298
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicles with Nummek trailing axle
Raising Nummek trailing axle
Press upper section of Nummek trailing axle switch 1.

The multi-function display shows trailing axle/starting-off aid 2.
2
3
4
2 Trailing axle/starting-off aid display

To lower the trailing axle
1 Nummek trailing axle switch

switch 1.
The indicator in the multi-function display will be cancelled.
6
2 Trailing axle/starting-off aid display
Before loading or unloading the vehicle:

lower the trailing axle.
8
9
299
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 Lowering the Nummek trailing axle

2
3
4
5 1 Nummek trailing axle switch
6
7
Press the upper section of Nummek

trailing axle switch 1.
The trailing axle/starting-off aid indicator in the multi-function display will
be cancelled.
8
9
300
Telligent trailing axle

The Telligent trailing axle is a speed-dependent, hydraulically steered trailing axle.
It reduces the turning circle of the vehicle
and has a positive effect on tyre wear in
corners. When the road speed exceeds
30 mph (45 km/h) or when the trailing
axle is raised ( page 298), the electronics system locks the wheels in the straightahead position and disengage the trailing
axle steering function. When you lower the
trailing axle, the Telligent trailing axle will
begin steering the next time the front axle
is turned from the straight-ahead position.
Risk of accident
When you drive up to kerb stones or drive

through tight passages, there is a danger of
the tyres or obstacles on the edge of the
road becoming damaged. In this case, lock
the Telligent trailing axle steering function.
When you turn the steering lock to position

2, the j indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up. When the indicator
lamp goes out, the Telligent trailing axle
is ready for operation.
If the indicator lamp does not go out or
comes on when the vehicle is in motion
and the ZL system abbreviation is shown in
the multi-function display, have the trailing
axle checked.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that
you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For
work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
Locking the trailing axle steering

function
Releasing the trailing axle steering

function

steering lock switch 1.
The electronics system releases the

steering lock of the trailing axle. The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.
3
4
5
1 Trailing axle steering lock switch

steering lock switch 1.
The electronics system sets the wheels

in the straight-ahead position and locks
the steering function of the trailing axle. The indicator lamp in the switch
lights up.
7
8
9
301
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
1
2
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
The vehicle is equipped with the following

exterior mirror types:

brake applied
electrical, heated exterior mirror on

driver's and co-driver's side
Select the exterior mirror by pressing

button 1 or 2.
3 manual, heated wide-view mirror on co-
Adjust the exterior mirror in the required direction by pressing button 3.
driver's side
4 manual down-view mirror on co-driver's side
5 The switch unit for adjusting the exterior
mirrors and for the heating function is located in the driver's door.
6
1 To select the left-hand exterior mirror
2 To select the right-hand exterior mirror
3 To adjust the mirrors
7
8
9
302
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Mirror heating
Switching on mirror heating
With the mirror heating function you can

keep the exterior mirrors free of mist and
ice in damp and cold weather conditions.
The switch and indicator lamp are located
in the switch unit of the driver's door.
Press button 2.
Indicator lamp 1 lights up.
Switching off mirror heating
Press button 2.
The 1 indicator lamp shows that the mirror heating is active.
Indicator lamp 1 goes out.
4
5
6
1 Mirror heating indicator lamp

2 To switch mirror heating on/off
i
The down-view mirror is not heated.
8
9
303
Controls in detail
Good visibility
1
2
Windscreen wipers
Further information about the use of windscreen wipers can be found in the "Getting
started" section ( page 61).
3 Intermittent wipe
The intermittent wipe action can be adjusted infinitely from 2 20 seconds.
Setting the wipe action interval
Turn rotary switch to position 5 and

wait for 1st wiping action.
If the rotary switch is left in the

position for more than 20 seconds, the
electronics system will set the interval
time to two seconds.
Turn rotary switch to position .

Wait period required for interval.
Turn rotary switch to position 5
once again.
The electronics system stores the time
between switching on and off as a new
wipe interval.
5
6
7
8
9
304
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Construction-site vehicles
Windscreen cleaning platform

Vehicles with plastic bumper: The steps
and the platform for cleaning the windscreen are in the bumper.
Risk of accident
Construction-site vehicles have folding

steps to increase the ground clearance.
Fold the step down to clean the windscreen.
Dirty or loose steps do not provide a secure

foothold. You could slip and fall. Keep the
steps clean. Secure folding steps before
use.
4
5
Construction-site vehicles (example)
1 Pin
2 Step
7
8
9
305
Controls in detail
Good visibility
1 Folding the step down

2
3
Remove safety clip and withdraw

pin 1.
Fold step 2 down.
Insert the pin and secure.
4
5
6
7
8
9
306
Folding the step up
If you drive the vehicle with the step

down, the step could become damaged. Always fold the step up before
starting the vehicle.
Remove safety clip and withdraw

pin 1.
Fold step 2 up.
Insert the pin and secure.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
307
Controls in detail
Climate control
1
2
3
4
5
Function
The vehicle can be equipped with the following air-conditioning systems:
Demister vents
Swivelling side vents
Side vent airflow thumbwheel
Heating, heater air conditioning
309
Air conditioning and auxiliary

heating switch unit
Automatic air conditioning
315
323
Air-conditioning control panel
Auxiliary heating
327
Swivelling centre vents
Centre vent airflow thumbwheel
Footwell vents
6
7
8
9
308
Page
The systems were designed as combined

fresh and recirculating air systems. A particulate filter or reusable construction-site
filter is fitted to clean the fresh air, depending on the equipment level.
Heating/heater air conditioning

The heating and heater air conditioning are
operational when the engine is running.
When the engine is warm, the air temperature can be regulated infinitely.
i
On vehicles with heater air conditioning, there is an air conditioning system
integrated in the heating with manual
regulation.
!
Switch on the air conditioning at least
once a month for about ten minutes to
avoid corrosive damage to the refrigerant compressor.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Control panel for heating/heater-air
conditioning
Airflow
Air conditioning
Switching on the air conditioning system

affects the airflow as follows
Air distribution, air recirculation
Temperature
Air-recirculation mode indicator

lamp
Switches the air conditioning on/

off
Switches the auxiliary heating

on/off
Auxiliary heating quick-start

menu
the air temperature is reduced

the air is dehumidified
2
3
the air is additionally filtered
6
7
8
9
309
Controls in detail
Climate control
To switch off
Warmer
Turn the rotary switch 2 to the right.
Press air conditioning switch 1 p

to switch the air conditioning system
off.

out.
Regulating temperature
Colder
Turn the rotary switch 2 to the left.
Colder air will flow out of the heater
vents.
4
To switch on
If necessary, press the upper section of

the air conditioning switch 1 p.
5 Press air conditioning switch 1 p

6
Warmer air will flow out of the heater

vents.

on.

up.

up.
7
To regulate the temperature, turn the rotary switch 2 to the relevant position.
8
9
310
Controls in detail
Climate control
If the cab is too hot before commencing a
journey:
Open the side window.

Press air conditioning switch 5 p
on.
up.
Once the hot air has been expelled from

the cab:
Close the side window.
Press rotary switch for air distribution
2 to switch on the air-recirculation
mode.
Turn rotary switch for airflow 1

to P.
Once the air in the cab has been cooled

sufficiently:
Turn rotary switch for air distribution

2 to .

2 to switch off the air-recirculation
mode.
Turn rotary switch for temperature 3

fully to the left.
Turn rotary switch for airflow 1 to

position 1 or 2.
Set the temperature using rotary
switch 3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
311
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Regulating airflow
2
To regulate the airflow, turn rotary

switch 1 to the relevant position.
Higher
When the rotary switch for airflow is at

position 0, a small amount of air will
still flow out of the vents when the vehicle is in motion.
To temporarily prevent outside air from

entering the cab, activate the air-recirculation mode ( page 313).
Lower
The flow of air from the heater vents

will increase.

The flow of air from the heater vents
will decrease.
4
5
6
7
8
9
312
Controls in detail
Climate control
Regulating air distribution
Rotary switch 1, may be used to adjust
the air distribution to different areas of the
cab as required.
The following settings are available:

P
Air to front and side windows
Air to centre vents
Air to full cab interior
Air to footwell vents
i
Two additional stages between the
switch settings allow individual fine adjustment of air distribution.
Air-recirculation mode
If unpleasant odours are encountered or a

high level of contaminated air, e.g. in traffic or in a tunnel, switch on the air-recirculation mode. In air-recirculation mode, the
system will recirculate the air in the cab
only.
Risk of accident
At ambient temperatures below 5 C, only

switch the air-recirculation mode on briefly.
Condensation could build up on the windows and impair your vision. You would be
putting yourself and other road users at risk.
Do not start the vehicle if the windows are
icy or misted over.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
313
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 To switch on
To switch off
Press rotary switch 1.
The indicator lamp for air-recirculation
mode in the control panel 2 will go
out.
2
3
Demisting
Risk of accident
5 Press rotary switch 1.

6
The indicator lamp for air-recirculation

mode in the control panel 2 lights up.
Icy windows impair your vision. You could be

icy or misted over.
3 Thumbwheel
4 Side vents
If the windows are icy or misted over:
Open side vents fully using the thumbwheel 3.
Direct swivelling side vents 4 onto the
side windows.
7
8
9
314
Controls in detail
Climate control
Turn rotary switches 1, 2 and 3 in
the control panel to position P.
A large quantity of fully heated air will
flow onto the windscreen and the side
windows.
In addition on vehicles with heating-heater
air conditioning:
Press upper section of air conditioning
switch 5 p.
up.
Maintain the setting until the windscreen
and the side windows are clear.
Automatic air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning is ready for operation when the engine is running. It regulates the airflow and air distribution and
maintains the set temperature automatically.
The system heats or cools the air depending on the temperature setting and the ambient temperature.
On vehicles with auxiliary heating, automatic air conditioning switches the auxiliary heating on when the engine is cold.
2
3
4
5
6
i
The air conditioning system dehumidifies the air. Misted over windows will
be cleared more quickly.
7
8
9
315
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 If there are high levels of air contamina-
Automatic air-conditioning control

panel
Airflow in automatic mode
Air distribution in automatic

mode
Airflow
Air distribution, air recirculation
Temperature
Switches off the air conditioning
Charges the auxiliary air conditioning
Switches the auxiliary heating

on/off
Switches the refrigerator on/off
tion, e.g. in traffic congestion or in tunnels,

automatic air conditioning switches to airrecirculation mode.
The automatic air conditioning system can

be supplemented by an auxiliary air conditioning system ( page 323).
Warning and indicator lamps
7
8
9
316
Air conditioning off
Auxiliary air conditioning charging
Controls in detail
Climate control
Automatic mode
Manual mode
Turn rotary switch for airflow 3 to position U 1.
In manual mode, all of the automatic air

conditioning functions can be regulated
manually. The air conditioning system is
activated automatically when a lower temperature is selected.

4 to position U 2.
Set desired temperature using rotary
switch 5.
i
Automatic mode is activated as soon
as the rotary switch for air flow 3 or
air distribution 4 is at U.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a temperature between 20 23 C for optimum comfort.
If you leave the vehicle frequently on
hot days, set the temperature to approximately 25 C.
If you wish to operate the automatic air

conditioning in manual mode, the rotary
switch for airflow 3 and air distribution 4
should not be at the U position.
3
4
5
The automatic air conditioning activates

the auxiliary heating if
the coolant temperature is too low
one of the rotary switches for either airflow or air distribution is on U
6
7
8
9
317
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 the rotary switch for temperature is not

fully on cold
2
3
4
5
in order to heat up the cab.
i
Manual mode is best:
on warm days to quickly set the cab
temperature before commencing
your journey
when windows are icy or misted
over to quickly clear your vision
AC OFF switch
To switch air conditioning off
If use of the air conditioning system is not

desired or not necessary, you can switch it
off completely.
Environmental note
Switching the air conditioning off will not

just save you fuel, it is also environmentally
friendly.
Press upper section of AC OFF switch

1.
The right-hand indicator lamp 2 lights
up in the switch.
To switch air conditioning on
Set AC OFF switch 1 to centre position.
The indicator lamps 2 in the AC OFF

switch go out.
318
Controls in detail
Climate control
Regulating the temperature
Warmer
Colder
To regulate the temperature in automatic

and manual mode, turn the rotary switch
for temperature 5 to the relevant position.

to the right.

to the left.
The automatic air conditioning regulates the temperature to the prescribed

level.
The automatic air conditioning regulates the temperature to the prescribed

level.
i
If necessary, the automatic air conditioning system will also activate the
auxiliary heating so that the set temperature can be achieved.
If the cab is too hot before commencing a

journey:
Open the side window,
2
3
4
Turn the rotary switch for airflow 3 to

level 4,

4 to ,

fully to the left.
7
8
9
319
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Once the hot air has been expelled from

the cab:
2
3
4
5
6
7
Close the side window.

Press the rotary switch for air distribution 4 to activate air-recirculation
mode.
Once the air in the cab has been cooled
sufficiently:
Press the rotary switch for air distribution 4 to deactivate air-recirculation
mode.
Turn rotary switch for airflow 3 to
U 1.
4 to U 2.
Set desired temperature using rotary
switch 5.
8
9
320
Airflow
i
The airflow is regulated automatically
in automatic mode.
To regulate the airflow in manual mode,
turn rotary switch 3 to the relevant position.
Higher
The flow of air from the vents will increase.
Lower
The flow of air from the vents will decrease.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air distribution
The following settings are available:
Air to front and side windows
Air distribution is regulated automatically in automatic mode.
Air to windscreen and side windows and to centre vents
Air to centre vents
Air to full cab interior
Air to footwell vents
Automatic mode
i
Additional stages between the switch
settings allow individual fine adjustment of air distribution.
Rotary switch 1 may be used to adjust
the air distribution in manual mode to different areas of the cab according to requirements.
Risk of accident
At ambient temperatures below 5 C, only

switch the air-recirculation mode on briefly.
Condensation could build up on the windows and impair your vision. You would be
icy or misted over.
2
3
4
5
In air-recirculation mode, the system will

recirculate the air in the cab only.
Automatic air conditioning features a manual and an automatic air-recirculation
mode.
6
7
8
9
321
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 The automatic mode is always active and

2
detects carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide concentrations in the outside air. When
contaminated air is detected, automatic air
conditioning will activate the air-recirculation mode.
3 You can also select air-recirculation mode

at any time manually.
To select air-recirculation mode

1.
The 2 indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode lights up in the control panel.
To deactivate air-recirculation mode
1.
The 2 indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode goes out.
If the windows are icy or misted over:
Demisting
6
Risk of accident
Icy windows impair your vision. You could be

icy or misted over.
8
9
322
1 Thumbwheel
2 Side vents
Open side vents fully using the thumbwheel 1.
Direct swivelling side vents 2 onto the
side windows.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Turn the rotary switch for airflow 3 to
level 4.
4 to P.
fully to the right.
A large quantity of fully heated air will
flow onto the windscreen and the side
windows.
Maintain the setting until the windscreen
and the side windows are clear.
Auxiliary air conditioning

Vehicles with automatic air conditioning:
Auxiliary air conditioning can be used to
cool the cab interior prior to a journey or it
can maintain a comfortable temperature in
the cab interior during short or long
breaks. In addition, auxiliary air conditioning dehumidifies the flow of air in the cab.
When the refrigerant accumulator is full,
the maximum operating time is approximately eight hours.
2
3
4
5
i
Auxiliary air conditioning is ready for
operation when the refrigerant accumulator is charged.
6
7
8
9
323
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 DaimlerChrysler recommends that the re2
frigerant accumulator should be kept

charged during hot weather or for journeys
in subtropical and tropical climates.
Charging the refrigerant accumulator
3 Approximately four hours is necessary to

fully charge the refrigerant accumulator.
i
The refrigerant accumulator can only
be charged when the engine is running.
To prevent freezing of the refrigerant
accumulator, the electronics system
switches the auxiliary air conditioning
off when the engine is started.
4
With the engine running:
Press switch 1 u.
The left-hand indicator lamp 2 in the

switch lights up.
6
7
8
9
324
Controls in detail
Climate control
Auxiliary air conditioning switch
The control panel for the auxiliary air conditioning system is in the head area of the
lower berth. The rotary switch has
4 positions.
Auxiliary air conditioning off
Night use, cooling duration

approximately eight hours
Day use, cooling duration

approximately three hours
If the curtains are closed, heat will not

be able to penetrate into the cab and
the auxiliary air conditioning will be
more effective.
To cool cab before starting a

journey
Rotary switch
AUS
If the berth is being used, efficiency can

be improved more by pulling the curtains closed in front of the berth.
3
4
To switch off auxiliary air conditioning

To switch on auxiliary air conditioning
Turn rotary switch to relevant position.
The u indicator lamp for the auxiliary air conditioning in the instrument
panel lights up. The auxiliary air conditioning blower blows refrigerated air
out of the openings in the cab rear.
Turn rotary switch to position OFF.

The u indicator lamp for the auxiliary air conditioning in the instrument
panel goes out.
5
6
7
8
9
325
Controls in detail
Climate control
Construction-site filter
Fresh air filter
For construction-site vehicles, a construction-site filter is available. Information is

available from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Particulate filter
2 The vehicle heating is equipped with a par3
ticulate filter. It filters particles out of the

outside air, such as
fine dust
4 pollen and
spores,
5 before it enters the interior.

6
7
The filter element should be replaced annually at a specialist workshop or a

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools for the work required.
8
9
326
1 Particulate filter for vehicle heating behind maintenance flap
The filter is designed to filter out large particles found typically on a construction
site. The filter can be reused. When the filter becomes soiled, it can be cleaned at a
specialist workshop or Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Auxiliary air conditioning particulate
filter
Auxiliary heating
The auxiliary air conditioning has its own

air intake. The particulate filter in the air intake filters out particles in the air, such as
dust
pollen and
spores
The filter element should be replaced annually at a specialist workshop or a
Operation of the auxiliary heating creates

hot and poisonous gases. There is a risk of
fire and poisoning.
Do not operate the auxiliary heating
at filling stations
in enclosed spaces, such as garages.
Vehicles for the transport of hazardous
The auxiliary heating is designed as either

a hot air heater or warm water heater. The
hot air heater heats the air flowing into the
cab exclusively. The warm water heater
heats the coolant which also preheats the
engine.
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning
and auxiliary heating:
Automatic air conditioning activates the
auxiliary heating even when the vehicle is
in motion if the coolant temperature is insufficient to heat the cab.
1
2
3
4
5
6
You can heat up the cab

before commencing the journey
when the vehicle is in motion

when the engine is switched off
with the auxiliary heating.
327
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 The auxiliary heating has the following
To switch on continuous heating
modes of operation:
Page
2
3
Continuous heating
328
Timed heating
332
Preselected heating
334
4
5
6

brake applied
Press upper section of auxiliary heating

switch 1 .
Turn key in ignition lock to position 1

or
7
8
Continuous heating, hot air heater
1 Auxiliary heating
2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp
1 Auxiliary heating
3 Auxiliary heating shortcut menu
328
Indicator lamp 2 lights up in the

switch. The multi-function display
shows the operating data. The auxiliary
heating is switched on.
Controls in detail
Climate control
To set run-on time
Continuous heating operation is possible at any time when the vehicle is in

motion.
The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heating.

multi-function display shows Set runon time.
The auxiliary heating switches to runon mode when, during continuous operation, you
turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 0
remove the key from the ignition
lock
without switching the auxiliary heating
off.
If you turn the steering lock to position
1 or 2 while the heater is in run-on
mode, the auxiliary heating switches to
continuous heating.

heating switch 1 .

1 Auxiliary heating switch
Run-on time increases in increments of

five minutes.
Run-on time decreases in steps of
five minutes.
Run-on mode is adjustable.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
329
Controls in detail
Climate control
heating switch 1 .

The multi-function display shows Auxi-

onto the next menu.
liary heat.

multi-function display shows Set temperature.

4
5
To set the temperature

Setting range:
from +10 C to +45 C

or
from +50 F to +110 F

Changing temperature units ( page 205).
8
9
330

The temperature increases in 1 increments.
The temperature decreases in 1
steps.
Controls in detail
Climate control
multi-function display shows Set heating time.
i
To accelerate the setting procedure,
press and hold down the button on the
Vehicles with warm water heater/
automatic air conditioning:
You can only set the heating temperature using the rotary switch for temperature in the heater control panel
( page 316).
To set the heating time
1
2
3
The heating time increases in increments of five minutes.

Setting range: 0:05 h to 2:00 hrs
heating switch 1 .
The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heat.
The heating decreases in steps of

five minutes.

press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
7
8
9
331
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Timed heating
2
To switch on heating timer
The heating timer allows operation of the

auxiliary heating when the key is not in the
steering lock. The auxiliary heating will operate for the period specifies.
The procedure for setting the temperature and the heating duration is the
same as for continuous heating. Setting temperature ( page 330).
1 Auxiliary heating

brake applied
Press upper section of auxiliary heating

switch 1 .
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch will
light up. The multi-function display
shows the operating data. The auxiliary
heating is switched on.
8
9
332
15 minutes operating time remaining

(example)
i
In timer mode, the heating time previously set determines the time the auxiliary heating switches on.
The remaining period of operation is
the same as the auxiliary heating's remaining operating time. It can be
changed during operation.
Controls in detail
Climate control
To change remaining time
Setting range: 0:05 h to 2:00 h
The auxiliary heating is in timer or preselect heating mode:

heating switch 1 .

multi-function display shows Set remaining time.


onto the next menu.


The remaining time increases in increments of five minutes.
The remaining time decreases in steps

of five minutes.
8
9
333
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Preselected heating
2
3
Operation of the auxiliary heating creates

hot and poisonous gases. There is a risk of
fire and poisoning.
Do not operate the auxiliary heating
at filling stations
in enclosed spaces, such as garages.
Vehicles for the transport of hazardous

6
7
With the preselected heating mode, the

auxiliary heating can be switched on in the
absence of the driver:
at the programmed time
8 for the set period of heating operation

9
334
This allows the cab to be warmed up before the journey starts. Two memory slots
are available for preselected heating operation ( page 335).
i
Vehicles transporting hazardous
goods:
Preselected heating operation is not
possible.
i
In preselect mode, the heating time
previously set determines the switchon time of the auxiliary heating.
The remaining period of operation is
the same as the auxiliary heating's
remaining heating time. It can be
changed during operation.
The procedure for setting the temperature and the heating time is the same
as for continuous heating.
Setting heating time ( page 331).
Setting temperature ( page 330).
The procedure for setting the remaining time is the same as for timed heating. Changing remaining time
( page 333).
Controls in detail
Climate control
Activating/programming preselect
heating mode
Programming is not possible when the

auxiliary heating is in operation.
Programming is still possible when the

key has been removed from the steering lock.
A programmed pre-setting will activate
the auxiliary heating only once. For repeated activation, the preselection
should be reprogrammed or reactivated.
4
heating switch 1 .

multi-function display shows Set memory.

multi-function display shows Timer: 1
or Timer: 2.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to accept the
setting and to progress to setting the
day.
5
6
7
8
9
335
Controls in detail
Climate control

2
3
4
5

multi-function display shows the day
required.

hour.

multi-function display shows the desired minutes.
i
The Timer: --, switches the auxiliary
heating on at the preset time regardless of the day of the week.


press and hold down the button.

onto the next menu.
To set the hours

multi-function display shows the desired hour.
8
9
336

minutes.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating preselect function
Switching off auxiliary heating
Call up the auxiliary heating menu

( page 335).

out. The multi-function display shows

multi-function display shows Set memory.
multi-function display shows
Timer: off.
onto the next menu.
Press the upper section of auxiliary

heating switch 1.
Auxiliary heating has been switched

off.
1
2
3
4
All modes of operation
1 Auxiliary heating
3 Auxiliary heating menu shortcut
6
7


337
Controls in detail
Open-air
Open-air

windows
Risk of injury
The side windows open and close electri-
Always keep an eye on the closing operation

of the side windows to see that no-one becomes caught. Release the switch if danger
threatens.
2 cally. Switches for the driver's and co-driv3
er's door are located in the driver's doors.

A switch for the co-driver's door is located
in the co-driver's door.

lock when leaving the vehicle, even for just
a short period.

vehicle. They could injure themselves.
1 To close left-hand side window

2 To open left-hand side window
3 To close right-hand side window
4 To open right-hand side window
7
8
9
338
Controls in detail
Open-air
Opening left-hand/right-hand side window
Press switch 2 or 4 for approximately one second.
The left or right-hand side window will
open fully.
i
Pressing the switch briefly will interrupt
the motion of the window.
Opening left-hand/right-hand window
partially
Press switch 2 or 4 briefly.
Closing left-hand/right-hand window
Vehicles with central locking:

the motion of the window.
Press and hold switch 1 or 3 until

the window is at the required height.
Closing left-hand/right-hand window

fully
Protection against entrapment stops

the closing procedure of the window
concerned if an obstacle prevents complete closure.

system:
A locking procedure closes any opened

windows.
Press switch 1 or 3 for approximately one second.
2
3
4
5
The left or right-hand window will close

fully.
The left or right-hand window will open

while the switch is being pressed.
7
8
9
339
Controls in detail
Open-air
Opening and closing the sliding/

tilting sunroof
The sliding/tilting sunroof opens and clos-
2 es electrically. The switches are located in

3
4
the switch unit above the windscreen and

in the switch unit of the lower berth.
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be darkened for breaks. A screen prevents insects
from entering the cab if required.
Risk of injury
When closing the sliding/tilting sunroof, ensure that nobody becomes trapped in it. Release the switch if danger threatens.
lock when leaving the vehicle, even for just
a short period.
vehicle. They could injure themselves.
5
To raise
Press switch 1 briefly.
The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into

the raised position.
To open
8 1 To open
2 To close
Press switch 1 and then release.

The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into
the raised position.
Press and hold switch 1 until the roof
is opened to the required position.
340
To close
Press and hold switch 2 until the roof
is closed to the required position.
To close sliding/tilting sunroof fully
Press switch 2 briefly.
The sliding/tilting sunroof will close
fully.
Controls in detail
Open-air
Disabling the sliding/tilting sunroof
closure lock
i
the motion of the sunroof.
Press switch 1.
out. The lock is deactivated.
Protection against entrapment stops

the closing procedure of the sunroof if
an obstacle prevents complete closure.
To switch on sliding/tilting sunroof

closure lock
system:
The lock switch prevents automatic closing of the sliding/tilting sunroof by the enhanced central locking system. This is wise
e.g. to maintain air circulation in the cab
when it is locked up.
2
3

system:
A locking procedure will close the
sliding/tilting sunroof if it is open.
4
1 Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock
Press switch 1.

up. The next time the vehicle is locked,
the sliding/tilting sunroof will remain
open.
Once enabled, the closure lock is active

for just one locking procedure with the
key removed from the ignition lock.
8
9
341
Controls in detail
Open-air
1 Insect screen and tinting

2
The insect screen is located in the front of

the sliding/tilting sunroof in the opening.
The tinting screen is located in the rear of
the sliding/tilting sunroof in the opening.
Pull the tinting or insect screen to the

other side of the opening and hook in
place.
Opening and closing the tilting roof

The tilting roof opens and closes electrically. The switches are located in the switch
unit above the windscreen and in the
switch unit of the lower berth.
To close
Unhook tinting or insect screen.

A retractor will draw the tinting or insect screen back.
4
5
To open
1 Insect screen
2 Tinting screen
6
1 To open
2 To close
7
8
9
342
Controls in detail
Open-air
To open
Opening and closing the roof hatch
To open
Press and hold switch 1 until the tilting roof is opened to the required
height.
The roof hatch can be opened to three different positions:

Tilted at the front
Apply pressure to the roof hatch and

push it to the desired position.
To close
Completely raised
To close
Press and hold switch 2 until the tilting roof is closed.
Tilted at the rear
Grab hold of both handles 1.
The 3 positions allow different levels of

ventilation.
Pull roof hatch downwards until the

locking mechanism audibly engages.
Grab hold of both handles 1.
4
5
6
7
8
1 Handles
343
Controls in detail
Features
Features
Ashtray
To remove insert
Cigarette lighter
Lift up insert on one side and remove

from retainer.
To fit insert
Place insert in retainer.
To close the ashtray
Hold cover plate by grip and close.
5 1 Cover plate
2 Insert
6 To open ashtray
Hold cover plate at grip and open.
7
8
9
344
1 Cigarette lighter
i
The socket for the cigarette lighter can
also be used as a power source for
electrical equipment up to a maximum
of 240 W. Other sockets ( page 356).
Controls in detail
Features
Risk of injury, fire and accident G

You could burn yourself on a hot cigarette lighter. Only hold the cigarette
lighter by its handle.
If children are travelling with you, remove the cigarette lighter from its socket. They could injure themselves on the
hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire.
The priority is to focus your attention on
the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter if the traffic situation permits.

Push cigarette lighter button until it engages.
When the spiral is glowing, the button
will spring out automatically.

(interior)
Risk of injury
Do not carry heavy objects, e.g. bottles, in

the stowage compartments.
To ensure that occupants are not injured by

falling objects in the cab as a result of sudden deceleration:
all stowage compartments must be

closed and locked when the vehicle is in
motion,
the load in each stowage compartment

should not exceed
8 kg above the windscreen with cover

4 kg above the windscreen without
cover
2 kg above the doors
7
8
9
345
Controls in detail
Features
interior are located:
Stowage compartment above windscreen
above the windscreen
L cab/MEGASPACE cab:
1 Cab stowage compartments in the vehicle

2
above the driver's and co-driver's

doors
Spring pressure will hold the cover in

the open position.
behind the driver's and co-driver's

seats beneath the berths ( page 348)
To close stowage compartment
in the side trim behind the driver's and

co-driver's seats
Swing the cover down until it audibly

engages.
in the instrument panel
Drinks holders for the driver and codriver are located in the instrument
panel.
8
9
346
Press together both release buttons on

the catch in the direction of the arrows.
Lift stowage compartment cover upwards.
3 in the driver's and co-driver's doors

4
To open stowage compartment
Stowage compartment above windscreen

(example)
1 Catch
Controls in detail
Features
Engine tunnel compartment
To fold out table
Cool box for mounting on engine tunnel
Pull table 1 upwards and fold out.

To fold table away
Fold up table 1 and push it in downwards.
To open drawer
Pull handle 2 or 3 upwards and pull

out drawer.
1 Table
2 Upper drawer handle
3 Lower drawer handle
!
Do not place more than
12 kg on the table
To close drawer
Pull handle 2 or 3 upwards and push
drawer in to the stop.
1 Cool box lid
To open cool box

Pull handle of sliding compartment upwards and pull out.
Fold out cool box lid.
30 kg in the drawers
Read also the manufacturer's operating instructions.
347
Controls in detail
Features
1 To close cool box

Fold away cool box lid.
2 Pull sliding compartment handle upwards and push in to the stop.
3
4
5
6
i
Please comply with the manufacturer's
operating, care and maintenance instructions for the cool box.
!
Switch the cool box off before tilting
the cab back and wait for ten minutes
after the cab has been tilted back before switching it on.
7
8
9
348

(exterior)
L cab
The stowage compartments are on the
sides of the cab, above the wheel arches.
Both stowage compartments can be accessed from the outside via the exterior
flap and from the inside via the stowage
compartment flaps beneath the berth.
The stowage compartment lighting will be
switched on whether the stowage compartments are opened from the outside or
from the inside.
1 Release lever in entrance

To open stowage compartment
Pull release lever 1 once and release.
The exterior flap will open until restrained by the retaining hook.
Controls in detail
Features
Pull release lever 1 once more and release.
The exterior flap is released.
Open exterior flap by swinging it towards the entrance until the flap engages on the limit stop.
To close stowage compartment
Close exterior flap until it audibly engages.
MEGASPACE cab
Upper stowage compartments
Lower exterior stowage compartments
The two stowage compartments are at the

sides of the cab, above the wheel arches.
The two lower stowage compartments can

be accessed only via the exterior flap.
When the stowage compartments are

opened, the stowage compartment lighting will be switched on.
4
MEGASPACE cab stowage compartment
1 Lower exterior stowage compartment

release lever
2 Lower exterior flap
5
6
The two upper stowage compartments are

opened and closed in the same way as the
those in the L cab ( page 348).
7
8
9
349
Controls in detail
Features
1 Opening exterior stowage compartment To close exterior stowage compartment

Open the driver's or co-driver's door.
2 Pull release lever 1 once and release.

3
4
The exterior flap will open until restrained by the retaining hook.
Pull release lever 1 once more and release.
The exterior flap is released.
Swing exterior flap 2 upwards.
5 Press the hinge joint up.

6
Swing the exterior flap down. The hinge

joint will engage.
Swing exterior flap 2 upwards.

The hinge joint will disengage.
Swing exterior flap 2 down until you
hear it engage in the lock.
Telephone
The telephone bracket for the hands-free
equipment is located above the windscreen on the right of the audio unit.
If you wish to use the hands-free device,
the bracket must be fitted with a phone
holder compatible with your mobile telephone. For further information contact a
A detailed description of how to assemble
the phone holder and the mobile telephone
is included with the phone holder.
!
Bank cards, credit cards or other cards
with magnetic strips should not be
brought in the vicinity of the telephone
bracket. The magnet installed in the
bracket could otherwise delete or alter
the information stored on the cards.
7
8
9
350
Controls in detail
Features
You can operate your telephone using the
and buttons on the multi-function steering wheel once it is fitted in the
phone holder.
Empty telephone bracket
When you remove the key from the

steering lock, the telephone will remain
on for approximately 60 minutes.
If you make or receive a call within this

time, the telephone switches off
60 minutes from the end of use.
The hands-free capability is not guaranteed, if you use a commercially available phone holder.
4
1 Connector
2 Telephone bracket
1 Telephone bracket
2 Connector
3 Microphone
If no phone holder is fitted:
Insert connector 1 in telephone

bracket 2.
7
8
9
351
Controls in detail
Features
1 Making/receiving calls with the hands-
When the telephone is switched off, the

multi-function display will show Telephone off.
free device
2
3
4
5
6
Risk of accident
When the telephone is switched on but

the PIN has not yet been entered, the
multi-function display will show Enter
telephone PIN.
Operating mobile telephones that have an

aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle's electronic systems.
As a result, the operating reliability and road
safety is at considerable risk.
conditions allow it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away too much.
Enter PIN using the mobile telephone

keypad and confirm.
1 Network operator logo
2 Network signal display
The telephone will search for a cellular

network.

brake applied
When the network logo 1 and network reception bar 2 are shown in the
multi-function display, the mobile telephone is ready for operation.

The multi-function display switches to

the telephone menu.
8
9
352
Controls in detail
Features
To dial a new number
Enter the telephone number on the
telephone keypad.
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel to dial the
number.
To receive a call
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel to take the call.
The multi-function display will show:
The number or call or
the entry from your personal telephone book
the call duration
If the phones rings, the multi-function display will show:
To finish a call
Press the button to finish the call.

The driver information system returns
to the basic menu screen for the telephone.
3
To reject a call
It is possible to reject a call.
Press the button to reject a call.
The driver information system returns
to the menu that was active before the
call was made, e.g. Monitoring info
menu.
Call
Telephone number of caller (as long as
this has not been suppressed)
4
5
6
7
Taken call
8
9
353
Controls in detail
Features
1 To select a number from the telephone

book
The mobile telephone must be ready for
2 operation.
3
i
New numbers should be entered using
the telephone keypad.
When the Please wait event message

goes out, the transfer of data is complete.
Press button j or k on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the required
entry.
The driver information system selects

the relevant number.
When a connection is made, the name and
number of the person you are calling is
shown in the display as well as the duration
of the call.
The driver information system changes

to the telephone menu.

7
8
The driver information system imports

the telephone book entries that are
stored on the SIM card or in the telephone. This can take up to 30 seconds.
Please wait.
354
Duration of call
Telephone book entry
If no connection is made, the driver information system stores the selected number
in the redial memory.
Controls in detail
Features
Telephone book quick find function
Last number redial
The driver information system stores the

most recently dialled numbers in the order
they were entered in the redial memory.
The driver information system changes

to the telephone menu.

multi-function display shows the entry
required.
Press and hold button j or k on

1
2
3

the relevant number.
The driver information system switches

from one initial letter to the next.
When the display shows the initial letter you are looking for, release the button.
The display will show the first entry beginning with the letter you have chosen.
multi-function display shows the entry
required.
Redial memory entry

the first entry in the redial memory.
8
9
355
Controls in detail
Features
1
2
Sockets
The vehicle can be equipped with up to
4 sockets.
Page
24 V/0 A socket in ashtray
356
24 V/10 A socket in
dashboard
356
24 V/10 A socket in battery

tray
358
12 V/15 A socket in
dashboard
357
Voltage transformer
3
4
12 V/8 A
358
12 V/15 A
358
8
9
356
24 V/10 A socket in ashtray
24 V/10 A socket in dashboard
The housing for the cigarette lighter in the

ashtray is also a socket. The socket is designed for equipment with a maximum
power draw of 240 W.
The socket is located in the stowage compartment above the ashtray. The socket is
designed for equipment with a maximum
power draw of 240 W.
1 24 V/10 A socket
2 24 V/10 A socket
Controls in detail
Features
12 V/15 A socket in dashboard
To switch on the 12 V socket
To switch off the 12 V socket
The socket is located in the dashboard on

the co-driver's side. It can be switched on
and off. Power is supplied through a 12 V/
15 A voltage transformer.
Press the upper section of the 12 V

switch.
Press the lower section of the 12 V

switch.

up.

out.
It is designed for the use of equipment with

a maximum power draw of 180 W.
2
3
4
5
6
7
3 12 V/15 A socket
8
9
357
Controls in detail
Features
1 24 V/10 A socket in battery tray

All vehicles except tractor units:
Voltage transformer
12 V/8 A voltage transformer
2 The socket is designed for the use of an in- The vehicle features a 12 V/8 A voltage
spection lamp. It is located on the righthand side in the battery tray.
3 It is designed for the use of equipment with

a maximum power draw of 240 W.
transformer as standard for the use of
CB radio equipment
The voltage transformer is intended to

supply power to the socket only. The
connection of further equipment to the
12 V source is not permitted. Further
information is available from any
12 V audio equipment
6
7
4 24 V/10 A socket (example)
8
9
358
The voltage transformer supplies the

12 V/15 A socket with power. It is
switched on or off with the 12 V switch
( page 22).
Radio equipment
Telephone/fax machine
12 V/15 A voltage transformer
The voltage transformer is intended for

the operation of this equipment only.
The connection of further equipment to
the 12 V source is not permitted. Further information is available from any
Controls in detail
Features
To switch the audio equipment on/off
Operating audio equipment
You can switch the audio equipment on or

off using switch 2 in the berth switch unit.
The buttons on the multi-function steering

wheel 1 and the audio equipment switch
in the berth switch unit 2 may be used to
operate the basic functions of the following audio equipment
Press and hold switch 2 y for approximately three seconds.
Truckline CC30
Truckline CC70
Truckline CD70
You must select the Audio menu to
choose a radio station ( page 361)
1 Multi-function steering wheel buttons

2 Audio equipment switches in the berth
switch unit
operate the CD player ( page 363)
operate the cassette player

( page 364)
Commercially available audio equipment cannot be operated using the buttons in the multi-function steering
wheel or the audio equipment switches
in the berth switch unit. For further information contact a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
using the buttons of the multi-function

steering wheel.
1
2
If the radio is switched off, it will be

switched on.
If the radio is switched on, it will be

switched off.
When you are seated in the driver's

seat, you can only switch the equipment on or off at the radio. Observe the
operating instructions issued by the
manufacturer.
6
7
8
9
359
Controls in detail
Features
1 To adjust the volume

2
You can adjust the volume of the audio

equipment with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel and the audio
equipment switch in the berth switch unit.
3 With multi-function steering wheel buttons
4 Press the button.

The volume will increase
5 Press button .
The volume will decrease.
i
You can still adjust the volume of the
audio equipment even if the audio
menu is not shown in the multi-function
display.
If the driver information system shows
the ? symbol in the multi-function
display, you can use the and
buttons on the multi-function
steering wheel to make a selection or
adjustment. The volume control then
no longer works.
With the audio equipment switch in

the berth switch unit
Press switch $ briefly.

The volume will increase
Press switch y briefly.

The volume will decrease.
7
8
9
360
Controls in detail
Features
To select a radio station

When you have selected the audio menu,
use the arrow buttons to
If the radio station search function is

active, the audio equipment will search
for the next or previous station in the
selected frequency band.
activate the station search function

change between stored radio stations
i
The arrow button function in radio
mode can be adjusted in the Configuration sub menu of the Settings menu
( page 362).
You can only store new radio stations
at the audio equipment.
The audio equipment can also be used
in the normal way.
If the store function is active, the audio

equipment will change to the next or
previous stored radio station.
1 Frequency and stored station number
2 Radio traffic information1
3 Frequency or station name1
1
2
3
4
5
Switch on the audio equipment. Observe the operating instructions issued


multi-function display shows Audio.
7
8
9
1. On RDS only
361
Controls in detail
Features
1 To set the function of the arrow buttons

highlight is on Configuration.

multi-function display shows Arrow
buttons in radio mode.
in radio mode
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. The highlight

is on Station search.
4
5
6

multi-function display shows Settings.
7
8
9
362

is on Memory.

menu.
Controls in detail
Features
To operate the CD player

Audio equipment: Truckline CD70
The CD player selects the next track.
Switch on the audio equipment and select the CD player. Observe the operating instructions issued by the
manufacturer.
Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The CD player selects the previous
track.

1
2
3
4
1 Current CD CD changer operation

3 Current track
5
6
7
8
9
1. On RDS only
363
Controls in detail
Features
2 Once you have selected the audio menu,
Switch on the audio equipment and select the cassette player. Observe the
operating instructions issued by the
manufacturer.
3 to fast forward or reverse the cassette

1 To operate the cassette player

Audio equipment: Truckline CC30 or CC70
you can operate the cassette player using
the arrow buttons
to the next or previous track in cassette search mode.

to fast forward or reverse the cassette
in wind/rewind mode
1 Cassette operation
3 Cassette side
6
7
8
9
1. On RDS only
364
Controls in detail
Features
If the rewind/wind function is active,
the cassette player will rewind 8 or
wind 9 the cassette.
If the track search function is active,
the cassette player will rewind 0 to
the start of the current track or fast forward to the beginning of the next
track .
To set the function of the arrow buttons

in cassette mode
Press button or on the

multi-function display shows Settings.
1
2

highlight is on Configuration.
multi-function display shows Arrow
buttons in cassette mode.
3
4
The audio equipment will stop the

winding function when
the end of the cassette, the start of

the current track or the next track is
detected
you press the arrow button again
8
9
365
Controls in detail
Features
1 Press the button on the multi-
function steering wheel. The highlight

is on Track search.
2 Press the button on the multi3
function steering wheel. The highlight

is on Fast forward and Rewind.
4
5
6
7
8
9
366

menu.
Operation
Driving tips
Refuelling
Trailer/semitrailer 1
Wind deflector
Tippers
Tyres and wheels
2
3
Winter operation
Care 4
Maintenance
5
6
7
8
9
367
Operation
Driving tips
Driving tips
1 The "Operation" section contains detailed

information about operating, maintaining
and caring for your vehicle.
Risk of accident
Distribute the load on the vehicle uniformly.

Avoid excessive loads on one side. The vehicle's driving, braking and steering characteristics vary with the type of load, the
weight and the centre of gravity of the load.
Secure loads if necessary.
2
3
4
Excessive loading at the rear will have a particularly adverse effect on the vehicle's handling characteristics. For this reason,
greater care and attention are called for
when driving with a load at the rear.
5
6
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads,

the wheel loads ( axle load) or the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight.
There is otherwise the risk of damage to
tyres, the chassis frame and axles.
7
8
9
368
Vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift: The Telligent automatic gearshift

switches off automatically at idling speed
(approximately 550 rpm). On uphill or downhill slopes, do not allow the engine speed to
drop to idling speed (approximately
550 rpm).
!
When driving the vehicle on rough terrain, ensure that the drive wheels always have sufficient grip.
Vehicles without ASR: Do not allow the
drive wheels to spin. There is otherwise
a risk of damage to the differential.
Switch on the differential locks.
During the journey, check the instrument readings periodically.
Operation
Driving tips
Environmental note
Regular vehicle maintenance is one of the

preconditions for moderate fuel consumption.
Fuel consumption
Fuel consumption depends on
the vehicle design
the driving style
the operating conditions
the type of fuel used (diesel fuel, FAME
fuel)
i
Fuel consumption values can be called
up in the Trip computer menu in the
driver's information system
( page 166).
Vehicle design
Operating conditions
Tyre size, tyre tread, tyre pressures,

tyre condition
trailer towing and tipper operation
Body, wind deflector
dense urban traffic and frequent short

journeys
Gear ratios in the drive train

Additional equipment (air conditioning,
auxiliary heating, PTO, viscous fan
clutch)
mountainous terrain
vehicle load
operation when stationary
frequent cold starts
Driving style
To keep fuel consumption low,
As a result of the numerous superstructure variants, it is impossible to provide

a precise fuel consumption value in
these Operating Instructions.
avoid frequent acceleration and braking

anticipate road and traffic conditions
maintain an economical engine speed

range
5
6
7
8
9
369
Operation
Driving tips
1
2
3
Engine oil consumption

When the engine is run in, oil consumption
may reach 0.5% of the fuel consumption
recorded in actual operating circumstances. A longer distance covered and more arduous operating conditions could lead to
certain vehicles exceeding this value.
The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km)

Running the vehicle in
It is of decisive importance for the engine
not to be subjected to its full rated load
during the running-in period.
Run the vehicle in gently. Drive at varying road and engine speeds.
Avoid high engine speeds. Do not drive
any more than of the maximum road
speed for each gear.
Change gear in good time. Do not shift

down to brake the vehicle.
6
7
8
9
370
After a distance of 1,250 miles (2,000 km),

you can gradually bring the vehicle up to
full road and engine speed.
Wheel nuts
Risk of accident
On new vehicles there is the risk that the

wheel nuts could work loose if they are not
tightened. The wheel nuts must be tightened
after driving 30 miles (50 km). Observe the
notes on page 392 and torques on
page 577.
Operation
Driving tips
After dark, the vehicle must have its parking lamps on if it is standing on the public
After driving on a wet surface, particuhighway. In urban areas, it is also possible
larly if road salt has been spread, apply
to attach reflective overnight parking
the brakes firmly before parking the veboards. Observe the legal requirements.
hicle. The heat generated will help to dry
the brake discs. The prevents corrosion Vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift: If in an emergency it is necessary to
of the brake discs.
park the vehicle without the parking brake
applied, engage a gear. Chock the vehiParking
cle's wheels additionally to prevent it from
Always stop the engine with the parking
rolling away.
brakes applied. For notes on applying the
parking brake ( page 130).
!
When parking the vehicle, do not allow
When the vehicle is parked, it must be prethe wheels to mount the kerb. This
vented from rolling away by chocking at
could damage the tyres or steering
least one wheel. Carrying a wheel chock in
components.
an easily accessible position on the vehicle
is a legal requirement.
Brakes
The vehicle is equipped with a Telligent

brake system. For notes on braking with
anti-lock protection ( page 84).
Activate the continuous brake to make full

use of the engine braking effect on long
downhill sections ( page 261).
Vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift: If the continuous brake is selected,
the transmission will automatically shift
down to the next appropriate gear, depending on the road and engine speed.
!
Do not park the vehicle immediately after the brakes have been subjected to
severe loads, such as driving through
valleys. Drive on a short distance to allow the airflow to cool the brakes
down.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
371
Operation
Refuelling
Refuelling
1
2
3
4
Risk of injury/explosion
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames

and smoking are therefore prohibited when
fuel is being handled.
Switch off the auxiliary heating when refuelling to prevent fuel vapours from igniting in
the auxiliary heating exhaust system.
Do not allow fuel to come into contact with
skin, eyes or clothing.
5
6
Your health is at risk:

if your skin or eyes come into direct contact with fuel
if you inhale fuel vapours
Clean affected areas of skin with soap

and water.
If fuel comes into contact with the eyes,
wash them thoroughly with clean water
and consult a doctor.
Change out of soiled clothing without
delay.
If fuel is swallowed, a doctor should be
consulted immediately.
Keep fuel away from children.
Refuelling the vehicle from drums or canisters could introduce impurities into the
fuel system. This can lead to fuel system
malfunctions.
Filter the fuel before filling the tank.
!
Do not add bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel),
petrol or fuel additives to diesel fuel.
8
9
372
You will find information about fuel in the

"Technical data" section ( page 562).
i
Check the fuel prefilter with heated water separator regularly for condensation.
Environmental note
Unless they are handled properly, fuels constitute a risk both for people and for the environment. Fuels must not be allowed to get
into the sewage system, surface waters, the
ground water or the ground itself.
Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
Trailer/semitrailer
Trailer/semitrailer coupling
Coupling up
The trailer tow hitch or semitrailer coupling

is one of the vehicle components with particular importance for road safety. Please
comply precisely with the manufacturer's
operating, care and maintenance instructions. For further information, also see
page 416.
Risk of trailer breaking away.

Check longitudinal play in the trailer tow
hitch every day. To do this, move the towbar
body of the hitch firmly forwards and back.
Do not hold the coupling jaws. No longitudinal play is permitted. If any longitudinal play
is detected, have it eliminated at once.
Towing semitrailers
Before coupling (if "one-man operation" is
possible) make sure that the semitrailer
plate is at least 50 mm lower than the upper edge of the coupling plate.
Reverse and couple up the semitrailer.
After coupling up a semitrailer, lock the
levers to prevent unauthorised operation which could lead to the coupling
becoming detached.
Connect cables and compressed-air
lines ( page 375).
Driving could cause the centre of the

mudguard to come into contact with
the tyres. In order to prevent damage
during operation with a semitrailer,
DaimlerChrysler recommends that the
middle mudguard is removed, provided
this is legally permitted.
2
3
4
Objects thrown up by the road surface could

injure or endanger other road users. For this
reason, make sure that the rear wheels are
protected by mudguards when the semitrailer tractor vehicle is driven without a trailer.
If various semitrailers are towed, too much
play could be present between the kingpin
and the coupling plate. This is not permissible. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
5
6
7
8
9
373
Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
1 Truck/trailer combination
2
Before coupling to a trailer, apply the

parking brake and release the service
brake.
Chock the trailer's rear wheels to prevent it from rolling away.
Check that the coupling tracer of the

trailer coupling is secured correctly in
the appropriate locating pin or safety
knob.
Caution should be taken when guiding the

rail since there is a risk drawbar impact as a
result of an uncontrolled movement.
Reverse and couple up the trailer.
Nobody should be present between the vehicle and the trailer as the vehicle is reversed towards the trailer.
Do not uncouple trailers with overrun brakes

when the brakes have been applied by the
overrun mechanism.
Position the towbar at the height of the

trailer coupling.
5
6
Do not allow the trailer to run onto the tractor vehicle when coupling.
The unbraked front axle of the trailer

must be able to turn.
Trailer tow hitch (example)
1 Locating pin for coupling pin

Connect cables and compressed-air
lines ( page 375).
There is a risk that the trailer may break

away. Check the trailer coupling regularly
for longitudinal play. To do this, move the
towbar body of the hitch firmly forwards and
back. Do not hold the coupling jaws. No longitudinal play is permitted. If any longitudinal play is detected, have it eliminated at
once.
Check the tightness of the trailer coupling
securing bolts at the end cross-member of
the vehicle's frame regularly, and retighten
if necessary.
374
Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
There is a risk that the trailer may break

away. Clean the trailer coupling regularly as
stated in the manufacturer's instructions.
Check the towbar mountings and end nut.
Connecting cables, compressed-air and

hydraulic lines
Vehicles intended to carry containers or demountable bodies: Objects thrown up by the

road surface could injure or endanger other
road users. For this reason, make sure that
the front and rear wheels are protected by
mudguards when the vehicle is driven without a trailer.
Vehicles with centre-axle trailer: No load is
to be carried on trailers of this type if there
is no load on the towing vehicle.
Vehicles with rear-mounted loading crane:

Centre-axle trailers are not to be towed.
4
Connections for semitrailer (example)
Connections for semitrailer (example)
1 Brake line hose coupling (yellow)

2 Reservoir line hose coupling (red)
3 Blank socket
4 24 V (12 V) connector, 15-pin
5
6
7
8
9
375
Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
1 On semitrailer tractor vehicles with sidemounted wind deflectors:
2
3
Before connecting or disconnecting the

compressed-air lines and cables, swing
the right-hand wind deflector inwards
( page 381).
4
5
6
Semitrailer tractor vehicles may only

tow semitrailers with a 24 V lighting
system.
Connecting the cable brake system
When driving with the semitrailer tractor
vehicle
Route cables, compressed-air and hydraulic lines so that they can yield
when the vehicle is cornered without
incurring tension, kinking or abrasion.
without a semitrailer
Before connecting electrical cables,

check that the voltage rating of the
consumer equipment on the trailer/
semitrailer is correct.
with a semitrailer without ABS:
with a semitrailer not equipped with an

electronically controlled brake system
or
Insert the connector cable into the
"blank" socket.
Check the function checks of the
Telligent brake system in the multifunction display after connecting the
connector cable ( page 77).
7
8
9
376
When driving with the semitrailer tractor

vehicle
with a semitrailer with ABS or
an electronic brake system:
Remove the connector cable from the
"blank" socket and insert it in the trailer's connector.
Connecting the cable voltage supply to
the trailer/semitrailer
Remove the connector cable from the
"blank" socket and insert it in the trailer's connector.
Check that the lighting on the trailer/
semitrailer, including turn signals and
brake lamps, is clean and in working order.
Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
Connecting the compressed-air lines
Disconnecting the compressed-air

lines
Connect the brake line coupling head

(yellow).
Connect the reservoir line coupling

head (red).
After connecting the compressed-air

lines to the trailer, adjust the brake
pressure regulator (if installed).
After pulling away, check the operation
of the trailer/semitrailer brake system.
Always keep to this order of work when detaching the coupling heads, otherwise the
trailer brake will be released and the unbraked trailer could be inadvertently set in
motion.
i
The shutoff valves in the coupling
heads open automatically when the
connection is made.
3
4
Connections for trailer (example)
1 Brake line hose coupling (yellow)

2 Reservoir line hose coupling (red)
3 24 V (12 V) connector, 15-pin
5 Duomatic coupling
Reservoir line and brake line
Secure the towing vehicle by applying

the parking brake ( page 62).
Apply the parking brake on the trailer/

semitrailer. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
Detach the reservoir line (red).
The brakes of the trailer/semitrailer

will be applied automatically.
8
9
377
Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
1 In addition, apply the mechanical park2

3
ing brake on the trailer/semitrailer.

Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
Detach the brake line coupling head

(yellow).
Trailer/semitrailer monitoring
Trailer or semitrailer with telematics complying with ISO 11992 and corresponding
sensor system:
Minimum and maximum values for the load

monitoring can be programmed in the
"Settings" menu ( page 189).
Depending on the equipment fitted, the

trailer/semitrailer monitoring system is
able to monitor the following functions on
a maximum of 5 trailers/semitrailers simultaneously:
The current load data and the identification

number (VIN) of the trailer/semitrailer can
be called up in the "Monitoring info" menu
( page 161).
Load temperature
Load pressure
Load liquid quantity
Automatic bulb check.
i
7
Observe the legal requirements regarding the permissible number of trailers

in all countries concerned.
8
9
378
Load monitoring
The driver information system in the multifunction display shows an event message
if the set values are too low or are exceeded.
Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
The driver information system checks the
bulbs on the trailer in connection with the
instrument panel function check.
i
An event message appears if the driver
information system detects a faulty
bulb.
Falling short of/exceeding the load

temperature specified value
1 Symbol for trailer 1

2 Status indicator
Replace faulty bulbs before starting a

journey.
Loading platform approach aid

sensor system:
Risk of accident
The loading platform approach aid does not

relieve the driver of his duty to make sure
that there are no persons/obstacles in the
danger area behind the truck/trailer combination.
If necessary, a second person should assist
during manoeuvring.
2
3
4
5
6
Automatic bulb check

sensor system:
7
8
9
379
Operation
Trailer/semitrailer
1 The loading platform approach aid is acti-
vated when reverse gear is engaged.
2
3
The warning buzzer will also sound at

distances less than 50 cm.
When reversing, the distance between the

trailer/semitrailer and a fixed obstacle is
indicated by the driver information system
in the multifunction display as a numerical
value and a bar chart.
When the ramp is reached, the loading

platform approach aid activates the
brake system to stop the truck/trailer
combination.
4
Distances less than 100 cm
5
6
7
8
Distance in centimetres
1 Loading platform approach aid symbol

Distances less than 50 cm
380
Operation
Wind deflector
Wind deflector
Wind deflector on cab
Risk of accident
Two persons are needed to adjust the wind

deflector.
Make sure that the working surface is suitable, firm and anti-slip.
Adjust the wind deflector according to the

size and shape of the vehicle's body or
semitrailer.
Take the wind deflector adjustment values from the instruction plate on the inside of the driver's door.
When adjusting the wind deflector, do

not exceed the vehicle's maximum permitted height. In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle height must
not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in).
Observe the relevant national and international regulations if the vehicle is

used for cross-border transport.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
381
Operation
Wind deflector
1 Adjusting the wind deflector
Read off the wind deflector adjustment

values on the instruction plate on the
inside of the driver's door.
Loosen the securing bolts on the adjustment rails and hold the wind deflector.
Environmental note
4
5 1 Securing bolts
2 Adjustment rails
Measure the height difference (H) and

separation (S) between the cab and the
body/semitrailer ( page 383).
7
8
9
382
A correctly set wind deflector reduces both

fuel consumption and environment impact.
Select and adjust to the best possible

retaining point on the adjustment rails.
Make sure that the right and left-hand
adjustment heights are the same.
Tighten the securing bolts on the adjustment rails.
Operation
Wind deflector
Adjustment diagram (example)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Adjustment example: Vehicles with long cab and high roof

H Height difference between the cab roof and the upper edge of the body/trailer = 1,250 mm
S Height difference between the back wall of the cab and the body/trailer = 150 mm
A Number of adjustment detents (1 14) = Adjustment detents 12
383
Operation
Wind deflector
Side wind deflector on the cab

Semitrailer tractor vehicle:
2 The right wind deflector can be swung in3

4
wards to maintain accessibility to the compressed-air lines and cables during

coupling/uncoupling.
Swing the wind deflector inwards by
applying pressure to the rear of the
side wing via the turning point of the
pressurised gas spring.
5 Swing the wind deflector to the drive

6
position by pulling the side wing via the

turning point of the pressurised gas
spring.
7
8
9
384
1 Side wing
2 Gas spring
Operation
Tippers
Tippers
Tipper operation
Ensure that no persons are
When tipping the load, there is a risk that the

vehicle could overturn.
When tipping, ensure that the vehicle is
standing firmly and remains horizontal.
The wheels subjected to extra load as the
tipper operates must be on a firm surface.
Three-way tipper: insert the pins into the pivots on the side at which the load is to be
tipped.
in the slewing range of the gate

in the tipping area or under the raised
tipper body
under the container
under the tipping body or interchangeable platforms.

When working underneath the raised tipper
body (e.g. to access the spare wheel) support the tipper body with the tipper body
support.
4
1 Tipper body support (example)
5
6
Comply with safety regulations and the operating instructions issued by the tipper
manufacturer.
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension: before

tipping, lower the chassis frame to the stop.
8
9
385
Operation
Tippers
1 Loading
2
3
Tipping
Three-way tipper:
Load the tipper body so that the centre

of gravity is as central as possible.
Insert the pins into the pivots on the

side at which the load is to be tipped.
Load large rocks or pieces of rubble

carefully and do not drop them into the
body from a great height.
Switch the tipper pump (power takeoff) on.
1 Tipper body indicator lamp
4
Before tipping
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension:

Lower the chassis frame to the stop.

chassis in its normal position B.
For how to lower the chassis, see

( page 294).
8
9
386

up and J is shown in the multi-function display.
Operation
Tippers
After tipping
Before driving off:
Raise the chassis to its normal (travel)

position.
Lower the tipper body fully.

Close the gate.
Lock the gate.
1 Display showing chassis in its normal

position for vehicles with pneumatic
suspension
2 Power take-off display
The B chassis in normal position

display in the multi-function display
must go out.
1
2
3
Switch the tipper pump (power takeoff) off. Engage the tipper valve level in
the driving position.
Observe the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.
The c tipper body indicator lamp on

the instrument panel and the J
power take-off display in the multifunction display must go out.
6
7
8
9
387
Operation
Tippers
1 Demountable tipper
2
With the vehicle stationary, the parking

brake applied and the engine running:
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension and

automatic chassis lowering feature:
Engage the power take-off

( page 255).
3
When connecting/removing
Containers
Tipping bodies
Interchangeable platforms
ensure that the vehicle is standing firmly

and remains horizontal.
Comply with safety regulations and the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.
7
8
9
388
1 Display showing chassis in its normal

position for vehicles with pneumatic
suspension
2 Power take-off display
The J symbol appears in the multifunction display to indicate that the

power take-off is engaged. The chassis
frame lowers automatically to the lowest position. The multi-function display
shows the chassis in its normal
position B.
Operation
Tippers
After picking up/setting down a
container/tipper body
Switch the power take-off off.
The J power take-off display in the
multi-function display goes out.
To raise the chassis frame to the normal (driving) position, see "Telligent
level control", raising/lowering the
chassis ( page 290).
The B symbol for chassis in normal
position in the multi-function display
goes out.
When picking up or setting down a container, the wheels on the front axle
must not be allowed to lift clear of the
ground. Risk of damage to the chassis
frame.
2
3
Run the engine when coupling to a

semitrailer or picking up demountable
bodies or containers.

by the body manufacturer.
If a chassis height has been stored:

Press memory button M1 ( page 292).
The chassis raises to the stored height.
7
8
9
389
Operation
Tyres and wheels
Tyres and wheels
1
2
3
4
Checking the tyres

Tyre damage is one of the most frequent
causes of the failure of commercial vehicles.
Risk of fire and accident
6
7
8
External tyre damage
Tyres age from the influence of sunlight and

the environment. The rubber of the tyre
gradually loses its elasticity. Tyres become
harder and more brittle and they begin to
split through age.
Sufficient tread depth
is prejudicial to operating safety
Foreign objects between the twin

tyres
Check tyre pressures regularly before starting a journey and correct as necessary.
Environmental note
Tyre pressures which are too low may result

in increased fuel consumption.
390
Risk of accident
Foreign objects in the tyre tread
leads to overheating of the tyres up to

the point of ignition
Determining the age of the tyres
Correct tyre pressures

( page 579)
Insufficient tyre pressure

damages or destroys tyres
Before starting a journey, check the

tyres on the trailer/semitrailer for:
i
Observe the legal requirements regarding the minimum tread depth in all
In Germany, the minimum tread depth
is 1.6 mm.
Tyres more than six years old are no longer

safe for use.
Replace the tyres, irrespective of wear, after
six years at the latest. This also applies to
the spare wheel.
Operation
Tyres and wheels
You can establish the age of the tyre using
the four digit DOT code number on the side
wall of the tyre.
Changing the tyre size
The braking characteristics of a vehicle with

a Telligent brake system could be affected
if a non-approved tyre size is used.
Comply also with the required tyre load

capacity and the speed index for your
vehicle.
After fitting another tyre size the Telligent

brake system, the tachograph and the
speedometer must be reprogrammed.
i
Details about tyre and wheel rim size,
tyre load capacity and speed index can
be found in the vehicle's certificate.
Risk of accident
1 DOT code number
2 Calendar week
3 Year of production
Use only wheels and tyres of a size approved for this type of vehicle. Comply
in particular with the permissible tyre
specifications for each country. These
specifications may specify a certain
type of tyre for your vehicle or prohibit
the use of certain types of tyres which
may be permissible in other countries.
You can obtain information about how

to program the Telligent brake system from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
2
3
4
7
8
9
391
Operation
Tyres and wheels
Tightening wheel nuts
i
2
3
4
5
Check wheel nuts regularly for tightness. Tighten if necessary.

On light-alloy wheels, the wheel nuts
are not flush with the wheel bolts when
tightened.
Replace damaged cover caps and
wheel nut covers.
Wheel nut cover caps (front axle)
Observe the wheel nut tightening torques ( page 577).
1 To release
2 To tighten
6
7
8
9
392
1 Wheel nut cover
Operation
Tyres and wheels
Loosen wheel nut cover caps with the
wheel nut wrench (in vehicle tool kit)
and remove them.
Risk of accident
Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pattern.
Tighten the wheel nuts of a newly changed

wheel after driving 30 miles (50 km).
Place the wheel covers on the wheel

nuts and tighten hand-tight with the
wheel stud wrench.
If new or repainted wheels are fitted, the

wheel nuts must be retightened again after
approximately 600 to 3,000 miles (1,000 to
5,000 km) have been covered. Observe the
wheel nut tightening torques ( page 577).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
393
Operation
Winter operation
Winter operation
1 Before the onset of winter, make sure that

2
the coolant contains sufficient antifreeze ( page 561)

the fuel used is winterproof
( page 562)
3 when using single-grade engine oils the

4
5
6
changeover is completed in good time

( page 557)
the windscreen washer/headlamp
cleaning system contains sufficient antifreeze ( page 574)
tyres with a high grip tread pattern, if
possible M+S tyres, are fitted
snow chains are fitted to the vehicle
7
8
9
394
Winter driving
Adapt your driving style to suit road conditions.
!
Vehicles without acceleration skid control (ASR): a rapid change from smooth
to rough road surfaces and spinning of
the drive wheels at the same time may
result in damage to the axle differential. Avoid wheelspin at the drive
wheels.
i
In snow and slush and on icy roads, fit
snow chains to the drive wheels in
good time.
All-wheel-drive vehicles:
Activate inter-axle locks on the transfer
case ( page 253).
Vehicles with Telligent stability control (SR):
In wintry road conditions, the optimum
effectiveness of the Telligent stability
control system is only achieved when
M+S tyres are fitted.
Operation
Winter operation
Snow chains increase traction in wintry
road conditions.
Snow chains
Risk of accident
Driving too fast with snow chains fitted may

result in the chains tearing, injury to other
road users or damage to the vehicle. Do not
exceed the maximum permissible speeds
for operation with snow chains. Observe the
legal requirements in all countries concerned.
In Germany, the legally permissible maximum speeds when using snow chains is
50 km/h.
!
You should only use snow chains that
have been approved by MercedesBenz.
There is a risk when fitting to the front
axles that the snow chains could damage the steering linkage components.
After fitting, make sure that the snow
chains have adequate clearance from
steering linkage components
( page 396).
The law specifies that snow chains

should be removed as soon as possible
once road surfaces are clear of snow.
The driving and braking characteristics
are worsened by driving with snow
chains fitted on roads clear of snow.
Vehicles with Telligent stability control (SR):
If traction problems occur when driving
with snow chains, deactivate stability
control ( page 90).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
395
Operation
Winter operation
1 Checking the tyre clearance

When fitting snow chains on the front axle:
Start the engine.
Turn the steering wheel towards the

front-passenger side to the stop.
With the steering on full lock, there

must be a clearance of at least 30 mm
between the snow chain and the steering pushrod.
4
5
6
7

brake applied:
Clearance between snow chain and steering

pushrod
Fit snow chains in accordance with the

fitting instructions of the chain manufacturer.
8
9
396
!
If the distance is less than 30 mm,
there is a risk that the snow chains
could damage the steering linkage
components. Remove the snow chains
and have the steering geometry
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Operation
Care
Care
Information is available from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if impurities or damage cannot be removed or repaired by care products.
Risk of accident
Always keep care products sealed and out

of the reach of children. Always follow the
instructions for using the care products.
Fuels must not be used as cleaning agents.
Fuels are highly flammable and constitute a
health hazard.
Environmental note
Wash the vehicle only at a properly

equipped wash bay. Dispose of empty containers, used cleaning materials and polishing wads in an environmentally responsible
manner.
High-pressure cleaners
Keep the water jet constantly moving while

cleaning. To prevent damage do not point
the water jet directly at
Door joints
Air spring bellows
Brake hoses
Electrical components
Connectors or
Seals
Minimum distance between high-pressure

nozzle and item being cleaned:
Risk of accident
approximately 70 cm for round-spray

jets
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with

round-spray jets for cleaning tyres or airspring bellows. The water jet could damage
the tyres or air spring bellows. Replace damaged wheels or air spring bellows.
approximately 30 cm for flat-spray jets

and concentrated power jets
5
6
7
8
9
397
Operation
Care
Caring for the exterior of your

vehicle
Dirt
Care product
Care
Tree resin, bird droppings
Stain remover
Remove the stain using a damp cloth, and

buff up the area using a dry cloth.
Grease stains
Cleaning petroleum
Carefully remove using a soft cloth and a

dab of cleaning petroleum.
Do not use petroleum for vehicles.
Insect remains
Insect remover
Spray the insect remains and leave for a

while for the insect remover to take effect.
Remove insect remains before using an automatic car wash.
Wash off the insect remains with water.
Do not allow insect remover to dry

in the sun.
3
4
5
Dry with a soft cloth.
6
7
8
9
398
Notes
Operation
Care
Dirt
Care product
Corrosion
Tar stains
Tar remover
Care
Notes
Remove corrosion on the chassis components and underbody of the cab. Protect the
exposed areas with primer, paint, PVC underseal or wax as appropriate.
Corrosion results from damage

caused by stone impact, chippings
or salt residue.
In the winter, wash the vehicle more

frequently in order to remove salt
residue.
Spray soiled areas. Leave for one minute for

the tar remover to take effect.
Wipe the tar off with a soft cloth.
Remove tar stains as soon as possible. Tar stains which have been
present for a long time are difficult
to remove.
4
5
6
7
8
9
399
Operation
Care
1
2
Vehicle components
Care product
Care
Notes
Aluminium gates
Car shampoo
Brush down with water.
Do not use abrasive cleaners.
Clean with water.
Do not use paint, spray or lubricating

products, petroleum ether, benzene,
kerosene or mineral oil. Do not point the
water jet on the high-pressure cleaner
directly at the compressed-air lines.
Compressed-air lines
3
4
Vehicle exterior
Car shampoo
Wash the vehicle down with plenty of wa- Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunter.
light.
Wash the sponge out regularly.
Rinse off with clean water.
Clean the air inlet for the ventilation

carefully.
In the winter, remove salt residue as

quickly as possible and thoroughly.
Do not forget the wheel arches when

you are washing the underside of the vehicle.
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with
round-spray jets for cleaning tyres or
air-spring bellows.
8
9
400
Operation
Care
Vehicle
components
Care product
Care
Paintwork and painted attachments
Gloss preserver
Protects the paint and maintains its shine. Do not use any care products in direct
sunlight or if the bonnet is warm.
For heavy dirt and to remove minor
Polish
scratches on varnished wooden components.
Paintwork cleaner
Polishing wad
Cleans ageing or weathered paintwork.
Touch-up stick
Spray can
Polishing paste
Light-alloy wheels
Car shampoo
Cleaning agent for
light-alloy wheels
Notes
Keep care products away from unpainted attachments (e.g. door handles or
seals). This will prevent stains.
Have the vehicle checked regularly for

minor paintwork damage at a specialist
For temporary touching up of minor paintworkshop or a Mercedes-Benz Service
work damage.
Centre.
Polishes very dirty or weathered paintwork and polishes out minor scratches.
Clean light-alloy wheels weekly using a
soft sponge and warm water.
Remove stubborn dirt (grease, oil, brake
dust) using a soft cloth and petroleum
ether.
Only use cleaning agents. Acidic or alkaline cleaning agents may cause the
wheel bolts or the retainer springs of the
balance weights to rust. Do not use
abrasive cleaners.
4
5
6
7
8
9
401
Operation
Care
Vehicle
components
Care product
Care
Notes
Engine cleaning
Preservative agent
Have the engine preserved.
Protect the belt drive system from wax.

When using high-pressure or steam
spray cleaners, do not point the spray
directly onto electrical components and
electric cables.
3
4
5
Spare wheel retaining bolts
Rust solvent
Retarder (Telma)
Remove dirt rust. Spray using rust solvent.

Regular cleaning using high-pressure
cleaner.
Retarder must be cold. High-pressure

cleaning without solvent.
Take particular care when cleaning the
stator and any electrical connections.
6
Windows
Car window cleaner

with anti-misting
agent
Use a cleaning agent regularly. It is also

suitable for the plastic panes on the headlamps.
Windows
Intensive car window

cleaner
Use this cleaning product on stubborn or

oily dirt. It is not suitable for the plastic
panes of the headlamps.
7
8
9
402
Do not use this cleaning product for the

headlamps.
Operation
Care
Vehicle
components
Care product
Care
Notes
Window guides, win- Talcum

dow and door weatherstrips
Rub talcum into clean, dry window guides

and door/window seals.
Windscreen wiper
blade
Clean the wiper rubber with a cloth and a

washing solution.
Replace the wiper rubbers once or twice

a year.
Clean using a soft sponge and plenty of

warm water.
Do not scrub or scratch the plastic

panes of the headlamps. Avoid applying
lots of pressure.
Suitable for all locks.
Headlamps, rear
lamps, additional
turn signals
Car shampoo
Door lock
Door lock de-icer
6
7
8
9
403
Operation
Care
Caring for the interior of your vehicle

Care product
Vehicle
components
Floor covering
Car shampoo
Care
Use antistatic spray to prevent electrostatic charges from building up in the

vehicle.
Antistatic spray
Notes
Cockpit
Cockpit care agent
Distribute the care product evenly using a

soft cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
Do not spray the care product on the

dashboard or its cover.
Roof lining
Car shampoo as a
washing solution
Always brush or vacuum dust away first.
Do not allow the roof lining to become

damp.
Clean heavy soiling with dry foam.

Dry foam fabric upholWash the roof lining using a cloth and car
stery cleaner
shampoo as a washing solution or stain reStain remover
mover if necessary.
5
6
Floormats
Car shampoo
Antistatic spray
8
9
404
Use antistatic spray to prevent electrostatic charges from building up in the

vehicle.
Operation
Care
Vehicle
components
Care product
Care
Notes
Cup holder
Upholstery cleaning
foam
Apply the cleaning product and wipe off

with a damp cloth.
Do not use any other product.
Car shampoo as a
washing solution
Rubber parts
Car shampoo as a
washing solution
3
Do not use any other care agents.
Do not oil or wax parts.
Cockpit care agent

Plastics care agent
Plastic parts
Car shampoo as a
washing solution
5
Do not use any other care agents.
Do not oil or wax parts.
Cockpit care agent

Plastics care agent
7
8
9
405
Operation
Care
Vehicle
components
Care product
Care
Leather upholstery
Leather care foam
Remove stains immediately.
Steering wheel
Car shampoo as a
washing solution
Wipe the steering wheel with a soft cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
Car shampoo as a
washing solution
Wipe the gear lever with a soft cloth.
Car shampoo as a
washing solution
Only clean the seat belts with these clean- Do not dry the seat belts in direct suning products or soap and clean, lukewarm light or at temperatures above 80 C.
water.
Do not bleach or dye the seat belts. This
could adversely affect the seat belt's
performance.
3
4
5
Gear lever
Seat belts
Upholstery cleaning
foam
7
8
9
406
Notes
Avoid making the perforated leather exWipe leather upholstery down with a damp cessively damp.
cloth and wipe dry.
Dry if necessary.
Do not use abrasive cleaners.
Dry if necessary.
Operation
Care
Vehicle
components
Care product
Care
Notes
Fabric upholstery
Car shampoo as a
washing solution
Remove stains immediately.
Seat covers or articles of clothing

which are not colourfast may discolour
the upholstery. Such stains cannot be
removed. Therefore use a suitable underlay on the upholstery.
Fabric upholstery
cleaner
Upholstery cleaning
foam
Stain remover
Curtains
Mild-action detergent
Always brush or vacuum dust away first.

Clean heavy soiling with dry foam.
Only use stain remover on stubborn
stains.
Do not use a stain remover or solvent.
Remove beer, wine and juice stains with a

clean cloth moistened with washing solution. Dab the affected areas with a clean
cloth moistened with washing solution.
Then clean the surface with a clean cloth
and clean water. Then dry.
Wash at 30 C.
3
4
5
6
The curtains are suitable for driers.
7
8
9
407
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
Telligent maintenance system
The Telligent maintenance system calculates service due dates for

oil change in mechanical assemblies
and
3 general service work,

4
5
6
7
8
depending on the vehicle's operating conditions.

The "Maintenance" menu of the driver information system provides a constant
overview of the service due dates required
for the vehicle and assemblies
( page 171).
An initial warning that service work is required appears 14 days before the service
due date. Additional messages are displayed if the service due date is reached or
exceeded ( page 172).
408
The initial service warning can be programmed to appear from 0 30 days

before the work is due. Further information is available from any MercedesBenz Service Centre.
If the work is carried out at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, the fact that the
work has been carried out professionally will be confirmed in both the driver
information system and the Maintenance Booklet.
Any service work carried out should be

confirmed in the Maintenance menu. For
notes on confirming service due dates, see
( page 174).
!
If you confirm service work but do not
have the work carried out, this can lead
to increased wear and damage to the
vehicle and assemblies. Only confirm
service due dates if the service work
has been carried out.
Operation
Maintenance
Risk of injury
Before having maintenance or repair work

carried out, it is essential that you read the
authoritative sections of the technical documentation relating to maintenance and repair measures e.g.
Operating Instructions and workshop information.
Also familiarise yourself in particular with
the legal regulations, e.g.
work safety and accident prevention
regulations.
Otherwise you may not recognise dangers
and could injure yourself or others.
Use only operationally-safe support blocks

to raise the vehicle for work on the vehicle
underside. Do not use the vehicle's jack for
this purpose. The vehicle's jack should only
be used to raise the vehicle for a short period of time.
i
Mercedes-Benz original parts undergo
rigorous quality control checks. Each
part has been specifically developed
and manufactured or selected and
adapted to the requirements of
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The function,
safety and value of your vehicle are
thus maintained.
In Germany and some other countries,
certain parts are only officially approved for installation and attachment if
they comply with legal requirements.
Mercedes-Benz original parts satisfy

this requirement. If other parts are
used, this could lead to reduced safety
standards. The vehicle's warranty and
its operating permit could be invalidated. Every Mercedes-Benz Service Centre maintains a stock of MercedesBenz original parts required for maintenance and repair work.
1
2
3
4
Clean the chassis before extensive

maintenance work is carried out.
5
Reconditioned components/
reconditioned parts
To ensure economical repairs, MercedesBenz also offers reconditioned parts and

assemblies. These are of the same quality
and have the same warranty as new parts.
Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be
happy to provide further information.
7
8
9
409
Operation
Maintenance
High-pressure grease guns
2
3
4
5
6
If the grease gun has no safety device,

it may damage bearing points, seals,
etc.
If a high-pressure grease gun is used,
its delivery pressure must not exceed
400 bar. Before lubricating, clean lubricating nipples thoroughly.
If a special-purpose body or special
equipment is fitted, comply with the
manufacturer's instructions when using the high-pressure grease gun.
Regular checks
Checking the clutch mechanism fluid
level
Risk of fatal accident
Brake fluid is highly toxic. If you inadvertently swallow brake fluid, consult a doctor immediately.
Do not allow brake fluid to come into contact with the eyes. In the event of contact
with the eyes when the eyelids are open,
rinse thoroughly with clean water. Consult a
doctor if you experience any pain.
When renewing brake fluid, always wear eye
protection.
Store brake fluid only in the sealed original

container and out of the reach of children.
Comply with safety regulations when handling brake fluid.
8
9
410
Brake fluid damages paintwork. If

brake fluid comes into contact with
paintwork, rinse it off with lots of clean
water.
Operation
Maintenance
!
If the hydraulic system loses brake fluid, it is not sufficiently sealed. Have the
hydraulic system checked.
The hydraulic system is a closed circuit.
Maintenance work should always be

carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The reservoir must be filled sufficiently, although not above the maximum mark.
Open the maintenance flap

( page 417).
Use only tested and approved brands.

Observe the boiling point (DOT 4 plus)
( page 569).
Environmental note

Brake fluid must not be allowed to get into

the sewage system, surface waters or
ground water.
Dispose of brake fluid in an environmentally
responsible manner.
3
4
5
6
Clutch reservoir
1 Max. mark
2 Min. mark
8
9
411
Operation
Maintenance
1 Checking vehicle assemblies

2
3
4
5
6
7
Checking compressed-air lines
Thoroughly check the assemblies, e.g.

engine and transmission, each week or
whenever you refuel.
Examine the compressed-air lines regularly to ensure that they are in perfect
condition.
If assemblies are leaking, have these

checked immediately. The maintenance work should always be carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have compressed-air lines replaced if

they show

work is carried out at a specialist workshop.
8
9
412
buckling
chafe marks
dents
or other external damage

and tools for the work required. For work
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential
Check the compressed-air brake system for tightness.
Checking compressed-air brake system
for leaks
Before checking the compressed-air
brake system, the compressed-air lines
should be checked.
Operation
Maintenance
Risk of accident
Checking with the parking brake applied
A leaking compressed-air system jeopardises vehicle and road safety. Have leaking
compressed-air systems repaired.

brake applied:
Uncouple the compressed-air lines
from the trailer/semitrailer
( page 377).
Start the engine.
Press the or button until

Monitoring Info appears in the multifunction display.
Press the j or k button until

Pressure stored appears in the display.
Run the engine until the pressure in

brake circuits 1 and 2 is 10 bar.
Then turn the key back to position 2 in

the ignition lock.
The compressed-air system is free from
leaks if there is no visible drop in pressure
in brake circuits 1 and 2 after three minutes.
This prevents any leakage from the

compressed-air system on the trailer/
semitrailer.
6
7
8
9
413
Operation
Maintenance
1 Checking with the parking brake released or partially applied
2
3
i
The check provides information on
leaks in the reservoirs, valves and
brake cylinders on the tractor vehicle.
Use chocks to safeguard the vehicle

against rolling away.

brake released:
Uncouple the compressed-air lines

from the trailer/semitrailer
( page 377).
This prevents any leakage from the

compressed-air system on the trailer/
semitrailer.
8
9
414
Run the engine until the pressure

stored in brake circuits 1 and 2 is
10 bar.
Turn the key back to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Depress the brake pedal enough for a
partial brake application (half pedal
travel).
Do not change the pedal position.
The compressed-air system is free from
leaks if there is no visible drop in pressure
in brake circuits 1 and 2 after holding the
pedal in the same position for three minutes.
Checking the seat belts

Pull the seat belt from the inertia reel
towards the rear.
The inertia reel locks the seat belt.
Pull out the seat belt completely from
the inertia reel.
Check the seat belt strap for visible
damage, such as tears or fraying.
Release the fully-extended seat belt.
The inertia reel must roll up the belt
completely.
Operation
Maintenance
Risk of injury

seat belts
belt tensioners
airbags
accident. These systems, particularly seat
belt anchorages, should be checked and replaced if necessary if they have been subjected to a load or damaged in an accident.

Checking anticorrosion protection

The cab is fitted as standard with body cavity protection and underbody protection.
!
Note that road salt has a corrosive effect. In the winter, wash the vehicle
more frequently in order to remove salt
residue.
Frequently examine the vehicle for

signs of corrosion damage. Pay particular attention to
1
2
compressed-air lines
hydraulic lines.
As a precautionary measure, spray the
underside of the vehicle with a waxbased protective agent.
Repair any damage to the anticorrosion protection provided by
the works.
3
4
5
i
No anti-corrosion protection is necessary for the transmission housing.
Changes in the colour of the transmission casing do not limit the operation or
durability of the transmission.
6
7
8
9
415
Operation
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
Scope of maintenance
Axle-load compensation joints of
all-wheel-drive vehicles
930.083/930.182/930.183/
932.072/932.073/932.083/
932.182/932.183/932.325/
932.336/934.082/934.182
Lubricate every four weeks with multi-purpose grease ( page 569).
Steering swivel
Lubricate more frequently with multi-purpose grease under arduous operating conditions
( page 569).
Trailer tow hitch
See the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions in the vehicle's documentation
wallet.
All-wheel-drive vehicle universal

joints
Grease more frequently depending on operating conditions ( page 569).
Retarder (Telma)
Check the distances between the rotor and the terminal plates of the stator.
5
6
Specific specialist knowledge is necessary for this. You are therefore advised to have these
checks carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or specialist workshop.
7
Semitrailer coupling
See the corresponding manufacturer's operating/maintenance instructions in the vehicle's

documentation wallet.
Observe the type of coupling (standard or low maintenance).
Special-purpose bodies and

special equipment
416
Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when lubricating.
Operation
Maintenance
Environmental note
Maintenance flap
Opening
When maintenance work is complete, dispose of

service products
empty containers
cleaning materials
parts which came into contact with service products (e.g. filters)
used semitrailer coupling sliders
in an environmentally responsible manner.
2
Risk of injury
G
3
The maintenance flap opens automatically

and could injure persons standing its slewing range.
Ensure that nobody is standing in the slewing range of the maintenance flap.
4
1 Release lever
Press the two release levers to the right
in the direction of the arrow.
Lift up the maintenance flap gently.
5
6
The maintenance flap opens automatically as far as the safety catch stop.
7
8
9
417
Operation
Maintenance
1 Closing
2
Risk of injury
Engine oil level
When you close the maintenance flap, persons standing in the slewing range of the
maintenance flap could be injured.
Ensure that nobody is standing in the slewing range of the maintenance flap.
Swing the maintenance flap down and

make sure that it audibly engages in its
retaining catches.
6
7
8
9
418
Checking the engine oil level

The engine oil level can only be called up in
the driver information system. Calling up
the engine oil level ( page 163).
Topping up the engine oil
If the engine oil level is too low or too high,
an event message will appear in the multifunction display.
i
Only add the amount of oil required after the event message with system
abbreviation/symbol N has been
displayed. Then add the complete
quantity recommended.
add the amount of oil displayed in the
Monitoring Info menu before embarking on long journeys.
Operation
Maintenance
!
Use only approved engine oils in the
specified SAE viscosity classes
( page 557).
Drain or siphon off excess oil.
Unscrew the oil filler cap, check for
tightness and leakage,
Maintenance flap opened (example)
1 Oil filler cap

( page 417),
Unscrew the oil filler cap,
Top up the oil
Close the maintenance flap

( page 418).

headlamp cleaning system
Windscreen washer/antifreeze concentrate

is highly flammable.
Avoid fire and naked flame and refrain

from smoking when handling windscreen
washer/antifreeze concentrate.
Risk of fire and explosion
Add a commercially-available windscreen

washer concentrate for summer or winter
to the water. DaimlerChrysler recommends Mercedes-Benz windscreen washer
concentrate S for summer or W for Winter.
5
6
7
8
9
419
Operation
Maintenance
1 Use windscreen washer concentrate

( page 417),
marked with S at temperatures above

freezing.
Unscrew the cap,
2 Use antifreeze concentrate marked
Refill the reservoir,
with W when driving in icy conditions.
The windscreen washer concentrate

containers are marked with S for summer or W for winter. Observe the correct mixing ratio.
5
6
7
8
9
420
Replace the cap on the reservoir and

turn it firmly as far as the stop,
( page 418).
1 Cap on the windscreen washer/ headlamp cleaning system reservoir
Operation
Maintenance
Coolant level
Only check the coolant level with the vehicle standing on a level surface, with the
engine switched off and a coolant temperature below 50 C.
Risk of injury/poisoning
When opening the cooling system, there is a

risk of scalding due to hot coolant spraying
out. The cooling system and the coolant expansion tank are pressurised when the engine is at normal operating temperature.
Check the cooling and heating systems

regularly for leaks. If considerable coolant loss from the coolant pump leak-off
hole occurs, have the pump replaced or
repaired at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre or specialist workshop.
Wear gloves and eye protection.
2
3
4
Only open the expansion tank when the

coolant is at a temperature below 90 C.
Coolant contains glycol and is toxic. Do not

swallow coolant.
6
7
8
9
421
Operation
Maintenance
1 Checking the coolant level

2

( page 417).
Undo the coolant expansion tank cap

completely.
The coolant in the expansion tank must
be at the lower marking on the filler
neck.
3
4
Adding coolant
5
6
To dump any excess pressure, slowly

turn the coolant expansion tank cap
anti-clockwise through a turn.
Maintenance flap opened
1 Coolant expansion tank cap
7
8
9
422
Observe the correct coolant mixture ratio and the required water quality
( page 561).
Set the heating temperature selector

to full heat output.
For heating systems with automatic
temperature control, turn the key to
position 0 in the ignition lock.
Add coolant up to the lower marking on
the filler neck.
Replace the coolant expansion tank
cap and screw it on tight.
Run the engine briefly with varying engine speeds.
Check coolant level and top up if necessary.
( page 418).
Operation
Maintenance
Batteries
The batteries are located on the left-hand
side of the chassis tractor frame or, on
semitrailers, between the longitudinal
members, depending on the rear design.
To achieve a long service life, the batteries
should always be fully charged.
The charge status of the batteries should
be checked more frequently if the vehicle
is used mainly for short journeys or is left
unused for long periods of time.
The batteries should be charged when the
vehicle is left unused for long periods of
time in order to ensure that the vehicle always starts.
Risk of injury/explosion
Risk of explosion
Explosive oxy-hydrogen is produced
when the batteries are charged.
Only charge the batteries in a wellventilated area.
As a result of the risk of explosion,
avoid the creation of sparks
through fire, naked flames or smoking.
Battery acid is caustic. Battery acid
must not come into contact with
the skin, eyes, clothing or the vehicle's paintwork.
The fluid may spray into your eyes

when mixing water and acids.
For this reason, wear eye protection.
Children are unable to recognise

the dangers posed by handling batteries. For this reason, keep children away.
Observe the safety notes, safety
measures and recommendations
contained in these Operating Instructions.
3
4
5
6
Rinse off acid splashes immediately

with tap water. If necessary, consult
a doctor.
7
8
9
423
Operation
Maintenance
Environmental note
Batteries contain lead. Do not dispose of

used batteries with the household rubbish.
Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.
Take a faulty battery to a Mercedes-Benz

Service Centre or a collection point for used
batteries.
Transport and store full batteries in an upright position. Secure batteries against tipping over during transport.
6
7
Disconnecting the batteries
Risk of injury
There is a risk of short circuit. Do not place

metal objects or tools on the batteries.
Semitrailer tractor batteries in the rear end

of the vehicle
Semitrailer tractors with batteries in the

rear end of the vehicle between the longitudinal members:
The batteries are only accessible with an
unsaddled trailer.
8
Removable battery support frame on side of
chassis frame
424
When disconnecting the batteries, always

disconnect the negative terminal first and
then the positive terminal. There is a risk of
short circuit if the positive terminal on the
connected battery comes into contact with
the vehicle components.
Operation
Maintenance
Switch off all electrical consumers.
Open and remove the battery cover.
Disconnect the negative terminal.
Disconnect the positive terminal.
Disconnecting the batteries
All electrical consumers must be
switched off.
Risk of injury
There is a risk of short circuit. Do not place

metal objects or tools on the batteries.
When connecting the batteries, always connect the positive terminal first and then the
negative terminal. There is a risk of short circuit if the positive terminal on the connected battery comes into contact with the
vehicle components.
Disconnect the positive terminal.
Disconnect the negative terminal.
Do not loosen or disconnect the battery

terminals when the engine is running.
Do not interchange the battery terminal

clamps.
Fit the battery cover.
Retrofitting additional electrical consumers or electronic equipment requires specialised knowledge.

Maintenance work should always be
carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Only tow start a vehicle with the battery

connected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
425
Operation
Maintenance
1 Following a circuit break (e.g. when recon- Checking the battery fluid level
necting the batteries), the following work
i
should be carried out:
The fluid level in each battery cell must
2 set the clock ( page 197),
3
deactivate the anti-theft system for the

audio equipment (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
be approximately 15 mm above the top

of the plate. Observe the "Min./Max."
mark on the battery casing.
Take off the battery cover.
4
5
426
Secure the battery support frame by

bolting.
Connect the battery ( page 425).
Feed water lowers the battery power

output. Add only distilled or deionised
water. Do not use a metal funnel when
adding distilled water. There is a risk of
short circuit.
Undo securing bolt on the battery support frame.
Slide the battery support frame back.
Disconnect the battery ( page 424).
Check the battery fluid level.
Check the battery fluid level.
Vehicles with removable battery support

frame:
Remove the battery support frame and

batteries.
Operation
Maintenance
Battery care
!
Petrol, benzene, kerosene or similar
products attack the battery casing. Do
not therefore use any of these products
to clean the batteries. Stickers or imprints on the batteries could be removed or become illegible.
Grease the terminals, especially the undersides, with acid protection grease.
Recharge batteries which are out of use

with an open-circuit voltage of < 12.4 V.
2
3
4
Clean batteries only when their stoppers

are inserted.
The vent holes in the stoppers must be
open and the cell vent tubes must not be
blocked.
Removable battery support frame on side of

chassis frame
5
6
Semitrailer tractor batteries in the rear end

of the vehicle
7
8
9
427
Operation
Maintenance
Unscrew the stopper from the batteries.
1 Charging the batteries

2
3
4
5
Risk of explosion
Gas emitted from the battery may explode if

ignited. Avoid creating sparks. Avoid naked
flames and do not smoke when handling the
batteries. Remove the battery terminal
clamps from the battery charger only when
the battery charger is switched off and no
more gas is escaping from the batteries. Ensure that the area is well-ventilated when
charging the batteries.
Do not detach the connecting cables

between the batteries.
8
9
428
Disconnect the battery terminals.

Follow the operating instructions for
the battery charger.
Connect the battery charger to the batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Environmental note

used batteries with the household rubbish.
Take a faulty battery to a Mercedes-Benz

Service Centre or a collection point for used
batteries.
Make sure that the charging voltage is

correct. Use a commercially-available
battery charger to charge the batteries.
Do not fast charge new batteries.
Practical advice
Where will I find...?
Troubleshooting
Cab 1
Engine
Fuel system
Transmission
2
3
Brake system
Compressed-air system 4
Trailing axle 5
Steering system/Telligent steering system
Wheels and tyres
Electrical system
6
7
Unlocking and locking in an emergency

Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing 8
429
Practical advice

equipment
2
3
4
5
S-Cab
Stowage compartment on cab rear wall
On right near
co-driver's seat
Stowage compartCab rear wall

ment on cab rear wall
M-Cab
Stowage compartment behind co-driver's

seat
Stowage compartment behind

co-driver's seat
Stowage compartment behind

co-driver's seat
Cab rear wall: 6 kg
6
L-Cab
Exterior stowage compartment, right
7
8
Stowage compartment behind driver's

seat: 2 kg
Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage compartment, right
partment, left
partment, left 2 kg
Exterior stowage compartment, right 6 kg
MEGASPACE cab
2-section
Pump lever in outside stowage compartment, bottom right
Wheelbrace in exterior stowage compartment, bottom left
430
Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage

partment, bottom
partment, top left
compartment, botright
tom left
Practical advice
Vehicle tool kit pocket
1
2
S-Cab
Stowage compartment
in driver's door
Stowage compartment on
cab rear wall
cab rear wall
M-Cab
Stowage compartment
in driver's door
Stowage compartment be- Stowage compartment be- Stowage compartment behind co-driver's seat
hind co-driver's seat
hind co-driver's seat
L-Cab
Exterior stowage compartment, left
Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compartment, left
ment, left
ment, right
Stowage compartment
in driver's door
Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compartment, bottom left
ment, bottom left
ment, bottom right
MEGASPACE cab
cab rear wall
7
8
9
431
Practical advice
1
2
Special tools
(depending on vehicle equipment)
Recommended to supplement vehicle

tool kit:
Vehicle tool kit

1 Fitting sleeve for changing a wheel
( page 494)
2 Spacer for spare wheel holder
( page 494)
3 Installation lever for poly-V-belt
( page 462)
3
4
5
Vehicle document wallet

Allen key:
4 Sliding/tilting sunroof emergency operation ( page 535)
5 Hexagon bolts (4 bolts): for fan clutch
lock-up ( page 467).
6
7
8
9
432
Hexagon bolts M 8 x 120 mm (specialist dealer), for removal of rear axle

(HL 7, HD 7) drive shaft ( page 548).
Practical advice
Pump lever
To assemble the pump lever
The pump lever is used to operate
Engage the retaining pin 3 in the

cutout 5.
the jack
1
2
the wheelbrace
the spare wheel winch
the cab tilt pump
Pump lever (2-section)
1 Cutout for operating lowering screw on

jack
2 Mounting for wheelbrace (tilting cab or
unscrewing/tightening wheel nuts)
3 Retaining pin
4 Cutout for operating winch
5 Cutout for retaining pin
6 Retaining sleeve for hand crank (operation of spare wheel winch).
4
5
6
7
8
9
433
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
1
2

Problem
Possible cause
Transmission has problems with gearshifts
Risk of accident
Loss of hydraulic fluid
Suggested solutions
Tilt the cab.

Check fluid level in HPS reservoir.
If necessary, top up with DOT 4 brake
fluid.
Select 1st, 2nd, 7th and 8th gears several times to bleed the hydraulics.
If this is unsuccessful, select gears
manually at the transmission
( page 470).
5
6
7
8
9
434
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Have gearshift examined. The maintenance work should always be carried

out by an authorised specialist workshop.

visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it
relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
435
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Gearshift does not operate
Risk of accident
Suggested solutions
Select gears manually at the transmission ( page 470).

Leak in gearshift hydraulics

4
5
6
7
Risk of accident
Transmission damage
8
9
436
G
Tow vehicle away ( page 542).
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Electronic-pneumatic gearshift
(EPS III S/EPS III SA)
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Gearshift no longer operates
Risk of accident
Activate transmission control back-up

mode ( page 473).
Event message:
Malfunction or failure of
the transmission electronics
drive control
the sensor unit
the transmission data cable
Tow the vehicle away ( page 542).

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
437
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Event message:
Risk of accident
Suggested solutions
Charge pressure too low in auxiliary consumer circuit
3
4
Stop the vehicle (traffic conditions permitting).

Wait until sufficient charge pressure is
available in auxiliary consumer.
Charge pressure event message goes
out.
Switch off engine.
After waiting approximately ten seconds, re-start engine.
If multi-function display still shows

event message Clutch: failed, carry
out a "short teach-in procedure"
( page 478).
If short teach-in process is unsuccessful, carry out a "long teach-in procedure" ( page 479).
8
9
438
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Event message:
Risk of accident
Suggested solutions
Stop the vehicle (traffic conditions permitting).

Carry out a "long teach-in procedure"
( page 479).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
439
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
1
2
Opening and closing the vehicle

Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the radio remote control
Batteries of the radio remote control are

discharged.
Open doors with the key

( page 103).
Check batteries of the radio remote
control. If the radio remote control
batteries needs to be replaced, an
event message appears in the multifunction display.
3
4
Replace batteries in good time

( page 534).
Batteries are obtainable from any specialist workshop or from your
5
6
You have pressed the radio remote control
too often outside the range of vehicle.
7
8
9
440
Press the button on the radio remote control twice and start the engine within 60 seconds.
The radio remote control will then
function normally again.
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
You receive feedback from the turn signal

lamps when you prime anti-theft alarm
system.
One of the monitored components/

entrances is not in the normal position.
Deactivate anti-theft alarm system

( page 103)
Check whether all monitored

components/entrances, such as:
both doors
the maintenance flap
the stowage box on driver and codriver's side
the cab tilt lock

all contacts or sensors of optional
body attachments
are in the normal position.
7
8
9
441
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Repeat priming procedure ( page 111).
If this is unsuccessful, have the anti-theft

alarm system examined. The maintenance
work should always be carried out by an
authorised specialist workshop.

4
5
6
7
8
9
442
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause

system:
Faulty travel detection by door electronics. Hold down the q button in the control panel until the side window is completely open.
The side windows no longer close automatically.
Suggested solutions
Hold down the H button in the control panel until the side window is completely closed.
If this is unsuccessful, have the power

window mechanism examined.

5
6
7
8
9
443
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
1
2
3
Engine
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Engine cannot be started with vehicle's

own key and multi-function display shows
CODE.
Immobiliser has not recognised the key.
Turn key slowly and hold it for a short

period (approximately 0.5 seconds)
between ignition lock positions 2 and
3 ( page 125).
You have not held key between ignition lock After four unsuccessful attempts at
positions 2 and 3 for the required period.
starting, use spare key for further
starting attempts.
You have used an invalid key.

carry a spare key at all times, for emergency use.
5
6
7
8
9
444
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
If this is unsuccessful, have cause of the

fault traced and rectified. The maintenance work should always be carried out
by an authorised specialist workshop.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
445
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Engine does not start.
Engine electronics are faulty.
Before next starting attempt, turn key

back to position 0 in the ignition lock.
Multi-function display shows the event

message with short symbol A.
Starter batteries are discharged.
After approximately ten seconds, repeat starting procedure ( page 462).
2
3
Note that starting attempts lasting too

long will discharge the batteries.
Have your vehicle jump-started from
another vehicle ( page 537).
4
Fuel supply is faulty.
Check the fuel tank.

If fuel tank level has fallen to 14% of total
capacity, an event message appears in the
Check fuel system for leaks.

Bleed fuel system ( page 468).
7
8
9
446
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Engine fails to start up when ambient tem- The flows properties of the diesel fuel are
perature is low.
inadequate due to paraffin separation.
Suggested solutions
Malfunctions resulting from paraffin
separation can only be corrected by
heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by
parking in a heated area.
Add flow improver or petroleum to the
fuel ( page 563).
If this is unsuccessful and the engine cannot be started after several attempts,
have the cause traced and rectified.
carried out by an authorised specialist
workshop.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
447
Practical advice
Troubleshooting

system
Problem
Possible cause
Cab cannot be tilted.
Valve lever of mechanical-hydraulic cab tilt- Position valve lever of the mechanicaling pump is positioned in the direction of
hydraulic cab tilting pump in the directhe vehicle chassis.
tion of the entrance ( page 453).
Failure or leaking of tilting hydraulics.
Suggested solutions
Have tilting hydraulics overhauled.

workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre as it has the necessary specialist
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is
5
6
7
8
9
448
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system

Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Cab cannot be tilted.
Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab tilting

system is not switched on.
Press the main switch of the electrohydraulic cab tilting system upwards
( page 457).
Valve lever of electro-hydraulic tilting pump Position valve lever of electro-hydrauis positioned to the right, in the direction of
lic tilting pump to the left, in the directhe driving position.
tion of the tilting position
( page 457).
Fuse for electro-hydraulic tilting pump has
blown.
Replace fuse F2 in module A2 of electrical compartment ( page 522, 526

and 531)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
449
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Failure or leaking of tilting hydraulics.
Have tilting hydraulics overhauled.

workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends
that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre as it has the necessary specialist
work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
450
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
STOP lamp
Risk of accident
If the STOP lamp does not go out, or lights

up while vehicle is being driven, safe operation of the engine is endangered. If road and
traffic conditions permit, stop the engine at
once and determine the cause.
the charge pressure in the tractor vehicle's spring-loaded parking brake release circuit drops below 5.5 bar
the charge pressure in the trailer/
semitrailer brake circuit drops below
5.5 bar (e.g. if air consumption is too
high while manoeuvring trailer).
1 STOP lamp
The STOP lamp goes out after not more
than 10 seconds or when the engine is
started.
The STOP lamp lights up if
1
2
3
4
The STOP lamp lights up and additionally

the multi-function display shows a system
code/symbol, when:
the charge pressure in brake circuit 1

or 2 of the tractor vehicle drops below
6.8 bar
the engine oil pressure is too low

the engine oil level is too low.
7
8
9
451
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Risk of accident
The operating and driving safety of the vehicle is endangered when an event message
with a red status display is present. Observe
the traffic situation and immediately stop
the vehicle.
2
3
4
5
1 Status indicator (red)

2 Charge pressure, brake system
3 Fault location
6
7
8
9
452
The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change. Check the brake system
and have it overhauled.
carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.

If air consumption is high, e.g. when manoeuvring a trailer, do not drive any further
until the STOP lamp has gone out.
Practical advice
Cab
Cab
Before tilting the cab:
Tilting the cab

Additionally secure the vehicle with
wheel chocks.
Select neutral N at the transmission.
Switch off engine and turn key in the ignition lock back to position 0.
Switch off auxiliary air conditioning or
auxiliary heating.
Risk of injury
As the cab is tilted it can suddenly fall forwards to end position. Persons remaining
within cab tilting area can be injured.
Close all doors, stowage compartments inside cab, and outside flaps
making sure that they audibly engage.
Vehicles with refrigerator: Switch off

and empty refrigerator.
For safety reasons, keep area in front

of gear lever and in front of cab unobstructed.
The front coupling pin must be properly

inserted.
MEGASPACE, car transporter,

LowLiner and vehicles with electrohydraulic cab tilting system: Open
maintenance flap ( page 417) and
swing it fully upwards.
4
5
6
Remove all loose objects (e.g. cans,

bottles, tools, bags, etc.) from cab and
stowage pockets in the doors.
Only tilt the cab when the tilting area is

clear.
8
9
453
Practical advice
Cab
Always tilt the cab fully, as far as its limit of travel.
Have tilting hydraulics examined if failure occurs or leaks are present.

be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
4
System graphic, cab tilting
5 1 Open maintenance flap

2 Tilt the cab
6
7
8
9
454

Practical advice
Cab
system
To tilt forwards
Open the flap in the entrance, and

swing it up.
Position valve on tilting pump towards

entrance 1.
Fit pump lever with wheelbrace (vehicle

tool kit) onto tilting pump 2.
Operate tilting pump until cab is fully
tilted to end position.
i
Tilting pump (example)
1 Flap
2 Tilting pump
The cab is unlocked automatically.
4
Graphic, tilting pump valve lever position
(example)
1 To tilt forwards
2 To tilt back and travel position
Tilting pump is located on co-driver side.
7
8
9
455
Practical advice
Cab
Swing the flap in the entrance down
and listen for it to engage.
1 To tilt back to driving position

2
3
4
5
Risk of accident
If the valve lever is pushed forwards the entrance 1 as the vehicle is being driven, the
cab tilt lock can open automatically. The cab
can tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a
heavy jolt.
Make sure that the valve lever is positioned
in the direction of the vehicle chassis 2
when the vehicle is being driven.

( page 418).
Vehicles with refrigerator:
Ten minutes after the cab has been tilted back to the driving position, switch
on the refrigerator. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
Risk of accident
Position valve on tilting pump in the direction of vehicle chassis 2.
Operate tilting pump until cab has

reached the driving position.
The lock must audibly engage.
i
The cab locks automatically.
456
If indicator lamp does not go out after

the engine is started, then cab is not locked.
There is a risk that the cab may tilt forwards
if the vehicle is subjected to a heavy jolt. Ensure that cab lock indicator lamp goes
out when the engine is started.
i
Have the tilting hydraulics checked if a
failure occurs or if leaks are present.
Practical advice
Cab
Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system

The cab tilting system is ready for operation. The indicator lamp in the switch
lights up.
To tilt forwards
1
2
i
The electric tilting pump is located:
for road and construction site vehicles, on co-driver side, in entrance
1 Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab

tilting system
Turn key in the ignition lock to position
2.
for car transporters and LowLiner

vehicles, on right behind cab
Graphic, valve lever position of electric cab
tilting pump (example)
1 To tilt forwards
2 To tilt back and driving position
6
7
8
9
457
Practical advice
Cab
1 Open the flap in entrance, and swing it
To tilt back to driving position
up.
Position valve lever on electric cab tilting pump to left 1.
Risk of accident
Remove switch for the electric tilting

pump from mounting on the co-driver
side under the maintenance flap.
Hold switch pressed down until cab is

tilted fully to end position.
If the valve lever is pushed forwards the entrance 1 as the vehicle is being driven, the
cab tilt lock can open automatically. The cab
can tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a
heavy jolt.
5
6
i
The cab is unlocked automatically.
The cab has reached its limit of travel
when the pump noise becomes louder.
7
8
9
458
Make sure that the valve lever is positioned

in the direction of the vehicle chassis 2
when the vehicle is being driven.
Graphic, valve lever position of electric cab

tilting pump (example)
Position valve lever on the electric cab

tilting pump to the right 2.
Practical advice
Cab
Swing flap in the entrance down and
listen for it to engage.
Insert switch of electric tilting pump
into the mounting.
( page 418).
1 Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab
tilting system
Hold switch of electric tilting pump
pressed down until cab is tilted into
driving position and is locked.
If indicator lamp does not go out after

the engine is started, the cab is not locked.
There is a risk that the cab may tilt forwards
if the vehicle suffers a heavy jolt. Make sure
that cab lock indicator lamp goes out
when engine is started.
Risk of accident
The cab tilting system is switched off.

The indicator lamp in the switch will go
out. Cab tilt lock indicator lamp in
the instrument panel must go out once
engine has been started.
3
4
5
6
The cab locks automatically.
7
8
9
459
Practical advice
Cab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
i
If a loud pumping noise can be heard
when the tilting pump is operated:
Check that the valve lever on electric
tilting pump is set to desired tilting direction. Have the tilting hydraulics
checked if a failure occurs or if leaks
are present.
460
Cab tilting system checking oil level/

topping up
i
Cab tilting system is filled for the life of
the vehicle. A need for topping up with
oil is not envisaged. Have the tilting hydraulics checked if a failure occurs or if
leaks are present.
Environmental note
Hydraulic oil is an environmental hazard.

Collect any oil which may have spilled and
clean the tilting pump.
Practical advice
Cab

with the cab tilted
Risk of injury
When the cab is tilted and the engine is running, there is a risk of injury from hot or moving parts of the engine, e.g. exhaust
manifold, poly-V-belts, fan, etc.
Tilt the cab ( page 453).
To start the engine
To stop the engine
Press starter button 1 at the engine

until the engine starts.
Press shutoff button 2 on the engine.
i
If a gear is selected, the starter button
on the engine will not operate.
To increase the engine speed
With the engine running, press starter
button 1 again and hold it pressed until the desired engine speed is reached.
To turn the engine over without starting up
Press and hold down both starter button 1 and shutoff button 2 on the
engine simultaneously.
The starter will turn over the engine

without the engine starting up.
4
5
i
6
It is possible to increase the engine

speed until the governed speed is
reached.
7
8
1 Starter button
2 Shutoff button
461
Practical advice
Engine
Engine
1
2
3
Engine emergency running mode

Activate engine emergency running mode
when
the multi-function display shows the
event message with code/symbol
A
the accelerator pedal does not function
4 or the engine runs at a constant speed

of approximately 1,300 rpm
Activate engine emergency running

mode
Observe the traffic conditions and stop
the vehicle.
To check the condition of the

poly-V-belt
Poly-V-belts must not show longitudinal

tears in the running surfaces. Damaged,
oily or glazed poly-V-belts must be replaced without delay.
Switch off engine.

After approximately ten seconds, restart the engine.
i
In engine emergency running mode,
the engine speed is limited to about
1,300 rpm.
6
7
8
9
462
Poly-V-belt
Practical advice
Engine
To remove and refit poly-V-belts
Small lateral cracks appear in the polyV-belts after approximately 3,000 to

6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km) of
normal use. It is not necessary to replace poly-V-belts that show small lateral cracks.
2
3
Specialist technical knowledge is required to replace the poly-V-belts.

4
Special tool (vehicle tool kit)
1 Screwdriver
2 Assembly lever

6
7
8
9
463
Practical advice
Engine
1 To remove the poly-V-belt

2
3
4
Insert the special tool with assembly lever into tensioning mechanism.
Turn tensioning mechanism anti-clockwise and upwards, and insert a screwdriver in the retainer hole provided.
Risk of injury
The tensioning mechanism is spring-loaded.
5
6
Remove the poly-V-belt.

Check tensioning mechanism, tension
pulley, return pulley and main pulleys
for perfect condition.
7
8
9
464
Fitting the poly-V-belts
Have worn bearings in tensioning

mechanism, tension pulley or return
pulleys replaced and also replace worn
main pulleys.
Place new poly-V-belt in position on all

the pulleys.

!
Observe the illustration showing correct routing of the poly-V-belt
( page 465).
Practical advice
Engine
Pivot tensioning mechanism anti-clockwise and remove screwdriver from the
retainer hole.
Swing tensioning mechanism back into
place.
Remove special tool with assembly lever and check that the poly-V-belt is
seated correctly on the pulleys.
3
4
Poly-V-belt routing:
Vehicles without air conditioning
Vehicles with refrigerator block
1 Crankshaft
2 Coolant pump
3 Alternator
4 Tensioning pulley
5 Air-conditioning compressor
6 Refrigerator block
5
6
7
8
Vehicles with air conditioning
Vehicles with air conditioning and refrigerator block
465
Practical advice
Engine
1 Vehicles with belt-driven fan

i
In order to replace the poly-V-belt, it is
2
3
4
5
6
7
necessary to remove the fan. This work

requires specialist technical knowledge.
8
9
466
Vehicles with belt-driven fan
Vehicles with belt-driven fan and air conditioning
Poly-V-belt routing:
1 Crankshaft
2 Coolant pump
3 Alternator
4 Tensioning pulley
5 Air-conditioning compressor
6 Radiator fan
Practical advice
Engine
Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up
The fastening tabs and threaded holes

are directly opposite each other.
When there is a fault with the electromagnetic fan clutch, e.g. recognisable by elevated coolant temperature, it is possible to
lock-up the clutch mechanism. The fan has
a rigid connection to the belt pulley.
Electromagnetic fan clutch
1 Fastening tabs
2 Hexagon bolts
Turn the fastening tabs over the threaded holes on the fan.
Screw in and tighten M 6 x 10 four hexagon bolts (vehicle document wallet).
Replace the fan clutch as soon as possible.


5
6
7
8
9
467
Practical advice
Fuel system
Fuel system
1
2
Bleeding the fuel system

The hand pump is located either between
the chassis and the fuel tank or next to the
air cleaner housing.
Remove the fuel tank filler cap by turning it anti-clockwise.

Turn hand pump lever anti-clockwise to
release it.
Operate hand pump until definite resistance is felt.
i
Operate hand pump for approximately
100 strokes until definite resistance is
felt.
4
5
6
Secure the hand pump lever again by

turning it clockwise.
1 Hand pump (example)
7
8
9
468
Replace the cap on the fuel tank and

turn it clockwise to tighten.
Vehicles with fuel prefilter:
i
The fuel prefilter with heated water
separator is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle behind the cab.
Before bleeding the fuel system, operate the fuel prefilter hand pump and
completely fill the filter housing.
Practical advice
Fuel system
Operate the hand pump and catch the
water/fuel mixture.
Fuel prefilter, water drainage
Tighten the drain plug.
The fuel prefilter with heated water

separator is located on right-hand side
of the vehicle behind the cab.
1
2
Check the fuel system for leaks.
Dispose of the fuel/water mixture in an environmentally responsible manner.
Environmental note
Fuel prefilter (example)
1 Inspection glass
2 Drain plug
3 Hand pump
Place collector under the drain plug.
Unscrew the drain plug.
7
8
9
469
Practical advice
Transmission
Transmission
1
2
3

In the case of a defective HPS, you can select 3rd, 4th or reverse gears manually using the shift and selector levers at the
transmission. Using fourth gear, you can
drive the vehicle to reach a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Risk of injury and accident
If you select gears manually at the transmission, the vehicle can roll away. Only select
gears manually at the transmission with
a stationary vehicle
applied parking brake
ignition lock in position 0
8
9
470
Tools
You cannot change the selected gear

while driving if it was selected manually.
The required tools can be found in vehicle

tool kit pocket ( page 431).
Depending on vehicle type and equipment, it may be necessary to tilt the

cab in order to reach the shift and selector levers.
Tilt the cab ( page 453).
Gear
Tool
3, 4
Open-ended spanner 34 mm
across flats or adjustable pliers
Second open-ended spanner

34 mm across flats or second
pair of adjustable pliers
Practical advice
Transmission
To select 3rd or 4th gear
Move the shift lever into position 4 to

select 3rd gear.
Move the shift lever into position 6 to

select 4th gear.
The gear is selected when the selector

shaft can be felt to engage in the corresponding position.
3
4
Shift lever on right of transmission

Selector lever on left of transmission
Turn key in the ignition lock to

position 0.
If necessary, tilt the cab ( page 453).
If a gear is selected, move the shift lever on the right of the transmission into
neutral 5.
If 5th to 8th gear was selected, move

the selector lever on the left of the
transmission to the front, to position
2.
6
7
8
9
471
Practical advice
Transmission
1 To engage reverse gear

i
A second person is required to select
2
2nd person:
Move shift lever 1 on the right of the
transmission to the rear to position 4.
The gear is selected when the shift lever can be felt to engage in position 4.
reverse gear.
3
Pulling away
4
Shift lever on right of transmission
If a gear is selected, move the shift lever on

the right of the transmission into neutral
5.
5
6
When you stop the vehicle, you must

hold the clutch pedal depressed with
your foot.
1st person:
Selector lever on left of transmission
7 Turn key in the ignition lock to

position 0.
You cannot change the selected gear

while driving.

If necessary, tilt the cab ( page 453).
472
Push the selector lever on the left of

the transmission forwards 1 to the
stop and hold it there.

Start the engine.
Practical advice
Transmission
Transmission control back-up mode

Using the transmission control back-up
mode you can
select 2nd, 5th, reverse gear or neutral
( page 474)
shift the transmission into towing
mode if the vehicle has to be towed
( page 473).
In the back-up function, the gears are
changed with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You are guided
through displays from the driver information system in the multi-function display
via the control unit ( page 475 + 476).
i
The GS back-up function can also be
activated when no fault is present in
the transmission control. You may familiarise yourself with the transmission
control (GS) back-up function so that
you can react quickly in an emergency
situation.
GS back-up function menu
With the vehicle stationary and the

parking brake applied, press the
or button on the multi-function
steering wheel until Settings appears
highlight is positioned on Configuration.
multi-function steering wheel until
Enable transmission control back-up
mode appears in the multi-function dis-
play.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
In order to activate the back-up function

you must enable the GS back-up function
menu ( page 474).
8
9
473
Practical advice
Transmission
1 To enable
2
3
Activate GS back-up function
The GS back-up function is now activated. The driver information system displays Please select gear in the multifunction display.
The highlight is positioned at ON.

multi-function steering wheel to confirm the setting and go to next menu.
4 To lock
5

The highlight is positioned on OFF.

multi-function steering wheel to confirm the setting and go to next menu.
7
8
9
474

With the vehicle stationary and the

parking brake applied, press the
or button on the multi-function
steering wheel until Transmission control back-up mode appears in the multi-function display.
Practical advice
Transmission
i
When the GS back-up function is activated, the GS back-up function menu is
permanently displayed in the multifunction display. The transmission
electronics monitor the driving operations and give you instructions, or
prompt you to confirm certain actions.
Telligent gearshift
Pulling away
Please apply clutch appears in the

1
2

is positioned on YES.
!
If you do not observe the instructions in
the multi-function display, transmission damage may result.

Activate back-up function

( page 474).
Please select gear.

highlight is positioned on the gear desired.
The transmission control selects the

chosen gear.
3
4
5

Driving in emergency running mode

restricted gear selection only possible.
8
9
475
Practical advice
Transmission
1 To stop the vehicle or change gear
Select neutral or a new gear using the

or button.

To pull away

Transmission control selects neutral or

the gear chosen.
4
5 Depress the clutch pedal.
6
7
Brake the vehicle to a standstill by applying the foot brake.

Please select gear.
8
9
476
Activate back-up function.

Please select gear.
Practical advice
Transmission
highlight is positioned on the gear desired.
To stop the vehicle or change gear

Select neutral or a new gear using the

or button.

The transmission control selects neutral or the gear chosen.
The transmission control selects the

chosen gear.
To deactivate the GS back-up function
Stop the vehicle.
Driving in transmission control

back-up mode manual gear selection
only possible for N.
Depress the accelerator pedal slowly.

The vehicle will start moving.
Brake vehicle to a standstill by applying

the foot brake.
Please select gear.
Press the or button on

The driver information system goes to
next menu. Transmission control terminates the GS back-up function.
Lock GS back-up function menu
( page 474).
5
6
7
8
9
477
Practical advice
Transmission
1
2
3
Teach-in procedure
Vehicles with Telligent gearshift or
Telligent automatic gearshift:
The short/long teach-in procedure is necessary to teach-in vehicle-specific data
into the automatic transmission control
(GS) electronics system.
If the teach-in procedure is interrupted,

the splitter group indicators will stop
flashing and an event message appears
Short teach-in procedure

The short teach-in procedure is required if
the sensors on the transmission or clutch
have been replaced.
If transmission control (GS) interrupts

the teach-in procedure, turn key in the
ignition lock to position 0.
To program the transmission control

(GS)
The lights in the gear display go out.
Wait at least five seconds before repeating the teach-in procedure.
Turn key in the ignition lock to

position 0.
The charge pressure in the auxiliary

consumer compressed-air circuit must
be sufficient. The multi-function display
must not be showing "Charge pressure,
auxiliary consumer" .
6
7
During the whole teach-in procedure,

the indicators for the high f and
the low splitter group g flash alternately in the gears display.
8
9
478

gearshift: the clutch control (KS) automatically disengages and engages during the teach-in procedure.
Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep

it depressed.
Press the neutral button on gear lever
and hold it pressed.
Practical advice
Transmission
Turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 2.
The warning buzzer and a shift noise
sound in the central loudspeaker. The
indicators for the fast f and the
slow splitter group g flash alternately in the gears display.
sound in the central loudspeaker.
If neutral N appears in the gears display, release the clutch pedal.
Long teach-in procedure:
When the warning buzzer sounds, you

must push down or release the clutch
pedal within three seconds.
The long teach-in procedure is required if:

the GS control unit or the engine has
been replaced
You must hold the neutral button on

gearshift pressed down for the whole
period of the teach-in procedure.
the multi-function display shows an

event message with error code
"a 21011".

event message again after the short
teach-in procedure, carry out the long
teach-in procedure.
After the display has appeared, turn

key fully back in the ignition lock and
then after a further approximately five
seconds, turn it back to the drive position.
The multi-function display shows an
event message with error code
"a 28093".
4
5
6
7
Release the neutral button on the gear

lever.
8
9
479
Practical advice
Transmission
1 Programming the transmission control

(GS)
2
3
4
5
i
Construction site vehicles with
Telligent gearshift:
When you carry out the long teach-in
procedure, the transmission control
deletes the function for construction
site mode ( page 229). A MercedesBenz Service Centre can reactivate
construction site mode again.
6 Turn the key in the ignition lock to

position 0.
7 Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep

it depressed.
Press the neutral button and the function button on the gear lever and hold
pressed down.
480

position 2.
sound in the central loudspeaker. The
indicators for the high f and the
low splitter group g flash alternately in the gears display.

When N flashes in the gear display, start

the engine.
When neutral N appears in the gear display, the teach-in procedure is complete.

Release the clutch pedal, neutral button and function button.
Practical advice
Transmission
i
When the warning buzzer sounds, you
must depress or release the clutch
pedal within three seconds.
You must hold the neutral button on
the gear lever pressed for the whole of
the teach-in procedure.
If the event messages are not deleted
after the teach-in procedure, activate
the GS back-up process ( page 474).
Have the transmission examined.

Emergency gearshift (NMV)

If the drive should fail, a rigid power transmission link can be established in the power take-off.
2
3
4
5
6
Power take-off (NMV)
1 Retainer
2 Slotted nut
3 Tapped holes for retainer
7
8
9
481
Practical advice
Transmission
1
2
3
4
When the engine is running, the power takeoff shaft turns as soon as the connection is
established. The rotating shaft can cause
serious injury. Operate the emergency gear
shift for the transmission-independent
power take-off only with vehicle stationary,
the parking brake applied and the engine
switched off.
5
6
7
8
9
482
Unscrew retainer 1.
Unscrew slotted nut 2 to the stop, approximately 4 turns.
i
If the slotted nut is hard to move, turn
the drive shaft slightly.
Secure the slotted nut with the retainer
by turning the retainer round and
screwing it onto a suitable thread.
After repairing the drive, disconnect

the rigid power transmission link again.
workshop.
Practical advice
Brake system
Brake system
Releasing the spring-loaded parking
brake if there is a failure of charge
pressure
To release the spring-loaded brake

mechanically
In an emergency or in the workshop it is

possible to release the spring-loaded parking brake mechanically or pneumatically.
Before the vehicle is returned to service, the

proper operation of the spring-loaded parking brake must be restored.
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling

away.
Do not use a impact drive to unscrew

the spring-loaded brake release bolts.
Maximum release torque of the springloaded brake release bolt is 70 Nm.
2
3
To restore the spring-loaded parking

brake to operational condition
When the spring-loaded parking brake is released, the vehicle can roll away unexpectedly.
Spring-loaded brake release bolt (example)
1 Braked position
2 Released position
Slacken the release bolts to the stop
(released position).
Charge the brake circuit until the cutoff

pressure is reached.
Move the parking brake valve lever to

the release position ( page 52).
Tighten the release bolts fully (braking

position).
Tightening torque min. 25 Nm,
max. 45 Nm.
6
7
8
9
483
Practical advice
Brake system
1 Arrangement of spring-loaded brake cylinders:
2
3
4
5
6
To release the spring-loaded brake

using tyre pressure of spare wheel
Front axle Rear axle
4x2, 4x4
x1
A minimum air pressure of 8.5 bar is required in spare wheel.
6x2
6x2/2
6x2/4
6x4, 6x6
8x4/4, 8x6/ 4,
8x8/4
Vehicle
1 Optional extra
7
8
9
484
Connect tyre inflator hose to the test

connection and push connector on to
the tyre inflation valve.
Uncouple compressed-air lines to the

trailer or semitrailer ( page 377).
When the release indicator lamp for the

parking brake ! goes out, the
spring-loaded cylinders are completely
released.
Move the lever of the parking brake

valve to release position ( page 52)
and turn key in the ignition lock to
position 2.
Comply precisely with the manufacturer's operating instructions when releasing the brake on the trailer or
semitrailer.
Remove the dust caps from the test

connection of the trailer brake circuit
reservoir and from the tyre inflator
valve on the spare wheel.
Practical advice
Brake system
Releasing the spring-loaded

brake with an external source of
compressed air
Release is possible via:
the front coupling head
the tyre inflator connection
the spare wheel
Only charge the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection in
an emergency.
As far as possible do not charge the

compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection. The compressed air
is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pressure protection is not provided via the
pressure regulator.
To release the spring-loaded brake using compressed-air from the spare

wheel requires a minimum pressure of
8.5 bar.
1
2
3
4
the test connection on reservoir of

trailer brake circuit.
5
6
7
8
9
485
Practical advice
Compressed-air system
If the shut-off pressure of the external

compressed-air source lies below 10 bar,
dump the compressed air on the vehicle to
be towed until the pressure is below
10 bar. This can be done, for example, by
repeated operation of service brake on the
vehicle that is receiving the pressure.

system via the front coupling head
With the engine stopped, it is possible to
2 charge the compressed-air system via the

3
front coupling head. The coupling head is

located behind the cover in the bumper
and is marked red.
4
1 Coupling head (example)
5
6
7
8
9
486
After the compressed-air system has

been charged, the charge pressure
available in the individual compressedair circuits is limited when engine is not
running.
Practical advice
Charging the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection
i
Only charge the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection in
an emergency.

pressure regulator.
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 Tyre inflator connection
8
9
487
Practical advice
1
2
3

from an external compressed-air
source
i
It is possible to charge the pneumatic
suspension reservoir from an external
compressed-air source.
4 Before charging the pneumatic suspen5
sion reservoir, turn the key in the ignition to position 2.

Charging is possible via:
6 the tyre inflator connection

( page 487) or the front coupling
head ( page 486)
the pneumatic suspension "Charge"

connection
8
9
488
i
reservoir via the pneumatic suspension
"Charge" connection or the front coupling head requires a minimum pressure of 10.5 bar.
reservoir via the pneumatic suspension
"Charge" connection requires a minimum pressure of 7 bar.
Compressed-air drier (example)

2 Pneumatic suspension "Charge" connection
!
After the compressed-air system has
been charged through the front coupling head, the charge pressure available in the individual compressed-air
circuits is limited when engine is not
running.
Practical advice
Trailing axle
Trailing axle
Trailing axle, pneumatic
It is not possible to raise the trailing axle
when vehicle is unladen or partially laden if
there is insufficient charge pressure available.
Run the engine until pressure regulator
cuts out.
Nummek trailing axle, hydraulic

It is not possible to raise the Nummek trailing axle when vehicle is unladen or partially
laden if:
the hydraulic pump of the Nummek

trailing axle is faulty
the fuse of the hydraulic pump motor

on the Nummek trailing axle has blown
( page 525)
there is Insufficient oil in the hydraulic

system of the Nummek trailing axle
5
6
7
8
9
489
Practical advice
1 To prevent faults from occurring in the

2
Risk of accident
Adopt appropriate driving technique and

have steering system repaired immediately.
workshop.

3 carried out by an authorised specialist
4 DaimlerChrysler recommends that you vis5

6
steering system have maintenance work

carried out on the steering system in accordance with the maintenance instructions.
it a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it

7
8
9
490
If the power steering assistance should fail,

the vehicle will be very difficult to steer.

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres
Spare wheel under chassis
Spare wheel location

Risk of injury
Take off the wheel cover.
Operate winch until cable is lightly tensioned.
When you release the spare wheel, the centre of gravity can easily change due to the
heavy weight of the wheel, causing the
wheel to fall or tip over and injuring you or
other persons.
Using the winch, let down or take out the
spare wheel.
To remove the spare wheel
Loosen the nuts on the securing bolts.

Lower the spare wheel and its crossmember with the winch, allowing the
cable to pay out fully.
Spare wheel under chassis
1 Hand crank
2 Securing nuts
Pull the spare wheel out to the side or

to the rear.
Unscrew the spare wheel from the
spare wheel cross member.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
491
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Spare wheel under tipper body
Risk of accident
Before removing the spare wheel from beneath the tipper body, observe body manufacturer's operating instructions.
3
4
Spacer
i
Secure spare wheel with tyre size
385/65 R 22.5 and

425/65 R 22.5
only in conjunction with spacer from

vehicle tool kit pocket.
8
9
492
1 Tipper body support (example)

Raise tipper body and fit support
( page 385).
Remove the spare wheel from beneath
the tipper body.
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Spare wheel at side of chassis
Semitrailer tractor vehicles
1 Securing nuts
2 Wheel cover
i
Clean securing nuts and securing bolts
of rust/dirt and spray with rust release
fluid.
For semitrailer tractor vehicles with

side panelling: remove side panelling.
Unscrew and remove the retaining

nuts.
For vehicles with underride guard: Remove underride guard.
Lower spare wheel with winch, completely unwinding the line.
Remove wheel cover 2.
Pull spare wheel out to the side.
Assemble hand crank with pump lever

from the vehicle's tool kit,
( page 433).
Remove the retaining plate through the

centre hole of wheel rim.
3
4
Place pump lever with hand crank on

the winch so that locking sleeve on
winch engages in the cutouts on pump
lever.
Operate winch until cable is lightly tensioned.
Clean securing nuts and securing bolts

of rust/dirt and spray with rust release
fluid.
7
8
9
493
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
1
2
Changing a wheel
Information on vehicle tools and emergency equipment ( page 430).
Risk of accident
Where an unapproved tyre size is used, the

braking behaviour of vehicles equipped with
Telligent brake system can change.
The Telligent brake system, tachograph
and speedometer must be re-calibrated if a
tyre of a different size is fitted.

5
6
7
8
9
494

Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
i
When changing a wheel note the following carefully:
Use only the tyre and wheel sizes
approved for your vehicle type.
Please also observe particularly the
specific national approval regulations for tyres. These regulations
stipulate under certain conditions a
particular type of tyre for your vehicle or forbid the use of particular
types of tyre.
Please observe also the required
tyre load capacity and tyre speed
index for your vehicle. Please obtain the information from the vehicle certificate.
Special rims and wheel nuts are required for conversion of the vehicle
from steel wheel rims to light-alloy
rims. Information is available from
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Different wheel nuts are required
on the front and rear axles for securing wheels light-alloy wheels. Do
not interchange wheel nuts when
fitting the wheels. Never use wheel
nuts intended for pressed-steel
wheels.
Check tyre pressures. Observe the
tyre pressure table ( page 579).
Do not change the tyres' direction
of rotation.
If the tractor vehicle and trailer/

semitrailer are equipped with different pressed-steel wheels (hub centring and centring with spherical
spring washers):
carry a spare wheel for centring
with spherical spring washers. It is
possible to use this wheel for both
types of wheel centring until next
opportunity for repair is reached.
Use the wheel nuts for a wheel with
hub centring. Use tightening torques as for wheels with hub centring.
Do not damage threads of attachment studs when changing a wheel.
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
495
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling

away.
Assemble the pump lever

( page 433).
Positioning of vehicle jack
4
Wheel nuts for light-alloy rims
5 1 Wheel nuts with pressure plate

2 Wheel nut with spherical spring washer
Wheel nuts for light-alloy rims
1 Single tyre
2 Twin tyres

position 0.

this prevents re-adjustment of chassis
height.
8
9
496
The vehicle's jack is intended only to raise

the vehicle for a short time. The vehicle
must be secured by axle stands of sufficient
loadbearing capacity, if work is being carried
out beneath it.
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
!
Front axle with steel springs
All-wheel-drive front axle
Position vehicle jack only at the attachment points provided, never locate jack
under the differential housing.
Do not raise vehicles with a loading

crane or loading tailgate, using the hydraulic supports. Damage would be
caused to the chassis.
3
4
Jacking point
Jacking point
Locate vehicle jack under the spring

support, directly in front of the front
axle member.
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup on the axle support frame.
6
7
If the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden

underlay (from vehicle tool kit) and tilt
the cab forwards ( page 453).
8
9
497
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
1 Air-sprung front axle
Air-sprung, steered leading axle

(8x4/4)
2
3
4
5
Jacking point
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup of the air spring support, directly in front of the front axle member.
7
8
i
underlay (from vehicle tool kit) and tilt
the cab forwards, ( page 453).
498
Location point of jack
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup, directly in front of the front
axle member.
i
underlay (from vehicle tool kit).
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Rear axle with steel springs
Air-sprung rear axle
Nummek trailing axle
1
2
3
4
Jacking point
Jacking point
Jacking point
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup on the axle support tube.
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup on the air spring support.
Locate the jack under axle swing arm.
5
6
i
Position the support plate on the jack
such that the axle arm lies in the recess
of the support plate.
7
8
9
499
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
1 Hendrickson leading axle (6x2/2)
Hydraulically steered trailing axle
Risk of injury
Jacking point
Jacking point
Locate the vehicle jack under the

spring mounting support plate.
Locate the jack under the axle carrier.
i
7
When you release the wheel, the centre of

gravity can easily change due to the heavy
weight of the wheel, causing wheel to fall or
tip over and injuring you or other persons.
Carefully remove the wheel.
To remove a wheel
Position the support plate on the jack

such that the spring mounting lies in
the recess of the support plate.
8
9
500
i
Set the jack in such a way that the support plate sits under the middle of the
axle carrier.
Unscrew and remove the caps from the

wheel nuts using the wheelbrace.
Loosen all wheel nuts and remove all
but three evenly distributed wheel
nuts.
Remove the last three wheel nuts when
it is clear that the wheel is sitting on the
wheel stud under no stress.
Remove the wheel.
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
To fit a wheel
Twin tyres with light-alloy wheels:

Before fitting the inner wheel, place the
fitting sleeve (from vehicle tool kit) on
the wheel bolt.
Place the wheels in position and screw
on two or three wheel nuts finger-tight.
Remove the assembly sleeve.
Assembly sleeve
Clean rust and dirt from locating surfaces of the wheel hub, wheel rim and
wheel nuts.
On wheel nuts with a pressure plate,
lightly oil the friction contact surfaces
between the pressure plate and the
wheel nut.
Screw on the remaining wheel nuts and

tighten them in a crosswise pattern.
Observe correct tightening torque
( page 577).
Rims with hub centring:
Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pattern. Observe correct tightening torque

( page 577).
1
2
!
Ensure correct centering. The wheel
bolts must located centrally in the
holes of the wheel.
3
4
Rims with centring by spherical spring

washers and wheel studs:
Replace wheel and screw on two or
three wheel nuts with spherical spring
washers finger-tight.
Place wheel in position and screw on all

wheel nuts.
7
8
9
501
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
Ensure correct centering. The wheel

bolts must located centrally in the
holes of the wheel.
Screw on remaining wheel nuts with

spherical spring washers.
Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pattern. Observe correct tightening torque

( page 577).
Tyre inflator connection

The tyre inflator connection is on the front
of the compressed-air drier and has an integral pressure regulator.
!
Only use the tyre inflator connection
for inflating tyres.
pressure regulator.
Risk of injury
Compressed-air drier (example)
If you inflate tyres to an excessive pressure

they can explode.
In order to inflate tyres, reduce charge pressure in the compressed-air system to approximately 6 bar.
Do not exceed a maximum tyre inflation
pressure of 10 bar. The tyres can explode.
8
9
502
Practical advice
Wheels and tyres
To inflate tyres with the tyre inflation
connection
Reduce the charge pressure in the

compressed-air system to the required
value given in the tyre pressure table,
e.g. 6 bar.
2
3
This can be done, for example, by repeated operation of service brake.
Remove protective cap 1.

Connect the tyre inflator hose (vehicle
tool kit).
Inflate the tyre.
Observe tyre pressure table

( page 579).
7
8
9
503
Practical advice
Electrical system
Electrical system
1
2
Replacing bulbs
Lamps and lights are essential components of vehicle safety. Therefore, ensure
that all lamps are functioning at all times.
Risk of injury
Bulbs can be very hot. Therefore, before replacing, switch off and allow to cool. There is
a risk of burning.
Do not use a lamp which has been dropped

or whose glass bulb shows scratches. The
lamp can explode.
Do not hold the glass bulb with bare hands.
If necessary, clean the glass bulb with alcohol or spirit and wipe with a lint-free cloth.
Only operate lamps at correct rated voltage.
H1, H3 and H7 bulbs operate at high pressure and high temperature. There is a risk of
burning and explosion.
Only operate bulbs in closed lamps constructed for that purpose. Only use replacement lamps of same type.
Store lamps and bulbs out of reach of children.
8
9
504
Protect lamps from moisture when in use

and do not allow them to come into contact
with liquids.
Safety glasses and non-slip gloves must be
worn while replacing bulbs to prevent injuries.
Xenon lamps operate at high voltage, high

pressure and high temperature. There is
a risk of fatal injury if live parts of the lamp
and circuit equipment are touched. If the
headlamp is damaged, do not touch the
xenon lamp. Do not replace xenon lamps
yourself, but have them replaced by an authorised specialist workshop.
tools for the work required. For safety relevant work and work on safety relevant systems in particular, it is essential that
maintenance work is carried out at a specialist workshop.
Practical advice
Electrical system
Replacing a lamp
To prevent a short circuit, switch off
lighting before replacing lamps.
Use only 24 Volt lamps of same type
and of same wattage.
Do not work with oily or moist hands.
Hold lamps with a clean, lint-free cloth
only.
Check contacts for corrosion and clean
if necessary.
Check that all seals are sitting correctly. Replace damaged housing seals.
If the new lamp still does not function after

replacement, have the lighting examined in
an authorised specialist workshop.
i
Have the headlamp setting regularly
checked.
Overview of lamps
Exterior lighting
Main headlamps
Main-beam headlamps
H1 24 V 70W
Dipped-beam headlamps H7 24 V 70W

Turn signal lamp, front
PY 21W
Side lamp/parking lamp W 5W 24 V
Turn signal/
perimeter, front side
P 21/5W
Front foglamp
(additional headlamp)
H3 24 V 70W
Perimeter, roof front
C 5W
6
7
8
9
505
Practical advice
Electrical system
Interior lighting
Rear lamps
P 21W
Entry door trim lamp
Turn signal and brake

lamp, reversing lamp,
rear foglamp
R 10W
Perimeter, side marker,

rear lamp and licence
plate lamp
R Cab roof/ceiling
lamp
Side marker lamp
LED lighting
Rotating signal lights
45W 24 V
MEGASPACE entry access step lamp
R 5W
7
8
9
506
10 W festoon
lamp
Interior lighting
P 18W
Reading lamp
R 10W
Nightlight
W 1.5W
Reading lamp, sleeping 10W festoon

berths
lamp
Swivelling reading
lamp, reclining seat
Ambient lighting (blue)
5W halogen
Roofspace/footwell trim 60 150

mcd@20 mA
Compartment above
windscreen
765 1,575
mcd@20mA
Exterior stowage compartment lamp
5W festoon
lamp
i
Always carry a selection of spare bulbs
in the vehicle for use in an emergency.
Practical advice
Electrical system
Main-beam/dipped-beam headlamps
Headlamps, front turn signal lamps
Unscrew headlamp fixing screws 1.

Swing out the headlamp.
Pull off the cable connector.

Disengage the cover and remove.
Pull cable connector from the bulb.
Rear of headlamp (example)

Headlamp (example)
1 Headlamp retaining screws

2 Front foglamps
3 Turn signal lamps

4 Dipped-beam headlamps
6 Side lamps
Detach retainer spring and take out the

bulb.
Re-assemble the lamp in the reverse

order.
Insert new bulb into the holder so that

base plate locates in the cutout.
6
7
8
9
507
Practical advice
Electrical system
1 Turn signal lamp

2 Swing out the headlamp.

3 Disengage and remove the cover.
Turn the lock of the bulb holder for turn

signal lamp 3 to left and remove.
Side lamp/parking lamp
Press the bulb down, turn it to the left

and withdraw it.
Swing out the headlamp.
Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.

Disengage and remove the cover.
Remove side lamps bulb holder 6.
Withdraw the capless bulb. Replace
bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.
4
5
6
7
8
9
508
Practical advice
Electrical system
Side turn signal lamp, perimeter lamp
Press bulb holder 2 down, turn it to

the left and remove it.
and remove it.
Foglamp
Remove the housing cover.
Disconnect cable connector 1.

Detach retainer spring and take out the
bulb.
Re-assemble the lamp in reverse order.
Insert new bulb into the holder so that
base plate locates in the cutout 2.
2
3
4
1 Fixing screw
2 Lampholder for turn signal/perimeter
lamp
Unscrew fixing screw 1 and remove

complete lamp unit.
7
1 Cable connector
2 Cut-out
8
9
509
Practical advice
Electrical system
1 Rear lamps
Rear lamps
Unscrew fixing screws 1.
Remove the lamp lens.

and withdraw it.
To replace licence plate bulb, withdraw

the reflector unit.
4
5
6
7
8
Replace the bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.

Rear lamps, left
1 Fixing screws
2 Perimeter lamp/side marker lamp
3 Turn signal lamps
4 Brake lamp
5 Rear lamp
6 Reversing lamp
7 Rear foglamp
8 Licence plate lamp
510
Rear lamps, right
Practical advice
Electrical system
Front perimeter lamp
Side marker lamps
Press retainers 1 on the cable connector together and hold in this position.
Semitrailer tractor vehicle:
Pull off cable connector 2.
swing side panel out before changing

side marker lamp in the side trim.
Unlock and remove side marker lamp.
2
3
i
If the LED is defective, the complete
side marker lamp must be replaced.
1 Securing bolts
2 Festoon bulb
Remove the lamp lens.
Refit both screws and tighten.
4
5
Unscrew fixing screws 1.

Replace festoon bulb 2 and re-assemble in reverse order.
1 Cable connector
2 Side marker lamp
8
9
511
Practical advice
Electrical system
1 Entry access step lamp
Lever off lamp lens 1 with a screwdriver.

Pull off cable connector 2.
Press bulb holder 3 down, turn it to

the left and withdraw it.

and withdraw it.
5
6
Entry door trim lamp
Entry lamp (example)
1 Lamp lens/cover frame

2 Cable connector
3 Bulb holder
1 Lens
2 Reflector
7
8
9
512
Practical advice
Electrical system
Lever off lamp lens 1 with a screwdriver.
Interior ceiling lamp
Lever off lamp lens with a screwdriver.

Press down interior lamp 1 or reading
lamp 3, turn to left and withdraw.
Pull off cable connector and withdraw

reflector 2.
Nightlight 2: Pull off green cover and

withdraw the plug-in cap lamp.
Press the festoon bulb towards left and

withdraw.
Replace lamp and re-assemble in reverse order.
The lamp lens must audibly engage

when it is replaced.
The lamp lens must audibly engage

when it is replaced.
1 Interior lighting
2 Nightlight
3 Reading lamp
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
513
Practical advice
Electrical system
Exterior stowage compartment lighting
1 Reading lamp, berth

2
3
4
5 Lever out lamp lens from the pivot
hinge (arrow) with a screwdriver.
Press the festoon bulb towards left and

withdraw.
Replace bulb and re-assemble the lamp

lens.
8
9
514
Fold out the reading lamp.

Release lamp lens with a screwdriver
and remove.
Press the bulb upwards, turn it to the
left and withdraw it.
Replace bulb and re-assemble the lamp
lens.
Lever lamp lens out of the mounting at

the back.
Press the festoon bulb downwards and
withdraw.
Replace the festoon bulb and reassemble the lamp lens.
Practical advice
Electrical system
Adjustable reading lamp
Headlamp setting
Correct headlamp adjustment is of great
importance for road safety. Therefore, regularly check settings with a headlamp setting device (observe manufacturer's
operating instructions).
Observe correct basic headlamp beam settings, see type plate ( page 552).
Before adjusting:
Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface.

The headlamp beam adjuster must be
at a right angle to the vehicle.
Correct tyre pressures.
Set headlamp range control to the basic setting.
2
3
Switch on headlamps.
4
5
Turn the switch cover to position .
unladen (ready for use filled with fuel)

and
Check each headlamp separately.

Cover the headlamp not being
checked, and the additional lamps.
Push bulb rearwards towards bulb

holder and remove.
have one driver on board or a load of

75 kg
For how to check and adjust headlamp setting ( page 516).
In order to check headlamp setting, the vehicle must be

1 Reading lamp
!
Air-sprung vehicles: a pressure of at
least 10.5 bar must be present in the
compressed-air system.
7
8
9
515
Practical advice
Electrical system
1 To check and adjust headlamp setting

2
Lateral adjustment
Turn adjusting screw 3 until lateral

setting is correct.
Vertical adjustment:
The dipped-beam's light-dark boundary

at a distance of 10 metres is determined by measuring headlamp height
(centre of headlamp to ground) and deducting the stated basic headlamp setting.
If no lateral correction is necessary
Basic headlamp setting:
adjust height using adjusting screw 2.
1%
Then correct the height setting using

adjusting screw 2.
3
4
5 1 Securing bolts
6
2 Inner adjusting screw (vertical adjustment)

3 Outer adjusting screw (lateral adjustment)
7
8
9
516
= 10 cm
1.5% = 15 cm
2%
= 20 cm etc.
Practical advice
Electrical system
Partially masking headlamps

driving on left/right
The headlamps are designed so that they
illuminate the edge of the carriageway for
a particularly long distance.
The beam is asymmetrical.
If vehicle is driven in countries where traffic drives on opposite side of the road to
that of country where vehicle was approved, the beam falls not on the edge of
the carriageway, but onto the opposite carriageway.
This will dazzle road users travelling in the
opposite direction.
Risk of accident
In countries where vehicles drive on the opposite side of the road to that of the country
where vehicle was approved, there is a risk
of dazzling from the asymmetrical dipped
beam.
To prevent dazzling of oncoming traffic, cover over headlamps with adhesive tape, following the details issued by Mercedes-Benz.
The area of the headlamp lens to be covered may be seen in the relevant illustration below for the vehicle.
Prepare adhesive tape using commercially approved opaque adhesive tape

in accordance with the dimensions,
apply to corresponding area of the
headlamp.
1
2
Comply with national legislation when

vehicle is operated in other countries
and when used for international transport work.
The responsibility for vehicle lighting always rests with the driver.
5
6
7
8
9
517
Practical advice
Electrical system
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Self-produced adhesive strips for left-hand
drive vehicles
518
Practical advice
Electrical system
Left-hand-drive vehicles
1 H7 headlamp, right:
covered area for use in countries where
vehicles drive on left
2 H7 headlamp, left:
3 Xenon headlamp, right:
4 Xenon headlamp, left:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
519
Practical advice
Electrical system
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Self-produced adhesive strips for righthand drive vehicles
520
Practical advice
Electrical system
Right-hand-drive vehicles
5 H7 headlamp, right:
vehicles drive on right.
6 H7 headlamp, left:
7 Xenon headlamp, right:
8 Xenon headlamp, left:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
521
Practical advice
Electrical system
1
2
Fuses
The fuse box is in the electrical equipment
compartment on co-driver's side.
To open the electrical compartment

Fold back floor covering in the direction of the arrow.
Unlock fasteners 1 by lifting up.
Remove lid from the electrical compartment.
Risk of fire
Use only fuses with the specified ampere

rating. Do not fit fuses with higher ampere
rating. This would result in damage to the
electrical system or even burnt-out cables.
Do not re-wire fuses or bridge them out.
To close the electrical compartment
Insert lid of the electrical compartment

in lower guide slot and close.
5
6
Engage fasteners 1 and lock by folding down.

1 Fuse box fastener
7
8
9
522
Fold down floor covering.
Do not replace a fuse until the reason for the

fault has been traced and rectified.
!
Before replacing a fuse, switch off all
electrical consumers and disconnect
the batteries' negative () terminals.
Practical advice
Electrical system
To check/replace fuses
The individual electrical circuits are protected by safety fuses or a circuit breaker.
A faulty fuse can also be identified by

the burnt out fuse wire.
If an electrical circuit failure occurs,

switch off electrical consumers and
check the fuses.
Pull fuse out of its module with the
safety fuse extractor provided, and insert it into the test socket.
If the LED lights up, the fuse is in working order.
If the LED does not come on, the fuse
has blown or is defective.
1
2
Replacement fuses/fuse extractor

Replacement fuses and fuse extractor are
located in module B in the electrical compartment, see fuse assignment
( page 526).
3
4
1 Fuse extractor
2 LED
3 Test socket
4 Spare fuses
5
6
If necessary, replace the fuse.

Insert the fuse.
7
8
9
523
Practical advice
Electrical system
Circuit breaker
If a circuit breaker has tripped:
If a fuse blows repeatedly, have the

cause of fault rectified in an authorised
If a circuit breaker trips repeatedly,

have the cause of the fault rectified in
an authorised specialist workshop.
3
4
5
Rectify the cause of tripping and reset

the circuit breaker back on.


6
Circuit breaker
1 On
2 Tripped
3 To trip
7
8
9
524
Practical advice
Electrical system
The fuse for the hydraulic pump motor

(5 amp safety fuse) is located in the hydraulics box on the left of the chassis.
2
3
4
1 Fuse (hydraulic pump motor)
5
6
7
8
9
525
Practical advice
Electrical system
1 Allocation of fuses, diodes, relays

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
526
Practical advice
Electrical system
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
F1
20
Driver's door
30
F2
20
Other I-CAN subscriber
30
F3
20
Co-driver's door
Fuse
Base module A
30
F4
15
Transmission control, Telligent gearshift
30
F5
20
Trailer
30
F6
10
Switch panel
30
F7
30
Distribution terminal 30.2
30
F8
30
Distribution body terminal 30.1
30
F9
20
Trailer ABS
30
F10
30
Distribution body terminal 15.2
15
F11
15
30.1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
527
Practical advice
Electrical system
Fuse
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
F12
15
30
F13
10
Auxiliary heating time switch
30
F14
10
Drive control, ignition lock
30
F15
20
Blower
30
F16
10
Interior lighting
30
F17
10
Instrument cluster, tachograph diagnostic socket
30
F18
20
Sliding/tilting sunroof
30
Base module A
2
3
4
5
F19
6
7
15
30
F20
10
15
F21
10
Engine control, alternator
15
F22
10
Trailer ABS
15
F23
15
Brake lamp, body
54
8
9
528
Practical advice
Electrical system
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
F24
15
Permanent+ distribution, body
D+
F25
10
Diagnostic socket
15
F26
30
Distribution terminal 15
15
F27
10
Blower
15
F28
10
Drive control
Fuse
Base module A
15
F29
10
15
F30
10
Instrument cluster, airbag
15
F31
10
Temperature sensor, audio device
15R
F32
10
Cigarette lighter
15R
4
5
6
7
8
9
529
Practical advice
Electrical system
Fuse
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
F1
15
Battery heating
30
F2
20
Heated windscreen
30
F3
20
Heated windscreen
30
F4
10
Refrigerator
30
F5
10
Sun visor, loading tailgate
15
F6
10
Engine compartment lamp
15
F7
15
Socket 12 V
15
F8
10
Electronic rear axle additional steering
30
F9
10
Electronic rear axle additional steering
15
F10
10
Seat heating, belt checks
15
F11
10
Auxiliary air conditioning, reclining seat
30
F12
10
15
F13
10
Audio device 12 V
30
F14
10
Lane Assist
15
Module A1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
530
Practical advice
Electrical system
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
F1
20
Flame-start system
30
F2
20
Cab tilting pump
30
Fuse
Module A2
F3
10
15
F4
10
Retarder
30
F5
10
30
F6
10
Rotating beacon lamp
30
F7
10
Transfer case oil cooler
30
F8
20
Transfer case oil cooler
30
F9
10
24 V sockets
30
F10
Free
F11
Free
F12
Free
F13
Free
F14
15
Load compartment light
3
4
5
6
7
8
30
Module B
Spare fuse
531
Practical advice
Electrical system
Module location
Designation
Terminal
K1
Trailer, body brake lamps
54
K2
Supply permanent+ signal
:D+
K3
Supply terminal 15.2
15
K4
Supply terminal 15.1
15
K5
Supply terminal 15R
15R
General module A (Relay)
2
3
4
Module A31 (Relay)
5
6
7
8
9
K1
Transfer case oil radiator
K2
Roller tipper/loading tailgate
K3
24 V socket
K4
Telephone fittings
K5
Free
K6
Free
K7
Free
K8
Free
K9
Free
K10
Free
532
15R
Practical advice
Electrical system
Designation
K1
Heated windscreen/belt checks
K2
Heated windscreen/belt checks
K3
Transfer case oil radiator
K4
Battery heating
K5
Free
K6
Free
K7
Free
K8
Free
K9
Free
K10
Free
Module location
Module A32 (Relay)
3
4
5
6
Module D
(Diode withstand voltage)
D1
7
Loading tailgate
8
9
533
Practical advice
1
2

A radio remote control with a flat battery
can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle.
Have the battery replaced by an authorised
3 DaimlerChrysler recommends that you vis4

5
it a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it

When the radio remote control battery

needs to be replaced, an event message appears in the multi-function display.
8
9
534
Risk of poisoning and

explosion
Batteries contain toxic substances. Therefore, keep batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
Batteries can leak or explode if you try to recharge batteries that are not specially designed for re-charging.
Do not dispose of batteries in a fire and do
not try to open them with force or there is a
risk of explosion.
Environmental note
Do not dispose of used batteries with household waste. Take discharged batteries to a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or to an authorised collection point for used batteries.
1 Battery
2 Spring contact
Battery removal
Lever up both sides of the radio remote
control housing halves at key ring location.
Push out old battery 1 from under
spring contact 2 and remove it.
Practical advice
To fit the battery
Insert new battery 1 under the spring
contact with the positive terminal upwards 2 using a lint-free cloth.

mechanically
The drive is located in rear area of the cutout for the sliding/tilting sunroof.
Press both halves of housing together

until they engage.
Remove the 5 DIN 911 Allen key 2

from vehicle document wallet.
Pull the blind to opposite end of cutout

and engage in position ( page 342).
Pull blind further out of roller mechanism (arrow) until opening 1 is visible.
Insert Allen key 2 into the opening

and push upwards.
i
Observe the terminal markings on the
spring contact.
To close
Batteries are obtainable from any specialist workshop or from your

Turn the Allen key clockwise.
5
6
1 Opening
2 Allen key
7
8
9
535
Practical advice
Closing the tilting sunroof

mechanically
The drive is located in rear area of the cut-
2 out for the tilting sunroof. The opening is

closed off with a plug.
3
4
To close
Remove a flat screwdriver (blade width
4 mm) from vehicle tool kit pocket.
Remove plug.
5
6
7
8
9
536
Insert flat screwdriver into the opening

of the drive.
Turn the screwdriver anti-clockwise.
Replace the plug in the opening.
Practical advice
Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
Jump-starting
If the starter batteries are discharged, a
second vehicle can be used to jump-start
the vehicle.
Before starting from a mobile charging

station (batteries with a mains power
stage), pull out the mains plug. Overvoltage can damage electronic components in the vehicle.
Before jump-starting, disconnect

mobile communications systems, e.g.
telephone, radio equipment, fax, etc.,
from the electrical system.
Check and make sure that the vehicles

are not touching each other.
Do not use quick charging devices for

jump-starting.
Make sure that you have easy access

to the batteries ( page 423).
A discharged battery can freeze at a

temperature of 10 C. Do not start
the engine in these circumstances.
First, thaw out the battery.
Jump-start only from batteries with
same operating voltage (12 V/24 V).
Use jump leads with protection against
polarity reversal, insulated terminals
and a cross section of approximately
70 mm.
Risk of explosion and injury
1
2
3
4
There is a risk that batteries may explode

due to build-up of explosive gas. Avoid creating sparks. Do not work with open flames
or smoke in vicinity of the batteries.
Battery acid is caustic.
There is a risk of injury from ejection of

acid spray from batteries if you bend
over them when jump starting the vehicle.
Keep children away from batteries.

Wash off acid spray from skin, eyes or
clothing immediately with clean water. If
necessary seek medical attention.
8
9
537
Practical advice
1
2
3
4
i
Tractor vehicles with integrated batteries at the rear of the vehicle have a
socket for jump-starting on the left side
of the vehicle at fuel tank height. It is
not necessary to uncouple the semitrailer. It is possible to use this external
starting socket for jump-starting.
position 0.
5 Switch off all electrical consumers.

Take off the battery covers.
6 Begin with other vehicle's battery:

7
Connect first the positive terminals,

then the negative terminals with the
jump leads.
Do not swap the connection terminals.
8
9
538
Run the engine of the assisting vehicle

at fast idling speed.
Turn the key in the ignition lock of the
vehicle receiving assistance to position
3. When the engine has started allow it
to run at idling speed.
i
A description of the starting procedures for vehicles fitted with flamestart system can be found on
page 129.
Disconnect the jump leads, first from
the negative terminals, then from the
positive.
!
When the jump leads are detached, the
engine of the vehicle being started
must only be running at idling speed.
Have the battery examined in a

i
Jump leads with protection against polarity reversal can be obtained from any
specialist workshop or from your
Environmental note

used batteries with household waste.
Take empty batteries to a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or to an authorised collection point for used batteries.
Practical advice
Retrofitting the towing coupling

You can have a towing coupling 1 retrofitted to end cross-member 2 of the chassis.
!
In order to prevent damage to tail
cross-member, you must only fit the
towing coupling in conjunction with a
reinforcing plate 3.
Using the towing coupling, you may
only tow or manoeuvre vehicles with a
total weight up to a maximum of
25 tonnes. You must not use the towing coupling for trailer operation or for
vehicle recovery purposes.
Loads in excess of 25 tonnes or trailer

operation will result in damage to the
end cross-member.
Observe the details on the type plate

fitted to the towing coupling.
3
4
Towing coupling (example)
Information is available from any specialist

workshop or your Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
5
6
7
8
9
539
Practical advice
Tow-starting
Vehicles fitted with Telma retarder:
If the engine exceeds the permitted engine speed after the clutch is engaged,
an alarm sounds.
Loads in excess of 25 tonnes or trailer

operation will result in damage to the
end cross-member ( page 539).
The retarder can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. To deactivate the retarder, remove fuse F 4 in module A2 in the
electrical compartment ( page 526).
Do not exceed a towing speed of 12 mph

(20 km/h).
Risk of accident
Vehicles with towing coupling:
2
3
The vehicle is equipped at the front with a
5 coupling jaw to allow manoeuvring or towing with the vehicle or for towing away.
6
7
8
9
540
The charge pressure display for brake circuit 1 and brake circuit 2 must show a
minimum charge pressure of 8 bar.
To prevent damage to the engine

select a higher driving gear or
reduce the towing speed.
Practical advice
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift
Telligent gearshift

position 2.

position 2.

position 2.
Select 4th gear.
Select 5th or 6th gear.
Select 4th gear.
Tow-start the vehicle.

When a speed of approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, release
the clutch pedal and slowly depress the
accelerator.
The gear display shows 4th gear in the

left-hand position.
When a speed of approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, release
the clutch pedal and slowly depress the
accelerator.
The gear display shows 4th gear in the

left-hand position.
2
3

When approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) is reached, depress the accelerator.
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages.
4
5
6
i
If you depress the accelerator slowly,
the Telligent automatic gearshift engages slowly. If you depress the accelerator quickly, the Telligent automatic
gearshift engages quickly.
7
8
9
541
Practical advice
1
2
Towing
Depending on the cause of failure and the
equipment fitted to your vehicle, you must
perform a series of different measures before towing your vehicle.
3
The drive shaft can fall and injure you as

it is being removed. Before removal, secure the drive shaft against falling.
When you start the vehicle moving, the

traction control system (ASR) can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. Switch off ASR before you start to
move the vehicle.
6
7
8
9
542
When the engine is not running

On corners you may deviate from the
carriageway or collide against the towing vehicle. The power steering does not
operate. You must apply a great deal of
force to steer the vehicle. Arrange with
the driver of the towing vehicle a system
of unmistakable communication signals
and adopt suitable driving behaviour.
!
When the engine is not running
and you are towing your vehicle,
there is a risk of damage to the
transmission. Transmission lubrication does not function. Observe the
"Towing vehicles with engine damage" section ( page 544)
the brake system, gear selection
and pneumatic suspension have no
compressed air supply.
Practical advice
When towing the vehicle, run the engine if possible or provide a secure
compressed-air supply from the towing
vehicle.
For short towing distances, you can
charge the compressed-air system via
an external compressed-air source
( page 486).
Vehicles with Telligent stability control:

Switching off
( page 91).
Telligent
Vehicles fitted with Telma retarder:
stability control
i
When towing a vehicle equipped with
Telligent stability control, you must
also switch off the Telligent stability
control.
Risk of accident
The retarder can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. To deactivate the retarder, remove the fuse F 4 in module A2 in the
electrical compartment ( page 526).
2
3
4
If the compressed-air system cannot be

charged, you must mechanically release the spring-loaded parking brake
( page 483).
5
6
7
8
9
543
Practical advice
1 Attaching the towbar
Swing cover 1 of the coupling pin upwards.
Swing cover 2 of the coupling jaw

downwards.
Release coupling pin 3, pivot it forwards through approximately 90 and

lift it out.
Insert the towbar and allow coupling

pin to engage in the lock.
Front coupling jaw
6
7
8
9
544
Towing vehicles with engine damage
i
Four-axle vehicles:
With the drive shaft fitted, the 2nd power steering pump takes over power
steering during the journey.
Practical advice
Towing distance up to 1 km
Towing distance up to 60 miles (100 km)
Risk of transmission damage. When the

engine is not running, transmission lubrication does not function. You may
tow a vehicle with engine damage at a
maximum speed of 5 mph (10 km/h)
and for a maximum distance of
0.5 miles (1 km).

engine is not running, transmission lubrication does not function. You may
tow a vehicle with engine damage and
high range selected at a maximum
speed of 25 mph (50 km/h) and for a
maximum distance of 60 miles
(100 km). You do not need to remove
the driveshaft to the drive axle.
Switch transfer case into the position

for road travel ( page 252).
Vehicles with hydro-pneumatic gearshift

(HPS):
Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/

automatic gearshift:
If the vehicle's electrical power supply
and/or compressed-air supply has
failed, you must remove the driveshaft
before towing the vehicle.
4
5
Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/

automatic gearshift:
If the vehicle's electrical power supply
and/or compressed-air supply has
failed, you must remove the driveshaft
before towing the vehicle.
6
7
Transmission
1 Locking plug
Switch transfer case into the position

for road travel ( page 252).
545
Practical advice


Towing.
!
If the multi-function display shows
Towing not possible remove propeller shaft, you may tow the vehicle at a
4
GP setscrew for high range
5 Unscrew locking plug 1 on transmission above drive shaft.
Remove the GP setscrew from vehicle

document wallet; screw it fully into the
opening and tighten.
Enable GS back-up function menu

( page 473).
Activate GS back-up function
( page 474).
highlight is positioned on Towing.
7
8
9
546
maximum speed of 5 mph (10 km/h)

and for a maximum distance of
0.5 miles (1 km). Failure to comply will
lead to transmission damage. For longer distances or for higher speeds, you
must remove the driveshaft.
Practical advice
Towing distances greater than 60 miles
(100 km)
!
engine is not running, transmission lubrication does not function. If you want
to tow the vehicle further than 60 miles
(100 km) or at a speed higher than
25 mph (40 km/h), you must remove
the driveshafts to the driven axles.
Remove driven axle driveshafts.
To be observed with transmission and

transfer case damage
Remove driven axle driveshafts.
To be observed with front axle damage
i
Towing requirements are the same as
with engine damage.
2
3
When you start the vehicle moving, the traction control (ASR) can produce uncontrolled
braking of the vehicle. Switch off ASR before
you start to move the vehicle.
Raise the front axle.
6
7
8
9
547
Practical advice
1 All-wheel-drive vehicles:
2
3
Remove the propeller shaft between

rear axle and transfer case.

position 2.
Engage the differential lock (transverse

lock).
Set chassis height as required with

control panel ( page 290).
Four-axle vehicles:
4
5
6
To be observed with rear axle damage
Remove both driveshafts.

Do not raise the front axle.
Vehicles with two driven rear axles:
If you raise the front axle of a laden

four-axle vehicle, this will result in damage to chassis. Only raise the front axle
of four-axle vehicles when the vehicle is
in the unladen condition.
Remove driveshafts at both rear axles.
7
8
9
548
Removing driveshafts, rear axle HL 7,

HD 7
Remove the propeller shaft between
front axle and transfer case.
Rear axle HL 7, HD 7
1 Circlip
Practical advice
Unscrew and remove the oil drain plugs
at the planetary hubs.
Catch the oil that runs out in a suitable
container.
Remove the planetary hub end covers.
Rear axle HL 7, HD 7
Re-fit closure cap.
i
If vehicle is to be towed for more than
60 miles (100 km), add oil to the planetary hubs. Use clean oil only.
Pull out the circlips with pliers.
Remove the drive shafts together with

sun gear. For this, use the special tool
or a M 8 x 120 mm bolt.
2 Special tool
5
6
7
8
9
549
Practical advice
1 Removing drive shafts, rear axle HL 6,

position 2.
Engage the differential lock (transverse

lock).
HL 8
Do not raise the front axle.
Unscrew the bolt connections on the

wheel hub.
Remove the drive shaft at the wheel

end.
5
Rear axle HL 6, HL 8
6 1 Bolt connections on the wheel hub

7
8
9
550
Risk of accident
In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle

height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in).
When transporting the vehicle on a low-loader, the maximum permitted vehicle height of
4 metres (13 ft 1 in) must not be exceeded.
Observe carefully the height of bridges and
other structures on the route.
Technical data
Vehicle type plates
Service products and capacities
Operating data 1
Tyre pressure table
Limiting-speed feature
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
551
Technical data
Type plates
Type plates
Vehicle type plate

Information on the type plate
2 Type
Basic headlamp setting
3 Flue gas coefficient
The vehicle type plate is located on the

door frame.
The vehicle identification number is located on the longitudinal member.
The type plate and the vehicle identification number are explained here using an
example.
Rear axle ratio
4 Vehicle identification number (VIN)

5
Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight
Maximum permissible axle loads
6
7
8
9
552
1 Vehicle type plate (example)

2 Vehicle identification number on the
right-hand longitudinal member (example)
Technical data
Type plates
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
WDB
934.032
1
264253
WDB
Vehicle manufacturer
934.032
Vehicle model designation number

1
Steering wheel (1 = left-hand-drive vehicles, 2 = right-hand-drive vehicles)

K
Code letter or code number of manufacturer's works

264253
Vehicle identification end number
Vehicle type designation
5
18 46
18
Maximum gross vehicle weight in metric tonnes

46
Engine power output in bhp (= x 10)
7
8
9
553
Technical data
Type plates
1 Vehicle type plate explanatory notes

2
3
The model designation, vehicle design,

axle version and number of wheels or pairs
of wheels are given on the vehicle type
plate. The meaning of the individual figures
is explained here using the example (model 934.03).
4
5
6
7
Vehicle type plate (example)
934.03
930
4
8x8/4
Model designation
Vehicle design
0 Platform trucks
2 Tippers/concrete mixers
4 Semitrailer tractor vehicle
03 Axle version
00...04
07, 08
11
20, 21
23
22
14/16/24/40
18, 41
30, 31, 42
32
33
8
9
1. Nummek trailing axle
2. Hendrickson leading axle
554
Number of wheels or
pairs of wheels
x8
Number of wheels or
pairs of wheels
/4
4x2
4x4
6x21
6x2
6x2/22
6x2/4
6x4
6x6
8x4/4
8x6/4
8x8/4
Number of steered
wheels
Technical data
Type plates
Engine type plate
2
3
4
1 Engine type plate
2 Engine type
3 Engine number
6
7
8
9
555
Technical data
1 Service products are all products needed

to operate the vehicle such as:
2
3
4
5
Lubricating products (oils and grease)

Brake fluid
Coolant
Service products or special lubricant

additives which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz could result
in damage to the assemblies.
Fuels
Windscreen cleaning fluid
Mercedes-Benz achieves optimum compatibility by ensuring that the service products used in the vehicle conform to the
materials used in the vehicle.
You should only use service products in
6 your vehicle which meet the strict

7
Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will

provide information about Mercedes-Benz
Specifications for Service Products.
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service

Products. Only then is optimum compatibility with the vehicle guaranteed.
i
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to restrict your warranty rights if service
products or special lubricant additives
which have not been approved are
used.
Risk of injury
Service products constitute a health hazard.

Always wear appropriate protective
clothing and a breathing mask when
handling service products.
If possible, avoid inhaling vapours.
Do not allow service products to come
into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Clean affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Change out of soiled
clothing without delay.
If the service products come into contact with the eyes, wash them thoroughly with clean water and consult a doctor
if necessary.
If any service product is swallowed, a
doctor should be consulted immediately.
Service products are highly flammable. For
this reason, avoid fire and naked flames and
refrain from smoking when handling service
products.
Keep service products away from children.
556
Technical data
Environmental note
Unless they are handled properly, service

products can damage people's health and
the environment.
Do not allow service products to enter
the ground
the sewage system
surface water.
Further notes on
handling different service products
storage
disposal
are available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Engine oils
Only use engine oils complying with Sheet

No. 228.5 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products. These engine
oils have a high standard of quality and
have favourable effects on
engine wear
fuel consumption
3
4
exhaust gas emissions.
Observe the legal requirements.
Service products
Drums
Parts which have been contaminated by

the service products, such as filters or
cleaning cloths
must be disposed of in an environmentally

responsible manner.
8
9
557
Technical data
Non-approved engine oils could lead to

malfunctions and engine damage. The
use of such oils could affect your warranty rights.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance

Booklet.
4 Oil change
5
Oil change intervals depend on vehicle operating conditions and on the quality of the
oil used in the engine.
The driver information system automatically shows the time for an oil change as an
event message in the display.
Select the SAE class (viscosity) of engine
oil in accordance with the outside temperatures.
!
If oil for all-year-round operation is not
used in the engine, change the engine
oil in good time before the cold season
commences, and add an approved engine oil of the specified SAE class.
SAE engine oil classes
Single-grade oils
Multigrade oils
8
9
558
Technical data
The following data on engine oils is programmed in the "Adjusting service products" menu of the driver information
system:
Mixibility of engine oils
Sheet No. of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.
quality grade
SAE class
Adding/topping up the engine oil
When topping up, DaimlerChrysler recommends that you only use engine oils of the
same quality grade and SAE class as the oil
filled at the last oil change.
Adjusting oil quality
If in the unlikely event the
engine oil type
If you top up the engine oil or perform

an oil change using an engine oil of a
lower quality, the quality of this oil must
be adjusted in the "Adjusting service
products" menu in the driver information system.
SAE class
filled in the engine are not available: top up
the engine oil using another approved mineral or synthetic engine oil.
!
Mixing oils has a negative effect on the
benefits of high-quality engine oils.
If you top up using the higher quality

engine oil this quality should in no way
be entered in the driver information
system.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
559
Technical data
i
The
quality
SAE class
3
4
5
if necessary, the approval in accordance with Mercedes-Benz

Specifications for Service Products,
e.g. Sheet no. 228.5
can be seen from the drum designation
on the oil reservoir.
6
7
8
9
560
Engine oils for use with bio-diesel fuel

(FAME fuel)
Only use engine oils complying with Sheet
No. 228.5 or 228.3 of the Mercedes-Benz
Specifications for Service Products which
are approved for operation
with bio-diesel fuel which have not
been mixed or
mixed with standard diesel fuels
!
The engine oil change intervals must be
shortened.
Environmental note
If your vehicle runs on bio-diesel fuels, special precautions must be taken and national
specifications complied with when disposing of engine oils. Information is available
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Technical data
Coolant
The coolant is a mixture of water and a corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent or water
and a coolant additive without antifreeze
properties. In order to maintain corrosion
protection and to increase the boiling
point, the coolant must remain in the cooling system all the year round.
!
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the coolant should be
checked every six months.
Renew the coolant every three years,
since the level of corrosion protection
gradually decreases.
Water alone is not permissible as a
coolant, even if antifreeze protection is
not required. The water in the coolant
must satisfy the requirements specified on sheet no. 310 of the MercedesBenz Specifications for Service Products.
If the water quality is not sufficient you

must filter and/or treat the water.
Information is available from any
Do not increase the concentration of
corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze beyond
55% by volume (= maximum antifreeze
protection). Above this concentration,
antifreeze protection deteriorates and
heat dissipation is less effective.
During the colder months, check corrosion protection and antifreeze more
frequently.
Coolant mixing ratios

Water %
by vol.
Corrosion/
antifreeze %
by vol.
1
Antifreeze
protection
to C
50
minimum 50
37
45
maximum 55 approximately 45
3
4
Environmental note
Unless they are handled properly, coolant

can constitute a risk both for people and for
the environment. Coolant must not be allowed to get into the sewage system, surface waters, the ground water or the ground
itself. Dispose of used coolant in an environmentally friendly manner. Observe the legal
requirements. Further information on how
to handle, store and dispose of coolants is
available from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
561
5
6
7
8
9
Technical data
1 Coolant additives without antifreeze

2
3
4
No antifreeze protection is needed in countries in which the temperature is always

above freezing point. It is permitted in
these countries to mix water with a coolant
additive without antifreeze properties instead of a corrosion/antifreeze additive.
Comply with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.
5
6
Renew the coolant once a year.

Do not use fuel additives such as anticorrosion protection oils for the cooling
system.
7
8
9
562
Diesel fuels
Adjusting the fuel grade
Only use standard automotive diesel fuels

in accordance with DIN EN 590. Grades
such as marine diesel fuel, heating oils,
etc. are not permitted.
When the vehicle is delivered, the "Adjusting service products" menu of the driver information system is set to the normal
sulphur content (in %) in the fuel available
in the country of delivery.
!
Filter the fuel before adding it when refuelling the vehicle from drums or canisters. This prevents malfunctions in
the fuel system as a result of impurities
in the fuel.
Special additives must not be used as
they could lead to malfunctions and engine damage. The use of such additives
could affect your warranty rights.
If you refuel the vehicle occasionally or

predominantly in other countries, you must
adjust the normal sulphur content of this
country in the "Adjusting service products"
menu in the driver information system. For
an overview of sulphur content in % of fuel
available in other countries, see
( page 567).
Technical data
Diesel fuels at low temperatures
At low outside temperatures paraffin separation may reduce the diesel fuel's freeflowing properties.
To prevent operating problems, use diesel
fuel with improved flow properties in the
winter months.
In Germany, winter-grade diesel fuels are
sold which remain reliable in operation
down to approximately 20 C. Wintergrade diesel fuel can normally be used
without risk of malfunctioning at the outside temperatures expected in the country
where it is on sale.
Fuel additives
i
Do not use additives in winter diesel fuels. The fuel's flow properties could be
impaired by any such fuel additive.
If summer-grade diesel fuel or wintergrade fuel with less resistance to low temperatures is in use, add a quantity of flow
improver or kerosene, depending on the
outside temperatures.
The vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating system. This improves the flow properties of the diesel fuel by approximately
8 C.
Adding petrol lowers the flash point of the

diesel fuel. This adds to the risk of handling
this fuel mixture.
1
2
3
4
Do not add petrol to diesel fuel.
Add the additives to the diesel fuel at the

appropriate time, before paraffin separation reduces the diesel's flow properties.
Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separation can only be removed by heating the
entire fuel system, e.g. by stopping the engine in a heated area.
6
7
8
9
563
Technical data
1 Flow improvers
2
The effectiveness of flow improvers cannot

be guaranteed with all fuels. Comply with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
The addition of flow improvers does not affect the cold stability of the bio-diesel fuel.
Kerosene
4 The addition of 5% by volume of kerosene

5
6
7
8
improves the cold-resistance of diesel fuel

by approximately 1 C. The proportion of
kerosene additive must not exceed 50%.
If summer-grade diesel fuel or wintergrade fuel with less resistance to low temperatures is in use, add a quantity of flow
improver or kerosene, depending on outside temperatures.
Adding kerosene lowers the flash point of

the diesel fuel. This increases the risk of
handling this fuel mixture.
Mix kerosene with diesel fuel only in the fuel
tank.
Bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel)

It is also possible to run the vehicle on biodiesel fuel.
This results in
a slightly higher fuel consumption
a slightly reduced engine power output
increased white smoke formation after
a cold start
Please refer to the notes on Sheet No. 135
of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products.
Add the kerosene first, then the diesel fuel.
Add as little as possible, consistent

with outside temperatures.
Comply with the relevant safety regulations.
It is possible to mix standard diesel fuel

with FAME fuel (fatty acid methylester).
Run the engine for a while to ensure

that the additive reaches all parts of
the fuel system.
564
For safety reasons, only mix bio-diesel

fuel with diesel fuel in the vehicle's fuel
tank.
Technical data
!
The fuel filter and engine oil filter
must be replaced 600 miles (approximately 1,000 km) after switching to bio-diesel fuel.
The fuel filter and engine oil filter
must be replaced with every oil
change.
Bio-diesel fuel shortens the service
life of conventional fuel filters.
DaimlerChrysler therefore recommends fitting a special fuel prefilter.
Further information is available
from your Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
When switching to bio-diesel fuel
the "Service Products" menu of the
driver information system is set to
FAME ( page 198).
The intervals for oil changes and replacing the engine oil filter are
shorter.
Only use bio-diesel fuel in accordance with DIN EN 14214. Special
additives are not permitted. Fuels
which do not comply with
DIN E 14214 or which have had
special additives added could cause
malfunctions or even engine damage.
Bio-diesel fuel corrodes painted
surfaces. For this reason, they must
not be allowed to come into contact
with paintwork. Rinse off immediately with water. Only use engine
oils complying with Sheet
No. 228.5 or 228.3 of the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products.
If the vehicle is not used for long periods of time, bio-diesel fuel could
adhere to components of the fuel
system. If the engine is not used for
longer periods of time, use up the
bio-diesel fuel and run the vehicle
for a short time on conventional diesel fuel and leave it in the fuel system. The use of bio-diesel fuels is
not recommended for vehicles
which spend long periods out of use
(e.g. fire engines).
Observe the manufacturer's operating instructions on how to run the
auxiliary heating on bio-diesel fuel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
565
Technical data
1
2
3
4
5
6
Environmental note
If your vehicle runs on bio-diesel fuel, ask

your disposal plant whether you must collect the engine oil separately. Not every
manufacturer of two refined (lubricant manufactured from used engine oil ) can process
bio-diesel fuel to produce enriched engine
oil.
Special precautions must be taken and national specifications complied with when
disposing of engine oils. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
7
8
9
566
Mercedes-Benz will not accept any warranty claims for damage if
Bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel) at low temperatures
such damage is in directly or indirectly

caused by the use of bio-diesel fuels
which do not comply with DIN E 14214
Bio-diesel fuels complying with

DIN E 14214 remain reliable down to an
outside temperature of approximately
20 C.
the specifications in accordance with

Sheet No. 135 of Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products for operation with bio-diesel fuels are not
observed
malfunctions or consequential damage
(e.g. paintwork damage) are caused by
the handling or by operation with biodiesel fuels.
The vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating system. This improves the flow properties of the diesel fuel.
Flow improvers
The addition of flow improvers does not affect the cold stability of the bio-diesel fuel.
Technical data
Table showing fuel sulphur content
1
Sulphur content (% by weight)
0...0.1
Europe
0.1...0.3
0.3...0.8
0.8...
Austria
Italy
Azores
Armenia
Albania
Belgium
Lithuania
Bulgaria
Azerbaijan
Andorra
Czech Republic
Luxembourg
Iceland
Estonia
Bosnia-Herzegovina
Denmark
Netherlands
Madeira
Georgia
Croatia
Finland
Norway
Poland
Latvia
Montenegro
France
Portugal
Russia
Macedonia
Romania
Germany
Slovakia
Malta
Slovenia
Great Britain
Spain
Moldova
Yugoslavia
Greece
Sweden
Turkey
Hungary
Switzerland
Ukraine
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ireland
8
9
567
Technical data
Sulphur content (% by weight)

0...0.1
0.1...0.3
0.3...0.8
India
Australia
Australia
Asia
Hong Kong
Indonesia
Korea
Israel
Japan
Singapore
Taiwan
Thailand
5
North America
Mexico
USA
South America
Canada
Africa
8
9
568
Argentina
South Africa
0.8...
Technical data

Series
Engine with oil

filter
Capacity
approximately
Service product
Engine oil ( page 557)
Sheet no.1
501 LA
541.9..
maximum
34 litres
(228.0/1)
+ refrigerator block
541.9..
maximum
27 litres
(228.2/3)
502 LA
542.9..
maximum
38 litres
228.5
+ refrigerator block
542.9..
maximum
29 litres
3
4
5
6
1 MB Specifications for Service Products.
7
8
9
569
Technical data
1
2
Transmission2
G 231
Series
Capacity
approximately
Service product
Sheet
no.1
715.5..
15.5 litres
Transmission oil SAE 75W-90
235.11
15.5 litres
Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W,

80W/85W
235.1
1.0 litres
Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W/85W
235.5
235.11
+ transmission oil cooler
G 210 G 260
+ transmission oil cooler
1.0 litres
715.5..
+ power take-off
5
6
7
8
9
NA 121 1b
+0.4 litres
NA 121 2b; 121 2c
+0.6 litres
NA 123 10b; 124 10b
+0.6 litres
NA 123 11b/c;
124 11b/c
+1.0 litres
NA 125 10b;
125 10b/R
+0.7 litres
NA 125 11b/2c;
+1.3 litres
NMV 150, NMV 200
+2.9 litres

2 G 210G 260 with transmission oil cooler: only use transmission oil complying with Sheet No. 235.11.
570
Technical data
Transfer case
VG 1700
Series
Filling caService product

pacity approximately
Sheet no.1
750.86.
11.4 litres
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90
235.0, 235.6
Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W
235.1, 235.5
80W/85W
235.11
+ oil cooler
Transfer case
VG 2400
Retarder (Voith)
2
3
+0.5 litres
750.850
13.2 litres
Transmission oil SAE 75W/85W
235.4
750.851
10.2 litres
235.11
4
5
750.852
+ oil cooler
+0.5 litres
5.9 litres
Single-grade engine oil SAE 10W, SAE 20W-20,

SAE 30
227.0
8
9
571
Technical data
1
2
Series
Front axle
Differential hub reduction AL7
730.108
Differential hub reduction AL7
730.109
3
4
Rear axle
Through-drive AD7
730.110
Planetary hubs
Differential hub reduction HL7, 748.210, 748.211
HD7
748.220, 748.230
6
Through-drive HD7
748.231, 748.240
748.214, 748.217
748.236, 748.239
748.211, 748.231
748.215, 748.217
748.237, 748.239
Planetary hubs
HL6
746.213
HL8
748.590
14.0 litres
572
Sheet no.1
235.0
235.6
235.8
235.0
235.6
235.8
2.5 litres
3.5 litres
each
3.25 litres
15.0 litres
8
9
Filling capac- Service product

ity approximately
7.0 litres
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90,
85W-90
7.0 litres
85W-90
8.0 litres
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90
each1.5 litres
8.0 litres
85W-90
85W-90
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90
12.0 litres

235.0
85W-90
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90 235.8
Technical data
Series
Power steering
Filling caService product

pacity approximately
Sheet no.1
4.5 litres
236.3, 236.6
Steering gear oil or transmission fluid (ATF)
2
3
+ Telligent steering
system
Cab tilting unit
Tipper oil or hydraulic fluid or
236.2, 236.3
transmission fluid (ATF)
236.6, 341.0
Fifth-wheel coupling, trailer

coupling
Multipurpose grease
267.0
Axle load compensation

linkage
Multipurpose grease
267.0
Propeller shaft universal joint,

slide piece
Multipurpose grease
267.0
Front axle king pin
Multipurpose grease
267.0
4
5
6
7
8
573
Technical data
1
2
3
4
5
Series
Clutch hydraulic section

Hydraulic component of the Range change transhydraulic-pneumatic gear- mission
shift:
+ NMV/WSK
Battery cable terminals
Fuel tank
Cooling system
6
7
541.9...
502 LA engine
+ Retarder (Voith)
+ Retarder (Telma)
542.9...
8
9
574
Sheet no.1
331.0
331.0
1.37 litres
501 LA engine
Windscreen washer system,

headlamp cleaning system
Filling capac- Service product

ity approximately
Brake fluid (DOT 4 plus)
1.27 litres Brake fluid (DOT 4 plus)
Acid-resistant grease
300 Diesel fuels ( page 562)
950 litres
34.5 Coolant ( page 561)
36.5 litres
45.0 litres
+13.5 litres
+11.5 litres
16.0 litres Water with windscreen washer
concentrate S for summer or W
for winter. Observe the correct
mixing ratio.
350
130
310
371.0
Technical data
Operating data
Operating data
Operating data overview

Compressed-air system (reservoir pressure)
Service brake (constant pressure system)
Brake circuit 1
minimum 6.8 bar
Brake circuit 2
minimum 6.8 bar
Brake circuit on trailer/semitrailer
minimum 5.5 bar
Pressure regulator (activation/deactivation pressure)

Spring-loaded brake release circuit
External compressed-air source (charging the compressed-air system)
10.0 bar
approximately 10.2/12.3 bar
minimum 5.5 bar

maximum 10.0 bar
Gearshift at transmission
minimum 7.0 bar
Auxiliary consumers
minimum 5.5 bar
5
6
7
8
9
575
Technical data
Operating data
Engine
Engine speed limiter (transmission in neutral)
approximately 1,700/min
Engine speed limitation (emergency running mode)
1,300 rpm
Idling speed
3
4
5
approximately 500 rpm
Minimum engine operating speed (vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift)
approximately 550 rpm
Exhaust brake (operating range)
900 2,300 rpm
Engine oil pressure (idling speed)
minimum 0.5 bar
Engine oil pressure (rated speed)
minimum 2.5 bar
Rated speed
approximately 1,800 rpm
Operating temperature (coolant temperature)
Normal operation
Arduous operation (automatically reduced engine power output)
Maximum permissible coolant temperature
Tyre pressure
Maximum permissible air pressure for inflating tyres ( page 579)
576
approximately 80 95 C
from approximately 105 C
110 C
10.0 bar
Technical data
Operating data
Wheel nut tightening torques (Nm)

Light-alloy wheels
600 25 Nm
Pressed-steel wheel, hub centering by wheel hub
600 25 Nm
Pressed-steel wheel, centring by spherical spring washers and wheel bolts

Wheel nut cover caps
450 Nm
50 70 Nm
Spring actuator
Spring-loaded brake release screw release torque
Spring-loaded brake release screw tightening torque
4
maximum 70 Nm
minimum 25 Nm, maximum 45 Nm
Release pressure (reservoir pressure in compressed-air system)
minimum 8.0 bar
Release pressure (with outside source of compressed air)
minimum 6.5 bar
Release pressure with tyre air pressure (spare wheel)
minimum 8.5 bar
5
6
7
8
9
577
Technical data
Operating data
1
2
3
Fifth-wheel coupling (low maintenance)

Tightening torque (Nm) for the friction lining of the securing bolts (see manufacturer's operating instructions)
Filling the air-spring system via tyre inflator connection or front coupling head
minimum 9.0 bar
Filler valve, red protective cap
minimum 6.5 bar
4
Speed limiter
Limiting speed (there may be variations in certain countries)
Steering wheel play
Maximum permissible steering wheel play (measured at the rim of the steering
wheel with the engine running)
8
9
578
approximately 85 km/h
30 mm
Technical data
Tyre pressure table
Tyre pressure table
Single tyres
Risk of accident
If tyre pressures are too low, road safety and

tyre life will both be adversely affected; fuel
consumption and tyre wear will increase,
and there will be an increased risk of tyre
damage.
i
Tyre pressure changes by approximately 0.2 bar for every 10 C change in
ambient temperature. Remember this
when checking tyre pressures inside a
building particularly in winter.
The tyre pressure on the front axles for

Michelin tyres must be set in accordance with the values in the table
+1 bar. Do not, however, exceed the
maximum permissible tyre pressure of
8.5 bar. Exceptions to this are Michelin
tyres which have a recommended tyre
pressure of 9 bar.

vehicle.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Example:
Room temperature = approximately
20 C
Outside temperature = approximately
0 C
Required tyre pressure:
specified tyre pressure + 0.4 bar
8
9
579
Technical data
Tyre pressure table
1 Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate)

2
3
4
5
Tyres
12.00 R 20
12.00 R 20
13.00 R 20
13.00 R 20
14.00 R 20
14.00 R 20
12 R 2 2.5
12 R 22.5
13 R 22.5
13 R 22.5
LI
154
157
163
164
160
164
149
150/152
154
156
6,000
6.5
6.5
7.25
7.0
6.5
6.25
6,300
7.0
6.75
7.75
7.5
6.75
6.5
1 Trailing axle +1 bar (maximum tyre pressure 9.0 bar)
6
7
8
9
580
6,500
7.25
7.0
8.0
7.75
7.0
6.75
6,700
7.51
7.251
8.251
8.01
7.251
7.01
6,900
7.75
7.5
8.251
7.5
7.5
7,100
8.0
7.75
8.51
7.75
7.75
7,500
8.5
8.0
5.5
8.5
8.25
8,000
8.75
6.5
6.0
6.0
8.75
8,500
7.00
6.25
6.5
6.5
9,000
7.75
6.75
7.0
6.75
9,500
8.25
7.00
7.25
10,000
7.5
7.5
Technical data
Tyre pressure table
Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate)
Tyres
12 R 24
12 R 24
285/60 R 22.5
295/60 R 22.5
295/80 R 22.5
305/60 R 22.5
305/70 R 22.5
315/60 R 22.5
315/70 R 22.5
315/80 R 22.5
385/65 R 22.5
425/65 R 22.5
LI
156
160
148
150
152
150
150
152
154
156
160
165
6,000
8.25
7.5
7.0
7.75
7.5
7.5
7.0
6.25
6,300
6.25
8.75
8.0
7.5
8.25
8.0
7.75
7.5
6.75
6,500
6.5
8.25
7.75
8.5
8.25
8.25
7.75
7.0
1
6,700
6.75
8.5
8.01
8.75
8.5
8.5
8.0
7.51
6.5
6,900
7.0
8.251
8.75
8.25
6.75
7,100
7.25
6.75
8.51
9.0
8.5
7.75
7.0
7,500
7.75
7.0
9.0
8.25
7.25
8,000
8.25
7.5
8.75
8.0
6.5
8,500
8.25
8.5
6.75
9,000
8.75
9.0
7.25
9,500
10,000
2
3
4
5
6
1 Trailing axle +1 bar (maximum tyre pressure 9.0 bar)
7
8
9
581
Technical data
Tyre pressure table
Twin tyres
2
3
4
5
vehicle.
6
7
8
9
582
Technical data
Tyre pressure table
Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate)
Tyres
12.00 R 20
12.00 R 20
14.00 R 20
14.00 R 20
12 R 22.5
12 R 22.5
13 R 22.5
13 R 22.5
12 R 24
12 R 24
285/60 R 22.5
295/60 R 22.5
295/80 R 22.5
305/60 R 22.5
305/70 R 22.5
315/60 R 22.5
315/70 R 22.5
315/70 R 22.5
315/80 R 22.5
LI
150
153
157
160
146
148
149
150
153
156
145
147
148
147
148
148
148
150
150
9,500
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
10,000 10,500 11,000 11,500 12,000 12,500 13,000 13,500 14,000 14,500 15,000 16,000 17,000 18,000
6.25 6.5
7.0
7.5
7.75 8.0
8.5
6.5
6.75 7.25 7.5
7.75 8.0
8.5
8.75 9.0
5.5
5.75 6.0
6.25
6.75
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
6.25 6.75 7.0
7.5
8.0
8.25
6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0
8.5
6.25 6.5
6.75 7.25 7.75 8.0
8.25
6.0
6.5
6.75 7.0
7.5
8.0
8.25 8.5
6.25 6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0
8.25
6.75
7.5
7.75 8.25 8.75
6.25 6.5
7.0
7.25 8.0
6.5
6.75 7.25 7.5
8.0
8.5
6.25 6.5
7.0
7.25 8.0
6.25 6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
6.75 7.0
7.5
8.0
8.25 8.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0
6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0
8.25 8.75
6.25 6.5
7.0
7.25 7.5
8.0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
583
Technical data
Speed limiter
Speed limiter
1 The vehicle's maximum speed is limited to

2
3
4
5
6
85 km/h. Variations may be permitted by

legal requirements in all countries concerned. Once a road speed of 50 mph (approximately 85 km/h) has been reached,
the engine automatically regulates the
speed. Caution is needed when overtaking.
Risk of accident
If the driver exceeds the maximum speed of

the vehicle, there is a risk of rolling for articulated vehicles. You would also overload the
vehicle's brakes and tyres. There is a risk
that you could lose control of the vehicle,
particularly if you are driving down long
steep slopes with a loaded vehicle.
7
8
9
584
You are responsible for ensuring that the legal maximum permitted speed is not exceeded.
Downshift and engage the engine brake early on to make full use of the engine braking
effect on long downhill sections. Slow the
vehicle down by braking if necessary.
Technical data
information
for first-time buyers and other users
Accompanying documentation in accordance with Council Directive 87/404/EEC
and EN 286-2
The reservoir is
a
only to be used for motor vehicle compressed-air systems and those of their
trailer vehicles, and only for the supply
of compressed air;
to be marked for identification with a
works number and the reservoir manufacturer's name together with the principal operating data and the EC mark
see type plate or engravings directly on
the reservoir wall,
to be manufactured with a "declaration
of conformity" in accordance with
Article 12 of Directive 87/404/EEC.
to be secured to the vehicle by retaining straps (clamps). On buses, direct

mounting at the threaded rings is permitted.
only to be cleaned using non-alkaline
In the case of aluminium reservoirs,

soft liquid-proof retaining strap inserts
are to be used to prevent contact between different materials. Securing
straps are to be set in such a way that
the base connecting seams are not
touched and that the reservoir is not
subjected to any strain that would impair operating safety.
to be emptied at regular intervals suffi-
Coatings applied to aluminium reservoirs must not contain lead, and the
top paint coating must only be applied
on top of a suitable primer coat. Steel
threaded unions for aluminium reservoirs must have a corrosion-proof coating,
detergents (aluminium reservoir)
to have the interior visible through the

threaded unions.
cient to prevent the accumulation of
condensation (drainage ring nut at lowest point of reservoir).
e
to require no maintenance if Item d is

complied with.
No welding, heat treatment or other

operation relevant to safety is to be
performed on the pressure bearing
walls of the reservoir (casing, base,
ring nuts).
Internal reservoir pressure may exceed

maximum operating pressure Ps by not
more than 10% for a brief period.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DaimlerChrysler AG
585
Technical data
Aluminium tank
Steel tank
2
3
4
5
6
7
Type plate, aluminium reservoir (example)
Type plate, steel reservoir (example)
1 SAG, Austria
SMA, Italy
2 MB part number
3 Volume (litres)
4 Testing establishment code number
5 Year
1 L&S, Germany
Elesfr, France
LMP, Portugal
Silverton Engineering, South Africa
2 MB part number
3 Volume (litres)
4 Year
5 Testing establishment code number
8
9
586
Technical data
Aluminium tank
Volume (litres)
1
MB Part No.
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
004 432 1001
20
004 432 1401
35
003 432 9801
6.0
003 432 4601
20
004 432 4601
35
004 432 2701
7.5
004 432 1201
25
003 432 9601
35
004 432 4901
10
004 432 1301
25
003 432 9701
40
003 432 4001
15
003 432 3701
30
003 432 3401
40
004 432 0101
20
003 432 5201
30
003 432 3801
45
003 432 0101
20
003 432 5301
30
004 432 4401
60
004 432 4101
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
587
Technical data
1 Steel tank
2
3
4
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
004 432 0501
20
004 432 1901
30
004 432 4301
6.0
003 432 0601
20
004 432 3101
35
003 432 9501
7.5
004 432 0701
25
003 432 9301
35
004 432 2601
10
004 432 0801
25
003 432 9401
40
003 432 3901
15
003 432 3301
25
004 432 4201
40
004 432 0001
20
003 432 1401
30
003 432 2001
45
003 432 9901
20
003 432 1501
30
003 432 3201
60
004 432 4001
5
6
7
8
9
588
Technical data
Radio type approvals

Country
Radio remote control transmitter MB Part

no. 001 820 12 97
Control unit basic module

MB Part no. 000 446 00 18
Immobiliser MB Part
no. 020 545 39 32
Austria
GZ 100 243-ZB/97
Belgium
RTT/D/X 1443
Denmark
ALR 96129
Finland
G 750723 H
France
Germany
DL 0001 97
Great Britain
12462
Greece
EK 482
Hungary
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 Application for radio type approval submitted

2 Not required
8
9
589
Technical data
1
2
Country
Radio remote control transmitter MB Part

no. 001 820 12 97
Control unit basic module

MB Part no. 000 446 00 18
Immobiliser MB Part
no. 020 545 39 32
Ireland
IRL TRA 24/5/60/23
Italy
DGPGF/SEGR/2/FO/
000197
Luxembourg
L-2431/10203-02H
Netherlands
NL 97021470
Norway
NO 96000845-R
Portugal
ICP-022TC-97
Spain
E D.G.Tel. 07 97 0641
Sweden
Switzerland
BAKOM 96.1106.G.P.
3
4
5
6
7
1 Application for radio type approval submitted

2 Not required
8
9
590
Technical terms
ABS
(anti-lock braking system)
ABS is an integral component of the
Telligent brake system (->BS). This
prevents the wheels from locking when
the vehicle is braking. The vehicle thus
remains steerable. It is operational
from walking pace, regardless of road
surface conditions.
ADR
(Accord europen relatif au transport
international des marchandises dangereuses par route)
ADR is the European Agreement Concerning the International Carriage of
Dangerous Goods by Road. This corresponds to the German GGVS agreement.
AG
(automatic gear selection)
->Control unit abbreviation
System which automatically determines and selects the best possible
gear for the driving situation, accelerator pedal position, engine operating
conditions, etc. The automatic gear selection is a monitored electronics system and forms part of the Telligent
automatic gearshift system.
AHK
Trailer coupling
APU
(air processing unit)
Four-circuit safety valve with filter dryer and tyre inflator connection
ART
(distance-regulating cruise control)
Driving system which enables you to
maintain a specified distance from the
vehicle in front.
If there is no vehicle in front, the

system works like conventional
->cruise control.
If a slower vehicle is detected

ahead, the distance-regulating
cruise control reduces your speed
enough to allow you to maintain the
set specified distance from the vehicle.
4
5
6
7
8
9
591
Technical terms
1 ASR
2
3
(acceleration skid control)

Function of the Telligent braking system.
Acceleration skid control prevents the
drive wheels from spinning when the
vehicle pulls away or accelerates, regardless of the road conditions.
4 Belt drive
5
Drive connection from the engine to

the engine accessories, such as the alternator, coolant pump or cold compressor.
6
7
8
9
592
BS
(Telligent brake system)
Electronic braking system which comprises the regulating functions for
->ABS, ->ASR, ->SR, continuous brake
(engine brake/->retarder) and Brake
Assist. Takes into consideration the
current vehicle weight and any trailer/
semitrailer when distributing brake
power. This always ensures that the
vehicle/trailer combination is braked
with optimum effect.
BTS
(battery cut-off switch)
BW
(binary value)
Stored binary values in the diagnostics
menu serve only as information for
service personnel. These values will
help the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to diagnose and rectify malfunctions more rapidly.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
DaimlerChrysler customer service centre offering advice on all matters concerning the vehicle, and support in the
event of a breakdown.
Technical terms
CAN
(Controller Area Network)
Means that the control units are networked and exchange data with each
other. Controls vehicle functions, such
as the central locking system or windscreen wipers, depending on the vehicle or environmental conditions and
delivers information to the ->FIS. This
system connects the vehicle's electronic systems.
CODE
Checks whether a person entering or
driving the vehicle is authorised to do
so, and forms part of the anti-theft system.
Control unit
Electronic component that controls the
functions of the engine or transmission, for example.
Drive train
Collective term for all vehicle components which belong to the drive, such
as:
Control unit abbreviation

The control unit abbreviation sorts an
event message and information in the
Diagnostics menu of the corresponding
electronic system.
Engine
Cruise control
Driving system which makes it possible
to store any speed above 10 mph
(15 km/h).
Transfer case
Clutch
1
2
3
Transmission
Propeller shafts
Axle drive shafts

Switch with which the driver of a vehicle with Telligent automatic gearshift
can select automatic or manual operating mode.
6
7
8
9
593
Technical terms
1 EAB
2
3
4
5
6
(electronic trailer brake)

Supplements the Telligent braking
system
EDW
(anti-theft alarm system)
The towing vehicle and trailer/ semitrailer are protected against break in
and theft by motion and sound sensors.
EHZ
(additional electronic rear axle control)
Telligent steering system
Engine number
Number specified by the manufacturer
and marked on the cylinder head, by
which each engine can be clearly identified.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement of the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The viscosity is better the higher
the temperature the oil can withstand
without becoming too thin, or the lower
the temperature the oil can withstand
without becoming too thick.
EPS
(electronic pneumatic gearshift)
Transmission shifting which electronically transfers the shift pulses to the
transmission. The gears are shifted by
pneumatic units on the transmission.
->EPS III S, ->EPS III optional
EPS III S
Telligent gearshift, third generation
EPS III SA
Telligent automatic gearshift, second
generation with automated clutch.
FAME fuels
(fatty acid methyl ester)
FAME fuels are bio-diesel fuels which
are based on fatty acid methyl ester.
7
8
9
594
Technical terms
FFB
(radio remote control)
The radio remote control can be used
to:
lock and unlock the driver's door
first and then the co-driver's door
centrally lock and unlock the driver's and co-driver's doors
activate and deactivate the antitheft alarm system
FIS
(driver information system)
The driver information system can be
used to call up important information
relating to the vehicle and to modify
the vehicle's settings. The ->multi-function display serves as the display window for the driver information system.
You can use the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate in
the ->driver information system menus.
FLA
(flame-start system)
The flame-start system is a cold-start
aid for use at very low outside temperatures (below 20 C). The flame-start
system is automatically activated below about 4 C.
FM
(front module)
Electronic control module, which is
linked via the ->CAN to the base module ->GM and the rear end module
->HM.
FR
(drive control)
Electronic control module; incorporating the functions of ->AG and the
clutch.
GGVS
(German regulations for the transport
of dangerous goods by road)
Two EMERGENCY OFF switches (battery cut-off switches) should be fitted
in vehicles used for transporting dangerous goods. When the EMERGENCY
OFF switch is operated, the engine
stops running and all major electrical
consumers are disconnected from the
vehicle's electrical circuit.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
595
Technical terms
1 GM
(base module)
Central electronic module, which is
connected via the ->CAN to the front
module ->FM and the rear end module
->HM.
2
3
GS
4
5
(gear control unit)

The gear control unit is a monitored
electronic system and is part of the
Telligent gearshift or Telligent automatic gearshift system.
6
7
8
9
596
GSM
(Global System for Mobile Communications)
The GSM standard establishes the
guidelines for constructing a cellular
digital mobile system. Thanks to this
uniform standard, it is possible to use a
mobile phone abroad. Within GSM
there are approximately 300 network
operators in 120 countries. The transmission method is digital.
HM
(rear end module)
Electronic control module; which is
connected via the ->Controller Area
Network to the base module ->GM and
the front module ->FM.
HPS
(hydraulic pneumatic gearshift)
Transmission shifting which transfers
the shift movements to the transmission hydraulically. Pneumatic units on
the transmission shift the ->splitter unit
and the range group.
HZR
(heating control and air conditioning)
Electronic control module for the automatic air conditioning.
INS
(instrument panel)
The instrument panel is an independent control unit. It controls the indicator lamps, needle instruments and the
Technical terms
KB
Clutch operation
KOM
(communications gateway)
Communications interface
KS
(clutch control)
Clutch control is a monitored electronic system which forms part of the
Telligent automatic gearshift system.
KSA
(enhanced central locking system)
The enhanced central locking system
includes ->central locking for the driver's and co-driver's door, the electric
power windows and electric sliding/
tilting sunroof. When the vehicle is
locked, the side windows and sliding/
tilting sunroof close automatically if
they are still open. If the sliding/tilting
sunroof closing lock switch is activated, the sliding/tilting sunroof will remain open.
LIM
(limiter)
Driving system which makes it possible
to limit the road speed from 10 mph
(15 km/h) upwards.
LM rim
(light metal rim)
Loading platform approach aid

When reverse gear is engaged, the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle appears in the ->multi-function
display.
M+S tyres (winter tyres)
(slush and snow)
Tyres which bear the marking M+S are
intended for wintry road conditions.
The rubber mix of these tyres contains
special additives which prevent the
tyres from becoming "hard" even at low
temperatures. For safety reasons,
M+S tyres should be fitted as soon as
temperatures fall below +4 C.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
597
Technical terms
1 MBS
(Mercedes-Benz item number)

Diagnostics menu display
2 Menu
3
The displays in the multi-function display of the ->driver information

system (FIS) are arranged in menus.
Several commands are in the menus.
4 MFD
5
6
(multi-function display)
Display in the instrument panel which
has ->menus to show information and
settings for the ->driver information
system.
7
8
9
598
MR
(engine control)
Engine control is a monitored electronic system which forms part of the
Telligent engine system. It controls
the engine, e.g. the engine idling
speed.
MSF
(modular shift panel)
MSS
Engine start/stop function
Display in the instrument panel which
has ->menus to show information and
settings for the ->driver information
system.
Steering wheel with control buttons
which control the ->driver information
system.
MW
(measured value)
Stored measured values in the diagnostics and results menus serve only as information for service personnel. These
values will help the Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre to diagnose and rectify
malfunctions more rapidly.
Technical terms
Network operator logo

Identifying symbol for the mobile network operator
PFA
(particle filter system)
RS
NMV
(power take-off, engine connected)
PSM
(programmable special module)
Interface for the connection of
special-purpose bodies to the vehicle
electrics/electronics system.
Rumble strip noise

The lane assist warning sound reproduced over the vehicle audio system
which informs you that you are driving
across road lane markings on construction sites.
RAD
(radio) ->Control unit abbreviation
SAE code
Fault code specified by the Society of
Automotive Engineers.
NOX
Treatment of gas emissions (DeNOx)
NR
(level control)
The chassis frame can be lowered,
raised or moved to the normal position
(driving position) using the Telligent
level control panel.
Overrevving range
Speeds in the red area of the rev counter at which the engine can only operate for a short period.
Retarder
The anti-wear brake which acts on the
propeller shaft. Supplements the continuous brake.
(retarder control)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
599
Technical terms
1 SMS
2
3
4
5
6
7
(short message service)

Mobile network service enabling small
amounts of data to be sent and received. This can be data, text or even illustrations with up to a maximum of
160 characters.
SPA
(lane assist) ->Control unit abbreviation
Lane assist is a convenience system
which continuously monitors the position of the vehicle in relation to the
roadside markings through a camera
behind the windscreen.
If the lateral lane markings are driven
on or crossed, an audible warning in
the form of a "rumble strip" noise will
sound over the left-hand or right-hand
cab loudspeaker.
8
9
600
Speed index
Part of the tyre designation; indicates
the speed range for which a tyre is permissible.
SR
(stability control)
In critical driving conditions, such as
sudden swerving or cornering too fast,
Telligent stability control reduces the
risk of skidding, jack-knifing or toppling, regardless of the vehicle load or
road surface conditions.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Airbag and seat belt control
Stand-by position
Function of the Telligent level control
->NR. With sufficient reservoir pressure
in the compressed-air system,
Telligent level control maintains the
chassis frame at the stored height for
approximately five seconds.
TCO
(tachograph)
TEL
Hands-free device (telephone)
Telligent
Telligent systems are networked electronic systems, which have been developed specially for Actros. These
systems control the engine, transmission and brakes, for example.
Technical terms
Tightening torque (Nm)

Force with which bolt connections,
e.g. wheel bolts, are tightened.
Nm = Newton meters
TMB
(co-driver's door module)
TMF
(driver's door module)
TP
(telematics platform)
Traction
Force which is transferred from the vehicle to the road via the tyres, and
which describes the grip.
Vehicle identification no.

and affixed to the longitudinal member
chassis, by which each vehicle can be
clearly identified. ->VIN
VIN
(vehicle identification number)
and affixed to the longitudinal member,
by which each vehicle can be clearly
identified.
WR
(roll control)
Telligent roll control electronically
regulates the damping effect of the
suspension, automatically adapting it
to the vehicle load, driving situation
and road surface characteristics.
Telligent roll control is a monitored
electronics system which forms part of
Telligent level control.
WS
(maintenance system)
Depending on the vehicle's operating
conditions, the Telligent maintenance
system calculates service due dates
for:
oil change (service work) in mechanical assemblies (service
points)
general service work on other service points
WSK
(converter and clutch unit)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
601
Technical terms
1 Xenon headlamps
ZL
ZV
3
4
An electric arc in the front Xenon headlamps generates light. A xenon lamp
delivers twice as much light as a modern bulb with a heating filament.
ZDS
(central data accumulator)
Independent component of the GM.
Serves as a back-up memory for programmable vehicle electronics data.
5 ZHE
6
(auxiliary heating)
7
8
9
602
(auxiliary steering)
(central locking)
When the vehicle is locked, the driver's
and co-driver's doors lock at the same
time.
Index
A
ABS 76
ABS activation 87
ABS deactivated 85
ABS, event messages 79
ABS or Telligent brake system event
messages 79
Actros Info (menu) 160
Actros Info menu 160
Adjustable reading lamp 143
Adjusting (seat) 41, 118
Adjusting oil quality 202, 559
Adjusting the driver's suspension
seat 41
Adjusting the exterior mirrors 45
Adjusting the steering wheel 44
ADR/GGVS emergency-off switch 126
After the engine has been started 50
Air conditioning 75
Air conditioning switch 325
Airbag 70, 72
Air-recirculation mode 321

Alarm 178
Alarm menu 178
Ambient lighting 142
Anti-lock braking system 76
Anti-theft alarm system 105, 111
Applying parking brake 62
Arrangement of fuses, diodes,
relays 526
ART 280
Ashtray 344
ASR 87
Attaching the towbar 544
Audio and mobile communication
equipment 73
Audio equipment 169, 359
Operating audio equipment 359
Operating cassette player 364
Operating CD player 363
Regulating volume 360
Selecting radio station 361
Audio menu 169

Automatic air conditioning 315
Automatic bulb check 379
Auxiliary air conditioning 323
Auxiliary heating 177, 327
Auxiliary heating menu 177
Axle load indicator 163
1
2
3
B
Batteries 423
Battery care 427
Charging 428
Checking the fluid level 426
Disconnecting 424, 425
Before starting the engine 40
Belt tensioner 72
Belt tensioners 70
Berth 32, 121
Berth access step 122
Berth switch unit 32
Bio-diesel fuels (FAME fuels) 564, 566
Bleeding the fuel system 468
Brake assist system 77
Brake system 483
603
4
5
6
7
8
9
Index
1 Brakes 371
2
Brake system 77
Braking with anti-lock protection
Breakdown assistance 540
Breakdown equipment 39
BS 77
84
3 C
4
5
6
7
Cab locking 453

(exterior) 348
(interior) 345
Cab tilt lock 51
Cab tilting system checking oil level/
topping up 460
Cables, compressed-air and hydraulic
lines 375
Care 397
8
9
604
Cassette player 364

CD player 363
Central locking 103, 105
Central locking system 34, 102
Changing a wheel 494
Changing gear
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 216
Hydro-pneumatic shifting 55
Automatic mode 240
Manual mode 245
Telligent gearshift 57
Charging the refrigerant
accumulator 324
Checking anti-corrosion protector 415
Checking compressed-air brake system for
leaks 412
Checking compressed-air lines 412
Chocks 39
Cigarette lighter 344

Climate control 307
Clock 148
Clock menu 197
manually 535
Closing tilting sunroof manually 536
Cockpit 14
Cockpit switch units 22
Combination switch 134
Communication equipment 73, 74
Compressed-air lines 375
Compressed-air reservoir 585
Compressed-air system 50
Charging compressed-air system via
front coupling head 486
Charging compressed-air system via
tyre inflator connection 487
Constant engine speed 260
Index
Construction-site filter 326

Construction-site mode 229
Continuous brake 261
Control unit abbreviations 208
Converter and clutch unit 166
Converter and clutch unit
temperature 166
Cool box 347
Coolant 561
Coolant level 421
Coolant temperature 162
Coupling up 373
Cruise control 275
Cruise control sound 184
Cruise control sound menu 184
D
Deleting SMS 170
Demisting 322
Demisting windows 322
Diagnostics 207
Diagnostics menu 207
Diesel fuels 562
Differential lock 185
Differential lock permanent display 185
Differential locks 253
Dipped-beam headlamps 59, 132, 507
Direct gearshift
Distance control
Telligent distance control distance
warning 288
Distance control (ART) 280
Door release mechanism 104
Driver information system 150
Driver's vehicle checks 38
Driving position (chassis) 294
Driving safety systems 76
Driving tips 368
Driving with ASR 88
E
Econometer 145
Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system 457
Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up 467
Electronic-pneumatic
gearshift 218, 231, 437
Emergency equipment/
first-aid kit 39, 430
Emergency gearshift (NMV) 481
Emergency-off switch 127
Engine brake 263
Engine emergency running mode 462
Engine oil consumption 370
Engine oil grade 202
Engine oil grade display 202
Engine oil level 163, 418
Checking the engine oil level 418
Engine oil viscosity 200
Engine oil viscosity menu 200
Engine oils 557
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
605
Index
1 Engine oils for use with bio-diesel

2
3
4
5
6
7
fuel 560
Engine start/shutdown with cab
tilted 461
Engine tunnel shelf 347
Engine type plate 555
Engine-dependent power take-off
(NMW) 258
Engine-resident power take-off 259
Enhanced central locking system 106
Entry access step lamp 504, 512
EPS III S 214, 218
EPS III S/EPS III SA 437
EPS III SA 214, 231
Event info menu 175
Event menu (driver information
system) 175
Events menu 210
Exterior door release mechanism 104
Exterior mirrors 302
8
9
606
F
FAME fuels (bio-diesel fuels) 564, 566
Fifth-wheel coupling (low
maintenance) 578
Fire extinguisher 39, 430
First-aid 39, 430
First-aid kit 39, 430
Flame-start system 49, 129
Flashing light 504
Flow improvers 564, 566
Fluids and lubricants
Adjusting quality/viscosity 198
Fluids and lubricants menu 198
Foglamp 504, 509
Fresh air filter 326
Front foglamps 133, 504, 505, 507
Fuel additives 563

Fuel consumption 369
Fuel gauge 148
Fuel grade 562
Fuel level 40
Fuel level and range 168
Fuel prefilter 469
Fuel sulphur content 199, 567
Function check of brake systems 77
Fuses 522
Checking/replacing 523
Miniature circuit breaker 524
Fuses, Diodes, Relays 522, 526
Index
G
Gear indicator 219, 231
Gear lever 220, 232
Gearshift 214
Gearshift unit 26
Grab handles 36
GS back-up function menu 473
232
H
Hands-free system 74, 350
Hazard warning lamps 137
Head restraint 120
Headlamp
Headlamp setting 515
Headlamp flasher 134
Headlamp range control 133
Headlamps 507
Checking headlamp setting,
adjusting 516
Headlamp cleaning
system 24, 136, 419
Headlamps partially covered driving
on left/right 517
Heating and heater-air conditioning
control panel 309
Hendrickson leading axle 297
High-pressure cleaner 397
High-pressure compressor 410

Hillholder 130
HPS 214, 215, 434
Hydraulic lines 375
Hydro-pneumatic
gearshift 54, 214, 215, 434, 470
1
2
3
I
Idling speed 265
Ignition lock 37
Ignition lock positions 37
Immobiliser 125
Indicating 40, 60
Indicator lamps 20
Inflating tyres with tyre inflator
connection 503
Insect screen 342
Instrument lighting 143
Instrument panel 18
4
5
6
7
8
9
607
Index
1 Instrument panel switch units, centre

2
3
section 28
Interior ceiling lamp 504, 513
Interior lighting 138, 504, 505
Switching off 140
Switching on 139
Intermittent wipe 304
Item number of control unit 209
4 J
Jack 39, 430

Jump-starting 537
5 K
6
Kerosene 564
Key 103
7
8
9
608
L
Lamps 504, 505
Lane assist 96
Language menu 182
Leading axle 297
Level control 186, 290
Permanent display 186
Level control permanent display 186
Light switch unit 135
Light switches 59, 132
Lighting 40, 132, 504
Limiter 269
Liquid load volume monitoring 194
Load compartment light 135
Load info 165
Load monitoring 378
Load pressure monitoring 192
Load temperature monitoring 189
Loading platform approach aid 379
Locking the driver's and co-driver's
doors 34, 65
Locking the driver's door 34, 65
Locking using key 65
Locking using radio remote control 65
M
Main-beam
headlamps 60, 132, 134, 507
Maintenance 171
Maintenance menu 171
Maintenance system 408
Manual mode
Telligent automatic gearshift 243
MB item number 209
system 454
Menu navigation 155
Mirror heating 29, 303
Miscibility of engine oils 559
Monitoring info 161
Monitoring info menu 161
Multi-function display 156
Multi-function steering wheel 25
Index
N
Navigation system 73
New SMS 169
New SMS menu 169
Nightlight 141
Nummek trailing axle 489
O
Occupant safety 68
Oil change intervals 558
Oil level in engine
Checking engine oil level 163
Opening and closing doors 102
Opening and closing roof hatch 343
windows 30, 338
Opening and closing the tilting roof 342
Opening the door from the inside 65
Opening the door from the outside 36

Opening the maintenance flap 417
Opening using the radio remote
control 35
Opening with the key 34
Operating temperature 576
Outside stowage compartment
lighting 504, 514
Outside temperature display 147
Overview of lamps 505
P
Parking 371
Parking brake 130
Applying 62
Release 52
Parking vehicle
Particulate filter 326
Perimeter lamp 509, 511
Pneumatic suspension 290, 578
Charging pneumatic suspension via
external compressed-air
source 488
Poly-V-belt 462
Power take-off 255, 257, 258, 259
Preselected direct shift 223
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
609
Index
1 Preselected gearshift with Telligent
2
3
4
5
6
7
driver's choice 227

Pressure 579
Programmable special module
(PSM) 256
Pull away
Pulling away 52
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 54, 216
Automatic mode 239
back-up function 476
Manual mode 244
Telligent automatic shifting 57
Telligent gearshift back-up
function 475
Pump lever 39, 430, 433
8
9
610
R
Radio 73, 359, 361
Radio and mobile communication
equipment 74
Radio mode arrow key menu 187
Radio remote control 35, 109, 534, 589
Radio type approvals 589
Raised driving position 295
Rapid change in direction 238
Reading lamp 140, 504, 505, 514
Rear foglamp 134, 504, 505
Rear lamps 505, 510
Rear-view mirror 302
Reflective safety jacket 39, 431
Refuelling 372, 562
Reminder 160
Removing a wheel 500
Replacement fuses/fuse extractor 523
Replacing a lamp 505
Reservoir pressure 162

circuits 1 and 2 149
Reservoir pressure in the compressed-air
system 50, 575
Restraint systems 68
Retarder 264
Rev counter 144
Reversing warning 99
Rocking out bogged-in vehicle 230, 238
Roll control 95
Rotating beacon lamp 136, 504, 505
Running the vehicle in 370
Index
S
Safety regulations for air conditioning 75
Seat belt 46, 69
Checking the seat belts 414
Seats 41, 118
Selecting events 210
Selecting neutral 221
Semitrailer coupling 40, 373
Service due date 173, 174

Service note 172
Service products 556
Capacities 569
Setting clock mode 206
Setting language for driver information
system (FIS) 182
Setting time 197
Settings menu 183
Side lamp/parking lamp 504, 508
Side marker lamps 504, 505, 511
Side wind deflector 384
Single tyres 579
Sliding/tilting sunroof
Opening and closing 340
Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock 108
Sliding/tilting sunroof lock switch 341
SMS text message 169
Snow chains 394, 395
Spare wheel location 491

Special tools 432
Speed limiter 578, 584
Split-shifter 217
Spring actuator 577
Spring-loaded brake
Releasing spring-loaded brake with
an external source of compressedair 485
Releasing spring-loaded parking brake
if there is a failure of charge
pressure 483
Stability control 90, 543
Standby switch 293
Starting and stopping the engine with cab
tilted 461
Starting the engine 49
Starting-off aid 296
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
611
Index
1 Steering
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Steering wheel play 51, 578

Steering system/Telligent steering
system 490
STOP lamp 451
Stopping
Hydro-pneumatic shifting 63
Automatic mode 242
Manual mode 249
Telligent automatic shifting 63
Telligent shifting 63
Stopping the engine 64
Stopping the engine Telligent
automatic gearshift 64
Switching audio equipment on/off 359
Switching off Lane assist 98
Switching on Lane assist 98
Switching on lights 59, 132
Swivelling reading lamp 504, 505
612
T
Tachograph 45, 251
Tail lamps 504
Teach-in procedure 478
Telephone 73, 74, 169, 350
Telephone book 354
Telephone menu 169
Gearshift unit 232
Operating mode selector switch 233
Selecting operating mode 233
Telligent automatic gearshift automatic
mode 239
Telligent automatic gearshift modes of
operation 232
Telligent automatic gearshift unit 27
Telligent brake system 77
Telligent distance control (ART) 280
Telligent driver's choice
Telligent gearshift 55, 218

Gearshift unit 220
Selecting neutral 221
Telligent gearshift unit 26
Telligent level control 290
Telligent maintenance system 408
Telligent roll control 95
Telligent stability control (SR) 90, 543
Event message 93
Switching off 91, 543
Switching on 91
Telligent stability control event
message 93
Temperature regulator 316, 319
The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km) 370
Tilting the cab 453
Timed heating 332
Tipper body support 385
Tipper operation 385
Topping up the engine oil 418
headlamp cleaning system 419
Index
Total distance recorder 144

Towing 540, 542
Towing and tow-starting 540
Towing coupling, retrofitting 539
Traction control (ASR) 87
Trailer ID 165
Trailer/semitrailer coupling 40, 373
Trailer/semitrailer monitoring 378
Trailing axle 298, 489
Transfer case 252
Transmission control back-up
mode 189, 207, 473
menu 189, 207
Transmission oil grade 203
Transmission oil grade menu 203
Transmission oil quality 570
Transmission oil viscosity 570

Transmission-dependent
power take-off 257
Trip computer 166
Trip computer menu 166
Trip data 166
Turn signal and brake
lamps 40, 60, 504, 505
Twin tyres 582
Two-way radio, fax machines,
telephone 74
Two-way radio, fax, telephone 73
Type plates 552
Tyre inflator connection 502
Tyre pressure 576
Tyre pressure table 579
Tyres 75
Tyres and wheels 390
U
Underride guard 100
Units menu 205
Units menu, temperature unit 205
Unlocking the driver's and co-driver's
doors 34, 35
Unlocking the driver's door 34, 35
Unlocking using key 103
Unlocking using radio remote
control 103
V
Vehicle check using the driver information
system (FIS) 40
Vehicle document wallet 432
Vehicle jack 497
Vehicle key 103
Vehicle lighting, turn signal and brake
lamps 40, 504
equipment 430, 432
Vehicle tool kit pocket 431
Vehicle type plate 552
Voltage transformer 358
613
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Index
1 W
2
3
4
5
6
7
Warning lamp 39, 431

Warning triangle 39, 431
Wearing seat belts 46
Wheel fitting 501
Wheel nuts 370, 496
Tightening the wheel nuts 577
Tightening wheel nuts 392
Wheel nut tightening torques
(Nm) 577
Wheel wrench 39
Wheelbrace 430
Wheels and tyres 491
Wind deflector 381
Windscreen cleaning platform 305
Windscreen wipers 61, 304
Winter driving 394
Winter operation 394
Wiping action 304
Work-area lamp 135
8
9
614
Contact
Editorial office
Mercedes-Benz will be happy to

answer any queries you may
have:
You are welcome to forward any queries

or suggestions you may have regarding
the Operating Instructions to the technical
documentation team at the following
address:
Mercedes-Benz contact
Telephone: 00 800 1 777 7777
International: +49 69 95 30 72 77
Internet
Further information about
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
DaimlerChrysler can be found
on the following websites:
www.mercedes-benz.com
www.daimlerchrysler.com
DaimlerChrysler AG, HPC: R803,

70546 Stuttgart, Germany
As at: 30.07.2002
Title illustration number N00.01-2201-31
Not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or
in part, without written permission.
Print
W. Kohlhammer GmbH

Actros Kezelesi Konyv Angol

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Actros Kezelesi Konyv Angol

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACTROS Operating Instructions

Thank you for choosing MercedesBenz.

DaimlerChrysler reserves the right to introduce changes in design, equipment and

The aim of these Operating

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Engaging forward gears . . . . . . . .

Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Where will I find...? . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Type plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Glossary and index

Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

This section explains the aim of these

Here you will find an overview of all the

Here you will find all the information you

This section describes all the safety features of the vehicle.

Here you will find practical help for possible problems.

All the important technical data for the

Glossary and index

2 vehicle is listed here.

The glossary of technical terms explains

The table of contents and the index are

A warning draws your attention to possible

This symbol means that you have to do

A number of these symbols one after

This symbol indicates the page

This continuation symbol indicates an interrupted sequence

An environmental note gives you tips on the

This symbol in the glossary of

DaimlerChrysler's declared policy is one of

As fuel consumption and engine, brake and

A regularly serviced vehicle contributes to

Make sure that the tyre pressures are always correct.

Always have maintenance work carried out

Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration.

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit

Do not warm the engine up when the vehicle is stationary.

The objectives are for the natural resources

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally

Switch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.

Work incorrectly carried out on electronic

DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit

Mercedes-Benz original parts

Some of the safety systems only work when

2 Do not exchange Mercedes-Benz origi3

nal parts or authorised conversion

4 Only manufacture and assemble con5

version parts in accordance with the

Various warning stickers are attached to

Instrument panel switches, centre section

1 Side sun visor

8 Interior lighting switch unit

9 Telephone bracket with microphone for hands-free

Idling speed governor

k Cockpit switch units

On-road selector position

o Lane assist camera

p Driver's door control panel

v FleetBoard switch unit

Off-road selector position

q Light switch unit

s Telligent automatic gearshift unit